November 1970
Air Quality
Implementation
Planning Program
Volume I Operators Manual
Environmental Protection Agency
National Air Pollution Control Administration
Washington, D.C.
Contract No. PH 22-68-60
TRW)
SYSTtMS etOUf I
-------
SN 11130
AIR QUALITY
IMPLEMENTATION PLANNING
PROGRAM
ION I
X!
NOVEMBER 1970
Prepared for
Environmental Protection Agency
National Air Pollution Control Administration
Washington, D. C.
TRW,
SYSTEMS GROUP
-------
The work upon which this publication is based
was performed pursuant to Contract No. PH22-
68-60 with the U. S. Public Health Service,
Department of Health, Education and Welfare.
-------
PREFACE
In developing the Air Quality Implementation Planning Program de-
scribed in this manual, TRW Systems Group has been guided by the intent of
the Clean Air Act, as amended, as well as by extensive direct communication
with National Air Pollution Control Administration personnel.
We are particularly indebted to Jack R. Farmer, Pbilip Bierbaum and
Jerome B. Mersch, of the Division of Abatement, for their overall guidance
in this project. The Office of Program Development provided the original
impetus to the systems analysis approach to air pollution control through
their sponsorship of the Regional Air Pollution Analysis Project (RAPA).
The basic structure of the Air Quality Implementation Planning Program
evolved as a part of the RAPA project.
A large number of TRW people participated in this project; those with
the most direct involvement are listed below.
William Dickerson, Project Manager
John Diamante
Burton Goldstein
Donald Lewis
Janice Myers
Michael Stern
Troy Williams
Thomas Wright
-------
CONTENTS
Page
1.0 INTRODUCTION 1-1
1.1 Purpose 1-1
1.2 General Background 1-1
1.3 Basic Definitions and Concepts 1-2
1.4 Program Summary 1-4
2.0 IMPLEMENTATION PLANNING PROGRAM OVERVIEW (. 2-1
2.1 Scope of Program 2-1
2.2 Program Input Information |t 2-2
2.2.1 Meteorological Data 2-2
2.2.2 Air Quality Data >. /-3
2.2.3 Source Data ,. 2-3
2.2.4 Control Device and Regional Data 2-5
2.2.5 Emissions Standards Data 2-5
2.3 Program Structure 2-6
2.3.1 Source Data Management Program 2-9
2.3.2 Air Pollutant Concentration Segment i. 2-9
2.3.3 The Control Cost Segment 2-10
2.3.4 Control Strategies Segment 2-11
3.0 SOURCE DATA MANAGEMENT PROGRAM 3-1
3.1 Introduction ,. 3-1
3.2 Input Information 3-1
3.2.1 Point Source Data 3-1
3.2.2 Area Source Data '. 3-8
3.3 Program Operation. :. 3-10
3.4 Program Output 3-10
4.0 AIR POLLUTANT CONCENTRATION SEGMENT 4-1
4.1 Purpose 4-1
4.2 Input Information. 4-2
I
4.2.1 Input Common to All Modes 4-2
4.2.2 Input for Calibration Mode ,. 4-4
4.2.3 Input for Receptor Concentration Mode 4-4
4.2.4 Input for Analysis Data Output Mode 4-5
-------
CONTENTS (Continued)
Page
A. 3.1 Calibration Procedure
4.3.2 Diffustion Model Description
A. 3. 3 Analysis Data Tables
A. A Program Output
A.A.I Calibration Results
A. A. 2 Generalized Receptor Output
A. A. 3 Source Contribution File Output . . .' . . .
A. A. A Analysis Data Output
A. 5 Source Contribution File Merge Program
5.0 CONTROL COST SEGMENT
5.1 Purpose
5.2 Input Information
5.2.1 Source Information
5-2.2 Regional Information
5.2.3 Control Device Information
5.3 Control Measures
5. A Program Operations
5. A.I Assignment of Control Devices
5. A. 2 Cost Calculations
5. A. 3 Fuel Substitution
5.5 Program Output
5.6 The Control Cost File Update Program
6.0 CONTROL STRATEGIES SEGMENT
6.1 Purpose
6.2 Emission Standards Program
6.2.1 Emission Standards Input
6.2.2 Emission Standards Program Operation . . .
6.2.3 Emission Standards Program Output
6.3 Emission Standards File Update Program
6. A Regional Strategies Program
6. A.I Regional Strategies Program Input
6. A. 2 Regional Strategies Program Operation . . .
6. A. 3 Regional Strategies Program Output
. . . . t-o
. . . . 4-6
. . . . 4-9
. . . . 4-19
. . . . A-2A
. . . . A-2A
. . . . A-25
. . . . A-25
. . . . A-26
. . . . A-27
. . . . 5-1
. . . . 5-1
. . . . 51
. . . . 52
. . . . 5-3
. . . . 5-4
. . . . 5-6
. . . . 5-12
. . . . 5-12
. . . . 5 35
. . . . 5-A8
. . . . 5-57
. . . . 5-59
6-1
. . . .: 6-1
. . . . 6-2
. . . . 6-2
. . . . 6-26
. . . . 6-33
. . . . 6-3A
. . . . 6-35
. . . . 6-35
. . . . 6-37
. . . . 6-38
-------
CONTENTS (Continued)
Page
7.0 USER'S GUIDE 7-1
7.1 Introduction 7-1
7.1.1 Guide Organization 7-1
7.1.2 General Setup Information 7-1
7.2 Source Data Management Program 7-5
7.2.1 Description 7-5
7-2.2 JCL and Deck Setup 7-7
7.2.3 Input 7-7
7.2.4 Output 7-24
7.3 Air Pollutant Concentration Program 7-27
7.3.1 Description 7-27
7.3.2 JCL and Deck Setup 7-27
7.3.3 Input 7-31
7.3.4 Output 7-31
7.4 Source Contribution File Merge Program 7-51
7.4.1 Description 7-51
7.4,.2 JCL and Deck Setup 7-51
7.4..3 Input 7-51
7.4,.4 Output 7-56
7.5 Control Cost Program , 7-57
7.5.1 Description 7-57
7.5.2 JCL and Deck Setup 7-57
7.5.3 Input 7-57
7.5.4 Output 7-68
7.6 Control Cost File Update Program 7-74
7.6.1 Description 7-74
7.6.2 JCL and Deck Setup 7-74
7.6.3 Input 7-74
7.6.4 Output 7-81
7.7 Emission Standards Program 7-83
7.7.1 Description 7-83
7.7.2 JCL and Deck Setup 7-83
7.7.3 Input 7-86
7.7.4 Output 7-103
-------
CONTENTS (Continued)
7.8 Emission Standards File Update Program 7-107
7.8.1 Description 7-107
7.8.2 JCL Cards and Deck Setup 7-107
7.8.3 Porgram Input 7-107
7.8.4 Program Outputs 7-114
7.9 Regional Strategies Program 7-115
7.9.1 Description 7-115
7.9.2 JCL and Deck Setup ' 7-116
7.9.3 Input 7-116
7.9.4 Output 7-116
8.0 PROGRAM MESSAGES 8-1
8.1 Purpose 8-1
8.2 Source Data Management Program - Error Messages 8-1
i
8.3 Air Pollutant Concentration Program -
Diagnostic Messages '. 8-4
8.4 Source Contribution File Merge Program ,. 8-4
8.5 The Control Cost Program - Diagnostic Messages 8-4
8.6 The Control Cost File Update Program - Error Messages . . . 8-8
8.7 The Emission Standards Program - Diagnostic Messages. . . . 8-8
8.8 Emission Standards File Update Program - Error Messages . . 8-11
8.9 Regional Strategies Program - Diagnostic Messages . . . . . 8-12
9.0 COMPUTER REQUIREMENTS ,. 9-1
9.1 Purpose 9-1
9.2 General Computer Requirements 9-1
9.3 Execution Time 9-2
9.4 Core Requirements 9-2
10.0 REFERENCES 10-1
APPENDIX A A-l
APPENDIX B B-l
-------
ILLUSTRATIONS
Figure No. Page
2-1 Typical Emission Standard Curve Relation to Control
Device Application 2-7
2-2 Implementation Planning Program Structure 2-8
4-1 Scatter Diagram 4-7
4-2 Source Coordinate System for Diffusion Model 4-9
4-3 Interpolation of Wind Directions 4-11
4-4 Virtual Point Source Concept 4-17
4-5 Area Utilization Concepts 4-18
4-6 Lognormal Distribution of Samples 4-21
6-1 Allowable Sulfur Dioxide Emissions as Related to
Potential Emission Rates (EST05, 06, 07) 6-9
6-2 Allowable Particulate Emissions Related to Potential
Emission Rates (EST05) 6-10
6-3 Allowable Particulate Emissions Related to Potential
Emission Rates (EST06) 6-11
6-4 Allowable Particulate Emissions Related to Potential
Emission Rates (EST07) 6-12
6-5 Allowable Sulfur Dioxide Emissions Based on Heat Input
Capacity (EST08, 09, 10) 6-13
6-6 Allowable Particulate Emissions Based on Input Heat
Capacity (EST08, 10) 6-14
6-7 Allowable Particulate Emissions Based on Input Heat
Capacity (EST09) 6-15
6-8 Allowable Sulfur Dioxide Emissions Based on Heat Input
and Stack Height (EST11) 6-16
6-9 Allowable Particulate Emissions Based on Heat Input and
Stack Height (EST11) 6-17
6-10 Allowable Particulate and Sulfur Dioxide Emissions Based
on Effective Stack Height (EST12) 6-18
6-11 Allowable Particulate Emissions Based on Industrial
Process Weight (EST18) 6-19
6-12 Allowable Particulate Emissions Based on Solid Waste
Process Weight (EST18) 6-20
6-13 Allowable Sulfur Dioxide Emissions Based on Industrial*
Process Weight (EST18, 19, 20) 6-21
6-14 Allowable Particulate Emissions Based on Industrial
Process Weight (EST19) > 6-22
-------
ILLUSTRATIONS (Continued)
Figure No. Page
6-15
6-16
6-17
7.1-1
7.2-1
7.2-2
7.2-3
7.2-4
7.2-5
7.2-6
7.2-7
7.2-8
7.3-1
7.3-2
7.3-3
7.3-4
7.3-5
7.3-6
7.3-7
7.3-8
7.3-9
7.3-10
7.3-11
7.3-12
7.3-13
7.4-1
Allowable Particulate Emissions Based on Solid Waste
Process Weight (EST19)
Allowable Particulate Emissions Based on Industrial
Process Weight (EST20)
Allowable Particulate Emission Based on Solid Waste
Process Weight (EST20)
Implementation Planning Program Sequence
Source Data Management Program Major Functions
Example Deck Configuration for Source File Update and
List Run
Example JCL Card Setup for Source File Update and
List Run
Example JCL Card Setup for Source File Create and
List Run
Point Source Data Form
Area Source Data Form
Output Format - Point Source Listing
Output Format - Area Source Listing
Air Pollutant Concentration Program Flow
Example Deck Configuration for the Air Pollutant
Concentration Program
Example JCL Card Setup for the Air Pollutant Concentration
Program
Example Input Data Form for the Air Pollutant Concentra-
tion Program .
Output Format - Source Data
Output Format - Stability Wind Rose Data
Output Format - Regional Data
Output Format - Correlation Data
Output Format - Regression Parameters
Output Format - Receptor Concentration Data
Output Format - Pollutant Concentration Above Standard
Output Format - Statistical Data at Selected Receptors
Output Format - Source Contributions to Five Receptors
Example JCL Card Setup for the Source Contribution File
Merge Program
6-23
6-24
6-25
7-2
7-6
7-8
7-9
7-10
7-20
7-23
7-25
7-26
7-28
7-29
7-30
7-37
7-38
7-39
7-41
7-42
7-43
7-45
7-46
7-47
7-49
7-53
-------
ILLUSTRATIONS (Continued)
Figure No. Page
7.4-2 Example Job Step Sequence for the Source Contribution
7.5-1
7.5-2
7.5-3
7.5-4
7.5-5
7.5-6
7.5-7
7.5-8
7.6-1
7.6-2
7.6-3
7.6-4
7.7-1
7.7-2
7.7-3
7.7-4
7.7-5
7.7-6
7.8-1
7.8-2
7.8-3
7.8-4
7. ,9-1
File Merge Program
Control Cost Program Flow
Example Deck Configuration for the Control Cost Program
Example JCL Card Setup for the Control Cost Program . .
Example Input Data Form for the Control Cost Program . .
Output Format - Regional Data
Output Format - Device Data
Output Format - Device Application Data
Output Format - Control Cost Data
Example Deck Configuration for the Control Cost File
Update Program
Example JCL Card Setup for the Control Cost File Update
Program
Example Input Data Form for the Control Cost File
Update Program
Output Format for the Control Cost File Update
Program
Example Deck Configuration for the Emission Standards
Program
Example JCL Card Setup for the Emission Standards
Program
Example Input Data Set Configuration for the Emission
Standards Program
Example Input Data Form for the Emission Standards
Program
Output Format - Input Data
Output Format - Emission Standards Data
Emission Standards File Update Program Flow
Example Deck Configuration for the Emission Standards
File Update Program
Example JCL Card Setup for the Emission Standards File
Update Program
Example Input Data Form for the Emission Standards File
Update Program
Example Deck Configuration for the Regional Strategies
Program
7-55
7-58
7-59
7-60
7-66
7-69
7-71
7-72
1 7-73
7-75
7-76
7-80
7-82
7-84
7-85
7-87
7-102
7-104
7-105
7-108
7-109
7-110
7-113
7-117
-------
ILLUSTRATIONS (Continued)
Figure No. Page
7.9-2 Example JCL Card Setup for the Regional Strategies
Program 7-118
7.9-3 Example Input Data Form for the Regional Strategies
Program 7-124
7.9-4 Output Format - Input Control Strategy 7-125
7.9-5 Output Format - Emission Standards Effects ....... 7-127
7.9-6 Output Format - Jurisdiction Summary 7-128
7.9-7 Output Format - Ground Level Concentrations 7-131
7.9-8 Output Format - Control Strategy Summary . 7-132
7.9-9 Output Format - Projected Emission Inventory 7-133
7.9-10 Output Format - Projected Emission Summary 7-135
7.9-11 Output Format - Projected Ground Level Concentrations . . 7-136
-------
TABLES
Table No. Page
2-1 METEOROLOGICAL DATA ELEMENTS 2-2
2-2 AIR QUALITY DATA ELEMENTS 2-3
2-3 SOURCE EMISSION CATEGORIES 2-4
2-4 POINT SOURCE EMISSION INVENTORY DATA ELEMENTS 2-4
2-5 AREA SOURCE EMISSION INVENTORY DATA ELEMENTS 2-5
2-6 CONTROL DEVICE AND REGIONAL DATA 2-5
3-1 SOURCE FILE INPUT 3-2
4-1 CALIBRATION OPTIONS 4-8
4-2 COEFFICIENTS FOR a CALCULATION 4-14
z
4-3 VALUES OF Z FOR VARIOUS FREQUENCIES 4-22
4-4 VALUES OF Z FOR CALCULATING THE MAXIMUM CONCENTRATION . . 4-23
5-1 POLLUTION REDUCTION DEVICES OR METHODS 5-7
5-2 APPLICABLE CONTROL DEVICES 5-14
5-3 STANDARDIZED SOURCE TYPES 5-17
5-4 EXISTING DEVICE CORRECTION FACTORS 5-34
5-5 MANUFACTURER'S PRICE 5-36
5-6 FUEL PARAMETERS 5-49
5-7 BOILER EFFICIENCES 5-50
5-8 (f.) COAL PARTICULATE EMISSION FACTORS 5-51
5-9 (f,) OIL AND GAS PARTICULATE EMISSION FACTORS 5-52
6-1 EMISSION STANDARDS 6-5
7.2-1 ACTION CARD FORMAT 7-11
7.2-2 POINT SOURCE INPUT FORMAT 7-13
7.2-3 AREA SOURCE INPUT FORMAT 7-21
7.3-1 PUNCHED CARD INPUT FOR THE AIR POLLUTANT CONCENTRATION
PROGRAM 7-32
7.3-2 PUNCHED CARD FORMAT FOR OUTPUT CONCENTRATION DATA DECK . . 7-50
7.4-1 SOURCE CONTRIBUTION FILE 7-52
-------
TABLES (Continued)
Table No. Page
7.5-1 PUNCHED CARD INPUT FOR CONTROL COST PROGRAM 7-61
7.5-2 CONTROL DEVICE PRESET DATA 7-67
7.6-1 PUNCHED CARD INPUT FOR THE CONTROL COST FILE UPDATE
PROGRAM 7-77
7.7-1 PUNCHED CARD INPUT FOR THE EMISSION STANDARDS PROGRAM . . 7-88
7.7-2 PRESET PARAMETERS IN EACH EMISSION STANDARD (SULFUR
OXIDE CONTROL STANDARDS) 7-94
7.7-3 PRESET PARAMETERS IN EACH EMISSION STANDARD (PARTICULATE
CONTROL STANDARDS) 7-98
7.8-1 PUNCHED CARD INPUT FOR EMISSION STANDARDS FILE UPDATE
PROGRAM 7-111
7.9-1 PUNCHED CARD INPUTS FOR THE REGIONAL STRATEGIES PROGRAM 7-119
8-1 SOURCE FILE MAINTENANCE DIAGNOSTICS 8-2
8-2 AIR POLLUTANT CONCENTRATION PROGRAM MESSAGES 8-5
8-3 CONTROL COST PROGRAM DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES 8-6
8-4 EMISSION STANDARDS PROGRAM ERROR MESSAGES £-9
9-1 IMPLEMENTATION PLANNING PROGRAM CORE REQUIREMENTS .... 9-3
-------
-------
1.0 INTRODUCTION
1.1 PURPOSE
The Implementation Planning Program is a collection of computer
programs designed to assist the state governments in preparing their
implementation plans for sulfur oxides and particulates. The regional air
quality implementation process is based on the application of a set of
stationary source emission controls in the form of emission standards.
The many combinations of these standards result in a variety of alternative
control strategies. Through application of computer simulation techniques,
the Implementation Planning Program is used in selecting appropriate
emission standards, evaluating the resulting air quality, and determining
the costs associated with the various alternative control strategies.
The Implementation Planning Program Manual is written in two volumes.
Volume I describes the individual programs, their input data requirements,
and the output information generated. It also provides a detailed user's
guide for the step-by-step preparation of inputs to the programs. Volume
II presents complete program listings and flow charts along with the input
and output for a sample test case. This second volume will assist the
user in installing the Implementation Planning Program at his facility.
1.2 GENERAL BACKGROUND
The Clean Air Act, as amended (42 U.S.C 1857 et seg.), provides for
an intergovernment system for the prevention and control of air pollution
on a regional basis. To put this system into operation, the Department of
Health, Education and Welfare (DREW) must designate air quality control
regions and issue air quality criteria and reports on control techniques.
State governments then adopt ambient air quality standards and plans for
implementation of the standards for the air quality control regions. The
standards and plans are submitted to DHEW for review.
A summary of the legislative history behind the Act is provided in
Appendix A, and a listing of the air quality control regions (as of
September 1970) designated by their central cities is shown in Appendix
B. Appendix C provides a listing of the National Air Pollution Control
-------
Administration's Regional Offices which can be contacted for assistance
in utilizing the Implementation Planning Program.
1.3 BASIC DEFINITIONS AND CONCEPTS
An implementation plan details all the steps to be taken for abatement
and control of emissions from existing sources of pollutants within an
air quality control region, to insure attainment of the ambient air quality
standards within a reasonable time. It also includes measures to prevent
urban and economic growth from adding to a region's air pollution problem.
An implementation plan should include at least the following major elements:
(1) information on existing source emissions and air quality data, (2)
control plan for achieving ambient air quality standards, (3) emergency
episode authority and procedures, (4) programs for monitoring air quality
and emissions from the sources, (5) description of required legal
authority, and (6) description of resources required by the plan.
The Implementation Planning Program described in this manual is
designed to assist the user in developing the second of these elements for
sulfur oxides and particulates.
An emission standard is a limitation placed on individual sources of
a particular pollutant. Generally speaking, an implementation plan will
specify different emission standards that are to be applied to different
types of sources of each pollutant. These emission standards may be
expressed in terms of mass of pollutant per unit gas volume or per unit
time and will usually vary according to the size of the source.
An emission control strategy consists of selected emission standards
covering all significant source types. The significant source types for
particulates consist of fuel combustion, industrial processes, and solid
waste disposal. For sulfur oxides, only fuel combustion and industrial
processes are considered. Each political jurisdiction within an air
quality control region may select a different emission control strategy.
When an emission control strategy is developed into legally enforce-
able requirements, it is then called a set of emission control regulations.
The legally enforceable emission control regulations should be the final
-------
product of a comprehensive assessment of the nature and extent of a,
region's pollution.
The assessment leading to the development of emission control regula-
tions includes a review of existing pollution levels, source types and
their emissions, and available control techniques; and projections of the
probable increase in source emissions due to urban and economic growth.
The process begins with the formulation of various emission control
strategies. Based on the regional assessment, these strategies should
then be evaluated by some systematic quantitative procedure to determine
which, if any, are capable of attaining the desired ambient air quality.
If more than one strategy should prove capable of achieving the desired
air quality, the one which minimizes overall costs or which offers signifi-
cant administrative advantages to the control agency would be selected.
The technique of computer simulation modeling employed in the Implementation
Planning Program offers such a systematic quantitative procedure. The
program enables the user to systematically evaluate a wide range of
emission control strategies (made up of emissions standards) as applied to
the point sources of emission defined for the air quality control region.
The term point source of emission is defined here as any individual
stationary source for which specific information is input to the
program. A point source is usually specified on the basis of a single
stack.
An area source includes the total emissions from all sources within
a given square area which are either too small or too numerous to specify
on an individual point-source basis. The total emissions for an area
source are assumed to be uniformly distributed over the area. Area
sources generally include small fuel combustion sources, on-site solid
waste disposal, mobile sources, etc. Data on area sources are input into
the program and are included in determining the ground level pollution
concentration values. While emissions standards are not applied directly
to area sources as is done with point sources, the program can include the
influence of changes in the contributions of these sources (due to estimated
effect of control regulations, urban growth, changes in fuel use patterns,
Federal controls on mobile sources, etc.) through a mechanism of scale and
-------
projection factors. The user must supply these factors along with the
emission standards in specifying an emission control strategy.
1.4 PROGRAM SUMMARY
The Implementation Planning Program contains a set of distinct pro-
grams which are designed to be run in sequence. The function and sequence
of operation for each program are:
(1) Source Data Management Program (punched card input). This
program creates, updates and lists the primary data file
(defined as the Source File). The Source File will
contain all sources of pollutants which may be considered
by the Implementation Planning Program.
(2) Air Pollutant Concentration Program (punched card and
Source File inputs). This program utilizes a diffusion
model to transform source emission data into average,
long-term, ground-level concentrations, and a statistical
portion to determine corresponding frequency distributions
for ground-level concentrations with short-term averaging
times. The output is presented on printed tables and
on magnetic tape, (defined as the Source Contribution
File).
(3) Source Contribution File Merge Program (all Source Contri-
bution Files created for a given region). This program
is designed to merge the files produced by multiple
(subregional) Air Pollutant Concentration Program runs
into a single, regional file.
(4) Control Cost Program (punched card and Source File inputs).
The purposes of this program are to simulate the appli-
cation of alternative control devices available to each
point source and to determine estimates of the total
annual cost and efficiency of pollutant removal for each
such application. The output is presented on printed
tables and on magnetic tape, defined as the Control Cost
File.
(5) Control Cost File Update Program (punched card and
Control Cost File inputs). This program allows the user
to correct or update information contained on an existing
Control Cost File. Use of this program will, in general,
reduce the number of control cost program runs required
to produce a complete, error-free Control Cost File.
Output is a corrected Control Cost File.
-------
(6) Emission Standards Program (punched card and Control
Cost File inputs). This program applies all candidate
emission standards to the sources within each applicable
political jurisdiction. The emission standard require-
ments are matched with the data on the Control Cost File
such that the most cost effective device for each point
source, under each standard, is produced. The output is
presented on printed tables and on magnetic tape, defined
as the Emission Standards File.
(7) Emissions Standards File Update Program (punched card
and Emission Standards File inputs). This program is
designed to update (i.e., change or add) emission
standard application data contained on an existing
Emission Standards File. As in (5), this program can
eliminate costly reruns of the Emission Standards
Program. Output is a corrected Emission Standards
File.
(8) Regional Strategies Program (punched card, Source File,
Emission Standards File and Source Contribution File
inputs). This program applies specified emission control
regulations and produces summary tables of the resulting
emission reductions, control cost-effectiveness, and air
quality values. The output from this program is the
culmination of the Implementation Planning Program. The
output becomes input for the determination of the Control
Plan for achieving ambient air quality standards.
The subsequent chapters present the actual operating details of
the individual programs. Chapters 3 through 6 describe the design and
detailed data requirements for the Source Data Management Program, the
Air Pollutant Concentration Segment [programs (2) and (3) above], the
Control Cost Segment [programs (4) and (5)], and the Control Strategies
Segment [programs (6), (7) and (8)], in that order. Chapter 7, a User's
Guide, provides exact input and output data formats and specific operating
instructions for the eight programs summarized above, which comprise the
Implementation Planning Program. Chapter 8 summarizes all warning and
error messages that could appear during the course of program operations.
Chapter 9 gives the detailed specification of the computer system required
for installation of the Implementation Planning Program. Chapter 10 and
the appendices provides general reference information.
-------
2. IMPLEMENTATION PLANNING
-------
2.0 IMPLEMENTATION PLANNING PROGRAM-OVERVIEW
2.1 SCOPE OF PROGRAM
The computer programs contained in the Implementation Planning
Program produce information that may be used to evaluate alternative
emission control strategies. To correctly interpret this information,
the user must be aware of the operational restrictions and input data
requirements of the program. This chapter provides the user with an over-
view of the general program restrictions, the data that must be supplied
to the program, and the operating sequence.
The applicability of the program is bounded by the following
operational characteristics:
The computer simulation takes into consideration two
pollutants: sulfur dioxide (S09) and particulate matter.
Although certain source data are expressed in short time
spans (days or months), the computer simulation is con-
cerned primarily with an annual time scale. The program
will, however, produce short-term concentration ^values
at a limited number of points within the region for
comparison with short-term ambient air quality standards.
The selection and evaluation of emission standards in an
emission control strategy are done with respect to the
political jurisdictions within an air quality control
region. A maximum of ten political jurisdictions may be
represented in the program.
The emission standards evaluated by the program are
restricted to stationary point sources of pollution. The
point sources may include specific major fuel consumers,
large-scale incinerators, open burning dumps, and
industrial process sources. Although emission standards
may not be applied directly to area sources, the effects
of emission standards may be accounted for by input area
, source emission scaling factors. Area sources include the
numerous, small-scale sources of pollution, both public
and private.
The effects on air quality due to region growth are deter-
mined through use of input point and area source emission
rate projection factors.
The smallest computer configuration required to operate the program
is the IBM 360/40 system. However, larger facilities (such as the 360/50
-------
or 360/65) with appropriate peripheral equipment are compatible with the
program design. A more detailed specification of the required computer
system and the peripheral equipment is provided in Chapter 9.
2.2 PROGRAM INPUT INFORMATION
A wide variety of input information is required by the Implementation
Planning Program. This section offers the user a brief overview of the
classes of data, while Chapters 3, 4, 5 and 6 present specific data require-
ments for each segment of the program. The detailed input formats for each
segment are given in Chapter 7.
2.2.1 Meteorological Data
The meteorological data required by the Implementation Planning
Program are shown in Table 2-1. These data consist of those meteorological
elements which have an important effect on the transport and dispersion
of air pollutants.
TABLE 2-1
METEOROLOGICAL DATA ELEMENTS
STABILITY WIND ROSE (WIND DIRECTION, WIND SPEED,
STABILITY CLASS)
MIXING HEIGHT
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE
AMBIENT PRESSURE
The stability wind rose data give the relative frequency of occurrence
for each wind direction, wind speed class, and stability category combina-
tion as observed for the region and time period of interest. These data
influence the transport process and the degree of dilution of the
pollutant. The mixing height determines the amount of vertical mixing
possible. The third and fourth elements influence the plume rise.
These four meteorological data inputs are available from the
National Climatic Center (NCC) operated by the National Oceanic and Atmos-
pheric Administration (NOAA) in Asheville, North Carolina. Here all
meteorological data collected by Federal agencies are stored, tabulated,
and summarized.
-------
2.2.2 Air Quality Data
An air quality control region must have an air quality monitoring
network to provide data for comparison with ambient air quality standards,
analysis of emission control effects, and evaluation of emergency episode
conditions. The data from this network required by the program are shown
in Table 2-2.
TABLE 2-2
AIR QUALITY DATA ELEMENTS
SAMPLING STATION LOCATION
ANNUAL ARITHMETIC MEAN CONCENTRATION AT EACH STATION
BACKGROUND POLLUTANT CONCENTRATION VALUES
STANDARD GEOMETRIC DEVIATION (24-HOUR AVERAGE) AT EACH
STATION
The first three elements are used in the validation process for the
Air Pollutant Concentration Program. The last element is used in deter-
mining expected short-term pollutant concentration values.
2.2.3 Source Data
The source data must include information for all significant sources
within the region.
Several types of air pollution sources are encountered in any given
metropolitan area. Generally, these sources can be divided into four major
categories and several subcategories. Table 2-3 is the breakdown used by
the National Air Pollution Control Administration in presenting regional
emission inventory data.
Pollution sources within these categories are further divided
according to the two types: area sources and point sources. Area sources
consist of numerous small sources of emission. Such sources include
residential, commercial, governmental, institutional, and industrial fuel
combustion operations, on-site solid waste disposal, and mobile sources.
Point sources include major sources of emission, such as fuel users,
incinerators, open burning dumps, and industrial process sources. In
Table 2-3, principal sources in the first three categories are generally
-------
TABLE 2-3
SOURCE EMISSION CATEGORIES
FUEL COMBUSTION, STATIONARY SOURCES (Residential,
Commercial, Industrial, Steam-Electric Power Plants)
INDUSTRIAL PROCESSES
SOLID WASTE DISPOSAL (Incineration, Open Burning)
TRANSPORTATION, MOBILE SOURCES (Motor Vehicles, Aircraft,
Railroads, Ships)
considered point sources. They form the basis for a classification scheme
based on Standard Industrial Classification (SIC) categories. The fourth
category is included in the area source inventory along with those sources
in the first three categories, not specifically inventoried.
Input information on point and area sources, as required by the
program, is given in Chapters 3 and 7. Table 2-4 shows the major data
elements which must be specified for each point source; Table 2-5 depicts
the major data elements for area sources.
TABLE 2-4
POINT SOURCE EMISSION INVENTORY DATA ELEMENTS
IDENTIFICATION
LOCATION
SOURCE TYPE
EMISSION QUANTITIES
STACK INFORMATION
EXISTING CONTROLS
OPERATING SCHEDULES
FUEL USAGE AND CHARACTERISTICS
PROCESS RATE
-------
TABLE 2-5
AREA SOURCE EMISSION INVENTORY DATA ELEMENTS
LOCATION
EMISSION QUANTITIES AND EFFECTIVE RELEASE HEIGHT
AREA .
2.2.4 Control Device and Regional Data
The types of control device and regional data required by the
Implementation Planning Program are shown in Table 2-6. These data are
utilized by the Control Cost Segment to determine control device applica-
tion information. The control cost output information is then used in the
Control Strategies Segment to determine the effectiveness and cost of
alternate strategies.
TABLE 2-6
CONTROL DEVICE AND REGIONAL DATA
DEVICE IDENTIFICATION
DEVICE EFFICIENCY AND RATED LIFE
DEVICE LABOR REQUIREMENTS
DEVICE COSTS (PRICE, INSTALLATION, OPERATING)
DEVICE APPLICABILITY
LABOR COSTS
o ALTERNATE FUEL COSTS
UTILITIES COSTS
INTEREST RATE
2.2.5 Emissions Standards Data
Emissions standards which prohibit or restrict emissions of specific
pollutants into the atmosphere have long been a major tool used by
communities to combat air pollution. Many of the earlier emissions
standards were designed to affect a reduction in local nuisance problems.
-------
More recently, they have been adopted with a view toward achieving a gen-
eral improvement in the quality of a community's air resources.
The specific emission standards to be used as candidates for a
region's control strategy must be determined on the basis of many factors,
including the industrial mix and local availability of different fuel types
The Implementation Planning Program contains twenty-six different emission
standards types for the user's selection. The data defining each selected
emission standard may be changed when applied to different political
jurisdictions, pollutant types and/or source categories. The twenty-six
emission standard types include two general categories: (1) those which
specify allowable emissions directly (e.g., process weight standard), and
(2) those that imply an allowable emission rate (e.g., specification of a
particular process or fuel type). Figure 2-1 illustrates the former type.
2.3 PROGRAM STRUCTURE
The Implementation Planning Program is composed of a Source Data
Management Program and a series of distinct segments, as shown in Figure
2-2. The segments consist of the Air Pollutant Concentration Segment, the
Control Cost Segment and the Control Strategies Segment. Each segment is
itself composed of two or more computer programs.
The large numerals in Figure 2-2 indicate the sequence in which the
programs are normally executed. The chapter and section references are
given for the user's convenience. They indicate the sections in this
manual which provide detailed information on operations within each
segment. The User Validation operation, illustrated in the figure, is a
purely manual procedure. It is included here to emphasize the importance
of this step in the overall program application. If the Air Pollutant
Concentration Program is not validated, reliable air quality output from
either the Air Pollutant Concentration Segment or the Control Strategies
Segment cannot be obtained. However, the user should note that, even if
new air quality data are not obtained, the emission rate and cost-
effectiveness summaries produced are invaluable aids in determining his
control plan.
Summaries of the operational characteristics of each program are
given in the following subsections.
-------
~~1 ~1
CO
CO
CO
ALLOWABL EMISSION RANGE
PLANT CAPACITY
-------
1.
SOURCE DATA
MANAGEMENT
PROGRAM
Ref. Chap. 3
Section 7.2
RLUA CONCENTRATION SEGMENT
2.
AIR POLLUTANT
CONCENTRATION
PROGRAM
USER
VALIDATION
(MANUAL
Ref. Sec. 4.2-4.4, 7.3 Ref. Sec. 4.3
SOURCE
CONTRIBUTION
FILE MERGE
PROGRAM
Ref. Sec. 4.5, 7.4
S3
00
CONTROL COST SEGMENT
5. 6.
CONTROL
COST
PROGRAM
Ref. Sec. 5.2-5.5
7.5
CONTROL
COST FILE
UPDATE
PROGRAM
Ref. Sec. 5.6
7.6
7-
EMISSION
STANDARD!
PROGRAM
Ref. Sec. 6.2
7.7
CONTROL STRATEGIES SEGMENT
8. 9.
EMISSION
STANDARDS
:>IHINUMKU:>
PROGRAM
Ref. Sec. 6.3
7.8
REGIONAL
STRATEGIES
PROGRAM
Ref. Sec. 6.4
7.9
-------
2.3.1 Source Data Management Program
The Source Data Management Program is used to create and maintain
the permanent file (Source File) of point source and area source data.
Each record on the Source File corresponds to an individual point or
area source in the air quality control region. The Source File Management
Program may be used to delete or change any record on the Source File or to
add new records. The Source File provides direct input to the Air
Pollutant Concentration Program, the Control Cost Program and the Regional
Strategies Program.
Since the value range for the input data is quite large, only a
limited error-check procedure is accomplished by the program. As a result,
the user must carefully check the contents of the source data file for
errors. This file must be free of errors and inconsistencies before
proceeding with the application of other models.
2.3.2 Air Pollutant Concentration Segment
The major program in this segment, the Air Pollutant Concentration
Program, is designed to estimate the spatial distribution of sulfur
dioxide and particulate matter concentrations throughout the region. The
pollutant concentration output from this program is derived from (1) an
atmospheric diffusion model [Martin and Tikvart, 1968], which transforms
the regional source emissions and meteorological data for a given annual
(or other long-term) period into estimated ground-level arithmetic average
pollutant concentration values, and (2) a statistical model [Larsen, 1969]
which transforms the annual arithmetic mean concentration data (at a
limited number of stations) into expected maximum and short-term concen-
tration values for specified averaging times.
Validation of the program is accomplished through use of internally
calculated least-squares regression lines. These lines relate the esti-
mated arithmetic mean concentration values produced by the program to input
measured arithmetic mean pollutant concentration values.
Program output consists of data tables and a punched card deck
for the arithmetic mean pollutant concentration values and, if requested,
data tables for the short-term pollutant concentration values. The punched
card deck is designed for use with a plotter produce contour-line maps
-------
(isopleths) of the various concentration levels in the region. In addi-
tion to this output, the contribution from each source to each pollutant
receptor defined within the region is output on magnetic tape (defined as
the Source Contribution File) for use by the Regional Strategies Program.
The diffusion model and statistical calculations contained in the
Air Pollutant Concentration Program are essentially the same as the
corresponding parts of the Air Quality Display Model (AQDM) [February, 1970].
However, there has been some modification in the calibration procedures
and the method of data input has been revised. The AQDM was designed to
estimate only the spatial distribution of air quality levels in a region
and was primarily intended for use by the States in determining the exist-
ing air quality levels and setting ambient air quality standards. The
Implementation Planning Program is designed to assist the States in
determining how they can achieve these ambient air quality standards
through an emission control strategy.
The other program contained in the Air Pollutant Concentration
Segment is the Source Contribution File Merge Program.
If more than one run of the Air Pollutant Concentration Program is
required to provide the desired receptor density, the Source Contribution
File Merge Program must be used to combine the several output files into
a single file, as required by the Regional Strategies Program.
2.3.3 The Control Cost Segment
In general, each point source will have several control-measure
options for reducing its pollutant emissions to meet each applied emission
standard. The purposes of the Control Cost Program are to simulate the
application of the alternative control devices available to each point
source and to determine estimates of the total annual cost and efficiency
of pollutant removal for each such application. The output consists of
tables of control application data for each of the point sources defined
in the Source File. The data generated by the program are output in
printed tabular form and on magnetic tape (defined as the Control Cost
File) for use by the Emissions Standards Program.
Figure 2-1 illustrates the results from a typical application of
three control devices to a specific point source (e.g., an asphalt
-------
batching plant of a. particular size). The total annual costs shown include
the manufacturer's price, installation costs, annual capital charge, and
the operation and maintenance costs. In computing these major expense
items, the program takes into account factors such as equipment deprecia-
tion schedules, interest rates on capital, and cost or credit for pollutant
disposal. The program also considers region-dependent costs to account for
utilities costs, labor costs, etc.
Since a large number of input variables are involved, the output
from the Control Cost Program should be verified by the user. Major
errors usually require a rerun of the Control Cost Program. However, if
errors or emissions are found which may be corrected by the user, a rerun
of the Control Cost Program is not required. For such cases, the corrected
data may be input to the existing file through the Control Cost File
Update Program, the other program in the Control Cost Segment. This
Program is used to change existing device-source records on the file and
to list the contents of the file.
2.3.4 Control Strategies Segment
The function of the Control Strategies Segment is to apply a
specified control strategy so that the least costly control technology
that satisfies the appropriate emission standard is applied to each source.
The segment provides sufficient output information to evaluate the regional
impact of selected strategies from the standpoints of; (1) the types of
sources affected by the strategy; (2) the degree to which these sources are
affected in terms of control costs; (3) the resulting changes in pollutant
emissions; and (4) the regionally aggregated values of control costs by
source category, total reduction in pollutant emissions, changes in
regional fuel-use patterns, and resulting air quality levels.
The Control Strategies Segment performs the simulation process through
use of the Emissions Standards Program and the Regional Strategies Program.
The user first selects all candidate emission standards (e.g., Figure 2-1)
for consideration by the Emissions Standards Program. The program then
compares the requirements of each standard with the data generated by the
Control Cost Program. The program selects the most cost-effective device
for each point source under each standard. In the example shown in Figure
2-1, the program would select the wet scrubber.
-------
The data generated by the Emissions Standards Program are output in
the form of printed tables for user review and on magnetic tape (defined
as Emission Standards File) for use by the Regional Strategies Program.
The table output illustrates the actual control measures selected for each
source, the annual costs, and data on the degree to which emissions have
been controlled. As in the case of the Control Cost File, the Emission
Standards File should be checked for errors or omissions. If necessary,
this file may be updated by the Emissions Standards File Update Program.
This program is similar to the Source Data Management Program in that it
has full capabilities of changing, adding or deleting records.
Finally, the user selects a set of standards to be applied (i.e.,
an emission control strategy) by the Regional Strategies Program. The
program summarizes the existing, allowable and controlled emissions for the
sources and generates new air quality data based on allowable or existing
emission rates (whichever is less). Reduction of each area source emission
rate is accomplished by user input scale factors. The Regional Strategies
Program requires inputs from the Emission Standards File, the Source File
(area source data), and the Source Contribution File.
Output from the Regional Strategies Program consists of regional and
political jurisdictional summaries of regional costs, regional emissions,
number of sources affected by a given standard, and figures of merit for
each strategy (e.g., cost per ton of pollutant removed, cost per microgram
or per cubic meter of reduced ground-level concentrations).
Since the programs comprising the Implementation Planning Program
are interdependent, their efficient utilization requires the user to
carefully plan his overall goals and program execution sequence. In
general, the user should proceed in the following way:
(a) Create the Source File. Since this file is the basis of
the entire Implementation Planning Program operation, it
must be carefully checked for accuracy and completeness.
(b) Validate the Air Pollutant Concentration Program. It is
wise to perform this function as soon as possible since
inability to validate the program often leads to the
discovery of source data errors. Once the program is
validated, region-wide application of the Air Pollutant
Concentration Program may be completed any time prior to
the execution of the Regional Strategies Program. It is
-------
recommended, however, that the user proceed immediately
with the execution of this program since the number of
receptors specified for the entire region may require
several different (subregional) runs. If multiple runs
are required, the Source Contribution File Merge Program
must be used to produce a single Source Contribution File.
(c) Determine the Control Cost Program Input Data. This
includes a review of the pre-set control device data and
the built-in (unalterable except by program modification)
device application criteria. Since the device data are
punched card input, the user should check the currency of
the pre-sets and change them as necessary. (If new devices
are required or if the applicability of existing devices
is changed, a program modification is required.) If
additional SIC and process codes (which identify the
sources) are to be used, the device application for these
codes (up to a maximum of five codes) may be input without
a program change.
Finally, a set of region-dependent data must be input.
These data consist of the device installation and main-
tenance cost data and data on the fossil fuels available
in the region.
The Control Cost Program is then executed. Here again,
errors resulting from bad source data may be encountered.
If this happens, the Source File must be corrected and the
Control Cost Program rerun. Depending on the error, the
Air Pollutant Concentration Program may also have to be
rerun.
(d) At this point, the user should select the candidate emis-
sion control strategy for each political jurisdiction
defined in the region. This is done by setting up various
combinations of those emissions standards that are avail-
able within the program. Since, for each pollutant,
there are a maximum of 10 political jurisdictions and three
source categories (fuel combustion, industrial process;and
solid waste disposal) for each of the 26 standards, there
are over 700 possible strategies that may be applied.
Obviously, then, the user must select a limited set to be
tested. Once the set of strategies is determined, the
composite emission standards must be input to the
Emissions Standards Program, which is then executed. Once
again, if errors occur and are traced to source data
problems, both the Control Cost and Emission Standards
Programs may have to be rerun (or their update program
used).
(e) Now, the Regional Strategies Program may be executed.
First, however, the area sources should be scaled to
reflect emission controls compatible with the standards
-------
being applied. The area source scaling is based on
predicted emission reductions resulting from factors such
as regional fuel switches, mobile emissions control, space
heating changes due to urban and economic growth, etc.
In the same way, projection factors (which adjust the
future pattern of both point and area sources) are
selected and may be input to determine a "projection" run
based on a co-executed strategy run.
-------
3. SOURCE DATA MANAGEMENT
-------
3.0 SOURCE DATA MANAGEMENT PROGRAM
3.1 INTRODUCTION
As is the case with any simulation technique, the results obtained
can be no better than the inp.ut data. Computation of accurate air pollu-
tion related data is dependent on utilization of accurate and complete emis-
sion inventories and current data on control devices, fuel costs and their
required parameters. The importance of adequate inputs to the success-
ful operation of the Implementation Planning Program cannot be over empha-
sized. The input process for the Implementation Planning Program begins
with the creation of the Source File.
The Source Data File provides permanent storage for the point and
area source data required by the various Implementation Planning Program
Segments. This file is maintained by a Common Business Oriented Language
(COBOL) program which allows the user to create, update, and list the con-.
tents of the file.
3.2 INPUT INFORMATION
The point and area source data have specified input and storage
units. The set of data stored in the Source File and the input and stored
units are shown in Table 3-1.
A detailed description of each of these inputs is given in the
following subsections. Descriptions of those inputs unique to each of the
remaining Implementation Planning Program segments are given in subsequent
chapters. The input card formats are given in Section 7.2.
3.2.1 Point Source Data
Region Number. This three digit number identifies the air
quality control region in which the source is located. A
complete listing (as of September 1970) of air quality con-
trol regions and their designation numbers is presented in
Appendix B.
SIC Code. This four digit number, Standard Industrial
Classification code, has been devised and published by the
United States Department of Commerce to provide a uniform
identification of a variety of industrial, commercial,
and governmental operations. This code provides a con-
venient identification of point sources and is used in the
assignment of control devices by the Control Cost Program.
-------
TABLE 3-1
SOURCE FILE INPUT
Description
Point Source Data
Region Number
SIC Code
Site Number
Process Code
Descriptive Name
Location X (km)
Location Y (km)
Political Jurisdiction
Ownership
Source Type
SO- Emission (tons/day)
Particular Emission (tons/day)
Operating Time (hrs/year)
Shifts/Day
S02 Control Efficiency (existing, %)
Particular Control Efficiency (existing, %)
Control Device ID (existing)
Rated Capacity (10 BTU/hr)
Coal Heat Content (10 BTU/ton)
Residual Oil Heat Content (103BTU/gal)
Distillate Oil Heat Content (103BTU/gal)
Gas Heat Content (BTU/cu.ft.)
Coal Burned (tons/day)
Residual Oil Burned (gal/day)
Distillate Oil Burned (gal/day)
Gas Burned (103 ft /day)
Coal Sulfur Content (%)
Residual Oil Sulfur Content (%)
Distillate Oil Sulfur Content (%)
Gas Sulfur Content (%)
Editing Action
Identification field
no edit
Non-blank
Numeric, non-blank
Numeric, non-blank
Non-blank
P,L,S,F or U
B,P or S
At least one or both
must be non-blank
Numeric
Numeric
Numeric
Numeric
Alphanumeric
Convert to BTU/hr
Convert to BTU/ton
Convert to BTU/gal
Convert to BTU/gal
Numeric
Numeric
Numeric
Numeric
Convert to ft /day
Numeric
Numeric
Numeric
Numeric
-------
TABLE 3-1
SOURCE FILE INPUT (Continued)
Description
(Point Source Data)
Coal Ash Content (%)
Stack Height (ft)
Stack Temp.. (°F)
2
Normalized Plume Rise (ft /sec)
2
Maximum Process Rate (10 Ib/hr)
2
Maximum Exhaust Gas Vol. (10 ACFM)
Stack Diameter (ft)
Stack Velocity (ft/sec)
Use Factor
Area Source Data
Region Number
SIC Code
Site Number
Process Code
Location X (km)
Location Y (km)
Area (km )
Political Jurisdiction
Effective Stack Height (ft)
SO,, Emission Rate (tons/day)
Part. Emission Rate (tons/day)
Editing Action
Numeric
Convert to meters
o
Convert to K
Convert to square meters/sec
Convert to Ib/hr
Convert to ACFM
Convert to meters
Convert to meters/sec
Numeric
Identification field
no edit
Numeric, non-blank
Numeric, non-blank
Numeric, non-blank
Numeric, non-blank
Convert to meters
At least one or both
must be non-blank
-------
A complete listing of the SIC Codes used by the program is
presented in Chapter 5 (see Tables 5-2 and 5-3). The input
SIC code must be included in this list. (For exceptions to
this rule, see Subsection 5.2.3).
Site Number. This element is an arbitrary three digit source
identification assigned by the program user. Its function
is to uniquely identify point sources that may have identical
SIC and process code identifications.
Process Code. Together with the SIC code, this two digit
data element specifically identifies the process or opera-
tion causing the pollutant emission. A list of process
codes and a more complete description of their use within
the Implementation Planning Program are provided in
Chapter 5 (see Table 5-3). This element and the three
preceeding items make up the source identification field
which must be complete and unique for each source within
an air quality control region.
Descriptive Name. An alphabetic name, of up to 23
characters may be supplied by the user for each point
source. This item facilitates subsequent review and evalua-
tion of the Source File itself and of other program .outputs.
Location X, Location Y. These coordinates specify the source
location within the region. Although the origin of the
coordinate system utilized is arbitrary, it is recommended
that the Universal Transverse Mercator (UTM) system be
adapted. The Universal Transverse Mercator system [Depart-
ment of the Army, 1958 through 1967] is a convenient choice,
since almost all United States Geological Survey maps
utilize this system. In addition there is a growing body
of information being collected in this system. The X and Y
axes of the UTM system are oriented in the east and north
directions, respectively. Because of the way in which the
UTM system divides the globe into zones, care must be taken
when the region of interest involves more than one zone (not
a common occurrence, since the entire continental United
States is covered by only 10 zones). The Army Map Service
(AMS) has developed tables (TM5-241-2, Zone-to-Zone
Transformation) to be used for conversion from one UTM zone
to another. Assistance in using the UTM system may be
obtained from the nearest NAPCA Regional Office (Appendix C).
A local coordinate system may be used if desired, but the
origin must be far enough to the southwest that all
coordinates are positive. In either case, the coordinates
must be input in kilometers. The coordinate system chosen
for the source locations must also be used for subsequent
receptor, and sampling station coordinate specification.
Political Jurisdiction. All significant political jurisdic-
tion within an air quality control region should be identified
-------
and assigned consecutive code numbers (up to 10). As
the emission inventory is being compiled, the code number
representing the jurisdiction in which each source is
located must be included in the source record. In the con-
text of implementation planning, a significant political
jurisdiction is one which is empowered to adopt air pollu-
tion control regulations and for which a control strategy
distinct from the remainder of the region may be desired.
Ownership. Each point source must be characterized with
respect to its ownership. All sources are divided into the
following ownership categories; private (P), local govern-
ment (L), state government (S), Federal Government (F) and
utilities (U). This data element makes possible a more
meaningful interpretation of the simulation modeling
results.
Source Type. The type of each point source must be identi-
fied according to the following classification. Fuel com-
bustion sources should be coded (B), industrial process
source (P), and emission sdurces due to solid waste dis-
posal (S). This data element aids in the identification
and evaluation of the program output records.
S02 Emissions. The sulfur oxide emission rate (computed as
sulfur dioxide) of each source must be supplied by the user
in units of tons of pollutant emitted per day. This element
and the particulate rate (next item) are the basic data
obtained from the emission inventory and are used in every
segment of the .Implementation Planning Program (at least
one of these elements must have a non zero input). The
emission rates must represent the average daily rate, ton/
day taken over an annual period. This rate is equal to
the annual emission rate divided by 365.
Particulate Emissions. The average daily rate of total
particulate emissions, tons/day must be supplied in tons/
day.
Operating Time. The number of hours per year that each
source conducts operations is a required data input. This
data element makes possible the required conversion between
daily and hourly source rate parameters such as emission
rate and fuel use rates. These conversions are required in
the Control Cost Segment and Control Strategies Segment and
are further described in Chapters 5 and 6.
Shifts. The average number of eight hour shifts worked
daily must be determined and input for each emission source.
This item is used (with Operating Time) in converting the
time basis of various rates within the program. Shifts must
be consistent with Operating Time as defined by: Operating
Time = Shifts x 8 x 365. Thus the more accurate input should
be used to determine the other input.
-------
SC>2 Control Efficiency. The removal efficiency of sulfur
dioxide by an existing control measure must be input in
terms of percentage. Only SCU removal produced by pollu-
tion control equipment as distinguished from process or
production equipment should be considered under this item.
It is very important that this item be input correctly as
both the application of further pollution control (see
Chapter 5) and of the emission limitations set by the
emission standards (see Chapter 6) are dependent on this
value. If more than one device is in use, the total device
efficiency is used. This value must reflect the overall
removal efficiency experienced by the source.
Particulate Control Efficiency. The total efficiency of
all existing pollution control devices designed to remove
particulate matter must be input as the percentage removed.
The notes relating to definition and importance of control
efficiency presented in the previous paragraph also apply
to this data element.
Control Device (Existing). A three digit numeric code
identifying the existing pollution control device, if any,
may be input as a convenience to the user. A list of device
identification codes used in the Implementation Planning
Program is shown in Table 5-1. If the specific device in
use at a particular installation cannot be identified in
this listing, the user may devise his own coding system.
If more than one device is in use at a location, the
identification of the most efficient control device should
be input.
Boiler Rated Capacity. The design or maximum (whichever is
greater) capacity of the fuel combustion unit, in terms of
106 BTU/hr, is a required input for each fuel combustion
source. This item is based on the design or maximum operat-
ing characteristics of the source and not on the average
operating conditions. It is important that this item be
obtained for each combustion source as the application of
several emission standards in the Control Strategies
Segment depend on this value.
Coal Heat Content. This value must be input for each com-
bustion source which burns coal. It should represent the
average heat content of coal burned (units of 10^ BTU/ton)
at the particular source over an annual period. Along with
the other parameters defining the existing fuel-use pattern,
this item is required to determine the cost and effective-
ness of various fuel switching measures (see Chapter 5).
Residual Oil Heat Content. This element is used in the same
way as the previous item and must be input if residual fuel
oil is consumed at a source. Input units are 1C)3 BTU/
gallon.
-------
Distillate Oil Heat Content. If the fuel combustion source
uses distillate fuel oil, this item must be input. The use
and importance of this value within the program are the
same as for Coal Heat Content. Input units are 1(H BTU/
gallon.
2
Gas Heat Content. The heat content, in BTU/ft , must be
input if any gaseous fuel is burned. Generally, this will
represent the heat content of the natural gas available at
the source.
Coal Burned. This value represents the average daily con-
sumption of coal, over an annual period, and must be entered
for each combustion source if coal is burned (units of tons/
day). If the fuel is being used for space heat, the daily
quantity used will vary considerably throughout the year.
The average of the daily usages is required. (Daily usage
is equal to annual usage divided by 365). If this element
is non-zero for a source then the Coal Heat Content, Coal
Sulfur Content, and Coal Ash Content must be supplied by
the user. With the exception of the input Ash Content
these notes also apply to usage of the following three
fuel types.
Residual Oil Burned. This element, in units of gallons per
day, must be input for each combustion source which uses
residual oil.
Distillate Oil Burned. This element, in the units of gallons
per day, must be input for each fuel combustion source which
uses distillate oil.
Gas Burned. The average daily use of gaseous fuel must be
input for each fuel combustion source (input units 103 cubic
feet/day).
Coal Sulfur Content. The average percent sulfur by weight
must be input if coal is used as fuel at a source.
Residual Oil Sulfur Content. If residual fuel oil is burned
at a source, this element must be input, as a percentage by
weight.
Distillate Oil Sulfur Content. This parameter, as defined
in the previous paragraph, must be input if distillate fuel
oil is used.
Gas Sulfur Content. This element must be filled in if gaseous
fuel is utilized. The percent sulfur by weight is generally
very small or zero.
Coal Ash Content. This value represents the non^-combustible
fraction of coal expressed as a percent by weight. It must
be supplied if coal is burned at a particular source.
-------
Stack Height. The height of the stack, in feet above
ground level, must be supplied for every point source.
Stack Temperature. The temperature of the exhaust stream
at the stack exit must be input for each source. This
value should represent average operating conditions and be
expressed in units of degrees Fahrenheit.
Normalized Plume Rise. If the stack velocity or diameter
is not available for a particular source, or if the user
wishes to employ a plume rise equation different from the
Holland equation defined by Equation (11) in Chapter 4, then
an estimate of the plume rise may be input. Input units are
ft^/second.
Maximum Process Rate. This value must be input for all
industrial process or solid waste disposal sources. It
represents maximum design conditions rather than actual
operating practices. The input units are 10^ pounds per
hour. This item should include the weights of all solid or
liquid raw materials entering the process.
Maximum Exhaust Gas Volume. Again the design or maximum
(whichever is greater) conditions should be used in
specifying this parameter. This value must be input for
every point source. The input units are 10Z actual ft^/
minute (ACFM) and should represent the exhaust volume
released at the operating temperature and pressure of the
exhaust stack.
Stack Diameter. The inside physical diameter of the stack
exit (in feet) should be supplied by the user for each
source. If this parameter and the following parameter are
not known the normalized plume rise can be used as mentioned
above. If the normalized plume rise, stack diameter and
velocity are input as zero, the physical stack height will
be used as the effective stack height.
Stack Velocity. This item should be input for each source.
This is the average velocity of the exhaust gas stream in
feet per second.
Use Factor. This item must be supplied for all sources. It
is calculated by dividing the design or maximum (whichever
is greater) source capacity (e.g., maximum process rate) by
the source usage (e.g., actual process rate). This factor
is necessary to properly apply emission standards based on
potential emission rates.
3.2.2 Area Source Data
Area emission sources are comprised of a large number of small
pollutant emission sources (both mobile and stationary) which describe
-------
the emission density over a specified geographical area. The physical
data and identification relating to these small sources i's not sufficient
to permit creation of the detailed information that is available for the
large point sources. Accordingly, only a limited set of emission inventory
data is required for these source types.
Identification. A unique, numerical identification must be
supplied for each area source. This identification is com-
prised of 12 digits in the following order:
Region Identification as described for point
sources - first three digits.
9999 - digits 4 through 7. This number is used
throughout the program to identify area sources.
Site identification arbitrarily assigned by the
user - digits 8 through 11
0 - digit 12. This is required to maintain identi-
fication compatibility between point and area
sources.
Location X
The point source description of these parameters
Location Y also applies here. The location supplied for
each area source, in kilometer, must represent
the lower lefthand (southwest) corner of the
square grid for which emissions are being
reported.
Area. The physical size in square kilometers must be
supplied for all area sources included in the emissions
inventory.
Political Jurisdiction. The same political jurisdiction
divisions defined for the point sources must be utilized
to assign each area source to a political jurisdiction. If
an area for which emissions are computed extends into two
or more political jurisdictions, the emissions should be
proportionately divided between the several jurisdictions
and a separate area source record created, assigning the
appropriate emissions to each political jurisdiction. Each
of the records so created should list identical locations
and areas. This procedure will allow the preparation of
proper summary tables by political jurisdiction.
<> Effective Stack Height. An effective height of emission
must be estimated for each area source. This estimate is
usually based on knowledge of the average height and plume
rise characteristics of pollution released in the area.
The units for the item are feet.
-------
SO2 Emission Rate. The total aggregated sulfur dioxide
emission rates of all sources located within the area and
not included in the emission inventory as point sources must
be input by the user for each area source. These emissions
must be reported as average annual daily emissions (tons/
day). The tons/day value is equal to annual emission rate
divided by 365.
Particulate Emission Rate. This value, computed and reported
on the same basis as S02 emissions (tons/day), must be sup-
plied with each source record.
3.3 PROGRAM OPERATION
The source file maintenance program utilizes card input data to
create a sequentially stored data file. In addition, this program allows
the user to update and/or list the contents of a previously created file.
Operational characteristics of the program consist of the following items:
File Creation - The card input data is sorted, according
to source ID card number, edited, and a master file is
created. The edit function consists of checking the input
data for required entry form errors (numeric or alphabetic
fields, correct code letters, missing data, etc.) and con-
version to storage units. The storage units are used by
all calling programs. The edit function for each input
parameter is shown in Table 3-1. If input errors are found,
a message identifying the error is printed and the source
record is not loaded.
File Update - The update input data is sorted, edited, and
merged with the master file. The update edit function is
the same as in the creation of the file. The user may
delete records, update data or add new records.
File Listing - A formatted listing of the data, in the
order contained in the file, may be obtained by executing
the data management program with a list card.
Although each of these management program functions are separate job
steps, file creation and file listing or file update and file listing
combinations may be obtained within a single run. Detailed operating
instructions are given in Section 7.2.
3.4 PROGRAM OUTPUT
The program output, obtained through the File listing operation
described above, consists of all data shown in Table 3-1 after conversion
to storage units. An example file listing is shown in Subsection 7.2.
-------
4. AIR POLLUTANT
-------
4.0 AIR POLLUTANT CONCENTRATION SEGMENT
4.1 PURPOSE
The Air Pollutant Concentration Segment consists of an Air Pollutant
Concentration Program, which produces sulfur dioxide and particulate matter
concentration values, and a Source Contribution File Merge Program which
merges output files from multiple (sub-regional) Air Pollutant Concentra-
tion Program runs. The uses and operating procedures for the Source Con-
tribution File Merge Program are given in Section 4.5. The remaining
sections in this chapter describe the Air Pollutant Concentration Program.
The purpose of the Air Pollutant Concentration Program is to provide
printed output: of existing air quality data and to provide source contri-
bution data to the Regional Strategies Program. Through a mathematical
simulation of the atmospheric diffusion process [Martin and Tikvart, 1968],
the program determines the estimated arithmetic average pollutant concen-
trations at ground level over an annual period. The resulting spatial
distribution of average concentration values is output in both tabular and
punched-card form.- In addition, the spatial distributions of average con-
centration values resulting from each source are output on magnetic tape
(defined as the Source Contribution File). This file is utilized by the
Regional Strategies Program to determine air quality data after application
of emission standards. To provide estimates of short term pollutant values,
a statistical model [Larsen, 1969] is used to transform the average con-
centration data from a limited number of receptor points into maximum and
various percentile concentration values.
The Air Pollutant Concentration Program has three basic modes of
operation which differ according to the way in which they utilize the simu-
lation to perform various functions. Each run of the program will consist
of some combination of these modes.
(a) A Calibration Mode designed to calibrate the estimated
arithmetic mean pollutant concentration output from the
diffusion model with available measured air'quality data
input by the user. The procedure involves determination
of least-squares regression lines which relate the meas-
ured and estimated concentration values for each pollutant.
The regression lines are then used in the diffusion model
during the receptor concentration mode of operation.
-------
(b) A Receptor Concentration Mode which uses the calibrated
diffusion model to calculate the total calibrated
arithmetic mean pollutant concentration values at selected
receptor points throughout the region. A set of values
may be calculated for each of the two pollutant types.
This data is then output in tabular form. If requested,
the data will also be output in punched card form for use
in contour plot applications. This segment also creates
the Source Contribution File which is required by the
Regional Strategies Program (Section 6.4). The Source
Contribution File contains the uncalibrated pollutant
contributions from each source to each receptor, the cali-
bration constants and the background concentration values.
In conjunction with this mode of operation, the following
mode may be specified.
(c) An Analysis Data Output Mode in which the mean concen-
tration data is used to produce the following types of
data tables for each pollutant considered.
(1) Excess Table - Lists those receptors which exceed
an input regional ambient air quality standard and
provides information on the point and area source
contributions to each such receptor.
(2) Statistical Table - Lists maximum and three selected
percentile concentration values for 12 selected
receptors. The table may be repeated for each of
five selected averaging times.
(3) Source Contribution Table - Lists the individual
source contributions to the five highest-concentra-
tion receptors or, if desired, to five selected
receptors.
4.2 INPUT INFORMATION
Program input data is obtained from both the Source File (see Chapter
3.0) and from punched cards. The types of input data required for each of
the operational modes of the program are described in the following sec-
tions. The detailed data input methods for the Source File and the Air
Pollutant Concentration Program are given in Sections 7.2 and 7.3, re-
spectively.
4.2.1 Input Common to All Modes
The source file data and certain punched card data are required for
execution of each of the basic program operational modes. In particular,
this common data consists of:
-------
(a) Source Data. Both area and point source data are sup-
plied by the Source File. For point sources, the loca-
tion, average emission rate (tons/day) for each pollutant,
and the stack parameters (or a normalized plume rise
value) are provided. The stack parameters, which include
physical stack height, stack exit diameter, effluent exit
velocity and effluent temperature, are used to obtain the
effective height of release (i.e., the height at which the
plume becomes horizontal) for use in the diffusion calcula-
tions. For each area source (assumed to be square in
shape) the Source File provides the area, average emission
rate (tons/day) for each pollutant, and an assumed effec-
tive height of release.
The remaining common data is input in punched card form.
(b) Stability Wind Rose Data. This data gives the relative
frequency of occurrence for each combination of wind
direction, wind speed class, and stability category as
observed for the region and time period of interest. Al-
though the wind direction is a continuous variable, for
purposes of computation it is specified in sectors cor-
responding to 16-point compass headings, with sectors 1
through 16 corresponding to winds blowing from the direc-
tions N, NNE, NE, ..., NW, and NNW, respectively. Sim-
ilarly, for calculation purposes, the model employs 5
representative values of stability class and 6 represen-
tative wind speeds. Since there are 5 stability classes,
16 wind directions, and 6 wind speed classes in the model,
the complete set of stability wind rose data consists of
480 frequency values. When summed over all categories,
the relative frequency is 1.0. The program utilizes a
single set of stability wind rose data for the region.
(c) Mixing Height. The mixing height defines the layer of
the atmosphere above the surface through which the pol-
lutant is mixed. Since this height has large seasonal,
daily, and diurnal variations it is practical to account
for only major changes. The program uses a single input
value and modifies it according to the stability class.
If the mixing-height value is not available, it may be
estimated from Holzworth's [1964] estimates of the monthly
mean afternoon mixing heights in the contiguous United
States.
(d) Ambient Temperature and Pressure. Ambient temperature
(°K) and pressure (mb) values are input for use in
calculating the effective stack height.
(e) Pollutant Decay Factors. To account for the decay of
pollutants in the atmosphere, each pollutant may be
assigned a half-life value (hrs). For SO^, a half-life
on the order of three hours is appropriate.
-------
(f) Background Concentration. For each pollutant, a value
for the background concentration (ug/m^)* may be speci-
fied. The background concentration is applied uniformly
throughout the region and is assumed to be independent
of the sources within the region.
4.2.2 Input for Calibration Mode
In addition to the common data described above, the following punched
card input data is required for calibration of the diffusion model.
Measured Air Quality Data. For each pollutant for which the
diffusion model is to be calibrated, data from 3 to 100 meas-
uring stations may be specified. The data includes station
locations (which may differ for each pollutant type) and
measured arithmetic mean concentration levels (yg/m^) . Station
locations are specified with respect to the same origin used
to specify the emission source locations.
4.2.3 Input for Receptor Concentration Mode
In addition to the common data, the following punched card input
data is required for execution of the Receptor Concentration Mode of
operation.
(a) Basic Receptor Data. Up to 225 regularly spaced recep-
tors may be specified, together with 50 individually
located receptors. These receptor locations are used for
both pollutants (particulate and sulfur oxides). The reg-
ularly spaced receptors are defined by intersections in
a grid pattern having equidistant vertical and horizontal
spacing. The grid pattern is determined by the location
of its southwest corner (with respect to the source ori-
gin), the number of rows and columns of receptors, and
the distance between adjacent rows and columns.
For identification purposes, the receptors are numbered
consecutively, starting with the southwest corner of
the grid pattern, running through the columns, and ending
with the individually located receptors. This basic set
of receptor identification numbers is used to specify
particular receptors for output purposes.
(b) Correlation Data. The regression coefficients obtained
from the Calibration Mode (or from any applicable valida-
tion procedure) must be input. One set of coefficients
is required for each pollutant.
= micrograms per cubic meter.
-------
4.2.4 Input for Analysis Data Output Mode
In addition to the input data required by the Receptor Concentration
Mode, this operational mode requires special card inputs (which vary with
the form of the output desired).
For the Excess Table; .
Ambient Air Quality Standards. For each pollutant considered,
the arithmetic mean concentration value (yg/m3) not to be
exceeded must be specified.
For.the Statistical Table: , -
(a) Output Receptor Selection. For each pollutant, a maxi-
mum of 12 output receptor locations may be selected from
the basic receptor set (defined in Section 4.2.3) .
(b) Standard Geometric Deviation. For each of the selected
output receptors, a standard geometric deviation value
for a 24-hour averaging time must be input for each pol-
lutant (the program automatically converts this value to
the desired output averaging time). For output receptors
located at measuring sites, the standard geometric devia-
tion values will be obtained from the measuring station
data. For output receptors not located at measuring.sites,
. the standard geometric deviations must be interpolated from
nearby measuring station values.
(c) Averaging Time. Up to 5 different averaging times for
each pollutant type may be specified. A set of data will
be output for each averaging time selected.
(d) Output Percentile Values. Up to three percentile values
may be specified for each pollutant.
For the Source Contribution Table (Selected Receptors Option):
Output Receptor Selection. For each pollutant,.five receptors
(selected from the basic receptor set) may be specified for
source contribution output.
For the Source Contribution Table (Maximum Concentrations Option):
No Special Data Requirements. For each pollutant, the program
will utilize the 5 receptors of highest concentration.
-------
4.3 PROGRAM OPERATION
This section presents a description of the operations and data
manipulations involved in operation of the program.
4.3.1 Calibration Procedure
The calibration procedure, repeated for each pollutant, begins with
the use of the diffusion model to calculate the concentration values at
each of the input measuring sites. Since the calculated concentration
values at the measuring sites do not include a background concentration,
(as the measured values do) direct comparison between the two is not de-
sirable. To enable a direct comparison, (i.e., correlation) to be made,
the program will subtract the background concentration from each of the
measured values. For descriptive purposes, the measured minus background
concentrations are defined here as "observed concentrations."
A least-square regression line of observed concentration values on
calculated values is then obtained. This procedure is used to determine
the straight line which best fits the plot of calculated versus observed
concentrations. The scatter diagram shown in Figure 4-1 illustrates the
procedure. Each point plotted represents both the calculated and observed
concentration values at a given receptor. For each pollutant then, there
is a regression line:
*P ' AP + BP V (1)
where
Xp = observed concentration (measured minus background)
of pollutant p
X = calculated concentration of pollutant p
A = y-axis (observed concentration) intercept of best-
fit line for pollutant p data
B = slope of best-fit line for pollutant p data.
If the regression line adequately describes the relationship between
the observed and calculated concentration values, it may then be applied
to the region in general (within the range of calculated values used to de-
termine the regression line). The Air Pollutant Concentration program out-
put would thus be adjusted at each receptor point according to the
equation:
-------
-------
acceptable correlation is still unattainable, the model assumptions should
be reviewed by a meteorologist familiar with such modeling techniques.
If only a limited number of measured concentration values are avail-
able (fewer than 20 for most regions), or if their locations cover only a
small portion of the region, calibration of the model may not be meaning-
ful. However, it would still be of interest to check the model output
with available measured data. In this way at least a partial check of the
model's adequacy can be made. So that such checks may be performed and
the regression results analyzed prior to region-wide application, the
program has the options shown in Table 4-1.
TABLE 4-1
CALIBRATION OPTIONS
Option Calibration Application
0 The user must input the regression
constants A and B (and the appropriate
background concentration values (x^) )
oG p
The program will apply the resulting
regression line equations to the cal-
culated concentration values prior to
output.
1 The program will determine the regres-
sion lines and, if correlation is
statistically significant, will adjust
calculated concentration values ac-
cordingly. If the correlation is poor,
the calculated concentrations will be
output without adjustment and a message
printed to indicate that correlation
was not statistically significant. In
either case, the calculated regression
constants and correlation coefficients
are output.
2 The program will determine the regres-
sion lines and correlation coefficients
and stop.
Since model calibration is usually a trial-and-error process in-
volving refinement of the input data, Option 2 is most economical. Once
good correlation has been achieved, Option 0 can be used. (Note, however,
-------
that if input background values are used when determining the coefficients
Ap and Bp in Option 2, then the same background input values must be used
in Option 0.)
4.3.2 Diffusion Model Description
The atmospheric diffusion model is based upon a diffusion model
developed by Martin and Tikvart [1968]. The basic output of the model is
in the form of calculated long term average pollutant concentrations at
ground level. Concentrations for short periods (1 hour, 8 hours, etc.)
are estimated by means of a statistical technique developed by Larsen [1969]
and are discussed in Section 4.3.3.
The Martin-Tikvart model calculates concentrations downwind from a
set of point and area sources on the basis of the Pasquill [1962] point
source formulation. A description of the process follows:
The stack in Figure 4-2 represents a typical elevated point source.
The coordinate system for this source has its origin at ground level 'at the
base of the stack (i.e., directly below the effective point of emission).
The xaxis extends horizontally in the mean wind direction. The y-axis is
horizontal in the cross-wind (and cross-plume) direction. The z-axis is
vertical.
EFFECTIVE
STACK HEIGHT
Figure 4-2. Source Coordinate System for Diffusion Model.
The "effective stack height" (or effective height of emission re-
lease) is the height at which the plume center line becomes horizontal.
-------
The effective stack height is the sum of the physical stack height and an
incremental factor related to the buoyancy and vertical momentum of the
effluent.
The concentration, x> at a position (x,y,z) for pollutants emitted
at (0,0,h) is given by
X(x,y,z; h) =
106Q
exp I - -z
(3)
+ exp
where:
X(x,y,z; h) = pollutant concentration, micrograms/meter , at point
x,y,z for an effective stack height h.
Q = emission rate, grams/sec.
u = mean wind speed, meters/sec.
a ,a = standard deviation of the plume concentration distri-
Z bution in the cross-plume and vertical directions,
meters. (ay and CTZ are given as functions of down-
wind distance and atmospheric stability, Gifford [1961])
Equation (3) is based upon several assumptions, including:
(a) Total reflection of the plume takes place at the earth's
surface.
(b) The time-averaged plume exhibits a Gaussian distribution
of concentrations in the cross-plume and vertical dimen-
sions. The measures of the spread in both directions
(the standard deviations) are considered to be a function
of downwind distance and atmospheric stability only.
(c) The plume is a steady-state phenomenon resulting from a
constant, continuous emission source, and none of the
effluent "disappears" (by chemical change or by absorp-
tion on the ground surface, for example). Thus, an area
integration of Equation (3) in any plane perpendicular to
the plume center line is constant, regardless of the down-
wind distance. As described later in this section, an
exponential decay factor may be applied to account for
pollutant removal.
Ground-level concentration estimates are obtained by setting z = 0
in Equation (3), resulting in
-------
X (x.y.z; h) =
106Q
a TO
y z
exp
(4)
For a source which emits at a constant rate from hour to hour and
day to day, Equation (4) can be modified to yield estimates of long-term
(annual or seasonal) average concentrations if applicable stability wind
rose data are available. A wind rose tabulates the frequency of occurrence
for each wind direction and wind speed class for the time period under con-
sideration. A stability wind rose contains the same information, but it is
further divided according to atmospheric stability classes.
Although the change in wind direction is a continuous function over
the long-term period, for computation purposes discrete wind directions
are specified with respect to a 16-point compass, corresponding to 22.5-
degree sectors. For seasonal or longer periods it is often assumed that
all wind directions within a given 22.5-degree sector occur with equal
frequency. Thus, the effluent could be assumed to be uniformly distributed
in the horizontal within the sector, However, this assumption would result
in discontinuities in calculated concentrations at sector boundaries. A
more reasonable distribution is obtained by using a linear interpolation
between sector centerlines. Thus, the concentration at a given receptor
location is composed of proportional contributions from both the sector
containing the receptor and from the nearest adjacent sector. The linear
interpolation term is given by (c-y)/c, where y is the crosswind distance
between the receptor and the sector centerline, and c is the sector width
at the receptor location. This concept is illustrated in Figure 4-3. Note
that a SSW wind affects the receptor to the NNE of the source.
SSW WIND VECTOR (d)
.RECEPTOR
NORTH
SW WIND VECTOR (d+1)
22.5 SECTOR
Figure 4-3. Interpolation of Wind Directions,
-------
Use of the linear crosswind distribution requires that the form of
Equation (4) be changed to reflect a univariate Gaussian distribution:
x = 2q.l06(c-y) / c exp [_ I /h_ \2 ] (5)
azu /2lr (27TX/16) L \ az / J
When an elevated stable layer occurs locally, the estimated pol-
lutant concentrations are calculated with the assumption that all the
effluent remains within the mixing layer height L, where L is defined as the
vertical distance from the ground to the base of the stable layer. For the
model calculations, a is considered to increase in the downwind direction
z
until it reaches a distance x at which a = 0.47L. Up to this distance,
the Gaussian vertical distribution is assumed, and Equation (5) is appro-
priate. At distance x the trapping effect of the elevated stable layer
begins to be effective, and uniform mixing below the base of the stable
layer is assumed to occur at downwind distance 2x^. For distances x >_ 2x^ ,
the average concentration is calculated with the assumption that the plume
is uniformly mixed in the vertical:
Y = lQ6q(c-y)/c (6)
X Lu(2irx/16)
For distances between x and 2x^ , x is determined by a linear inter-
polation between Equation (5), evaluated at XT , and Equation (6), evaluated
at 2x .
Li
For a specific receptor (r) and source (s) configuration, an esti-
mate of x f°r each pollutant is obtained by choosing a representative
L Q
wind speed for each wind speed class and solving the appropriate equation
for every wind speed and stability class appropriate for the time period
in the geographical area of interest. The average concentration, x > is
L S
obtained by summing all concentrations and weighting each one according
to its frequency for the particular wind direction, wind speed class, and
stability class. The expression for average concentration for a given
pollutant is:
xrs = Z-< L* £-» F, X,
rs "^ dnm dnm
d=l n=l m=l
-------
where:
Fj = normalized frequency during the period of interest for
wind direction interval d, wind speed class n, and
stability class m
v , = average ground-level concentration calculated from Equation
Adnm ,c. ,tx . _
(5) or (6) as appropriate.
For each of the 16 wind direction intervals, wind speed is defined
in six categories and stability class in five categories. Thus a three-
dimensional array of 480 categories is established. However, only a few
of these wind directions result in non-zero contributions for specific
source-receptor pairs. Thus the computation time is reduced significantly.
Vertical variations in wind speed and wind direction are not accounted
for in the present model.
The representative speeds associated with the six climatological wind
speed categories (0-3, 4-6, 7-10, 11-16, 17-21 and >21 knots), are given
by the five mid-interval values of 0.67, 2.46, 4.47, 6.93 and 9.61 meters
per second, and by 12.52 meters per second (25.5 knots) for the >21 knots
category.
The five stability categories (S = 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5, in order of
increasing atmospheric stability) are defined on the basis of the criteria
stated by Turner [1964]. Stability in the lowest part of the atmosphere
is determined primarily by the net radiation and local wind speed.
Turner's classification is based upon ground-level meteorological
observations only (surface wind speed, cloud cover, ceiling), supplemented
by solar elevation data (latitude, time of day, and time of year); thus
the stability estimates can be obtained for any Weather Bureau station at
which continuous observations have been made.
The total concentration at a specific receptor r, \ , for a given
pollutant is
T = 2J
(8)
where
X = the average estimated concentration at receptor r from
source s, as given by Equation (7).
-------
Using the calibration constants and background concentration values, the
total calibrated mean concei
pollutant) is now given by,
total calibrated mean concentration value at each receptor, x'» (for each
X; = A + BXr + XBG. (9)
The values of a (x,S) used in the program are those of Pasquill
z
[1961] and Gifford [1961]. For computation these are represented in the
form;
a = ax + c (10)
z
where
a, b and c values are constants for each stability class, as shown
in Table 4-2
No a, b and c values are stated for S = 5 in Table 4-2.
Stability class S = 5 is associated with nighttime, surface inversion
conditions, and the a values for this case are the smallest normally used.
z
However, because of the thermal and mechanical influences of urban areas,
the lowest part of the typical urban atmosphere is less stable than its
rural counterpart. Since the Atmospheric Pollutant Concentration Program
is intended for use in urban regions, the a values for S = 4 are always
Z
used when the meteorological criteria indicate S = 5.
The minimum value of x used in calculating a is 100 meters. If x
Z
<100 meters, x is set equal to 100 meters prior to the a calculation.
Z
TABLE 4-2
COEFFICIENTS FOR a CALCULATION
z
Stability Class (S) a b . c
1 ~ Very Unstable .001 1.890 9.6
2 ~ Moderately Unstable .048 1.110 2.0
3 ~ Slightly Unstable .119 .915 0.0
x > 1000 meters 2.610 . .450 -25.5
x £ 1000 meters .187 .755 -1.4
4-14
-------
The mixing layer height L, has a marked diurnal, daily and seasonal
variation. However, since it is impractical to account for all these
variations, a procedure reflecting only major changes is used in the model.
The procedure determines mixing height by modifying the average afternoon
mixing height values, as tabulated by Holzworth [1964], according to the
stability class being considered. Stability classes S = 1, 2 and 3 are
afternoon conditions, with S = 1 corresponding to very unstable conditions.
When S = 1, the value of L is assumed to be 50% greater than the climato-
logical value tabulated by Holzworth; when S = 2 or 3, the climatological
value is adopted. According to Turner's criteria, S = 5 can occur only when
night-time ground-based inversion conditions exist. Since a shallow layer of
neutral or weak lapse conditions has been found to occur over urban areas
(even with strong nocturnal surface inversions in the surrounding rural
area), a mixing height of L = 100 meters is adopted for stability class
S = 5, when this class is indicated by the objective criteria. The 100-meter
value is based upon observations of Clarke [1969]. Stability class S = 4
is a neutral stability condition which occurs either with high wind speeds
or with cloudy conditions. To find the mixing height for the transition
period between day and night, the afternoon mixing height values are averaged
with the 100 meter night time mixing height for 40 percent of the class S =
4 occurrences. The remaining 60 percent of the class utilizes the climato-
logical value.
The effective stack height, h, appearing in Equation (5), is de-
fined as the height of the plume centerline when it becomes horizontal.
Thus h = h* + Ah, where h* is the physical stack height and Ah is the
plume rise. The effective stack height does not appear in Equation (6) be-
cause the height of emission is immaterial after the pollutant is uniformally
mixed in the interval.
The plume rise equation used in the program (when actual point
sources are being considered) is due to Holland [1953], and is given by
Ah
V d
s
1.5 + 2.68
(11)
-------
where:
V = stack gas-exit velocity (meters/sec)
s
d = stack exit diameter (meters)
u = mean wind speed (meters/sec)
P = atmospheric pressure (mb)
T = stack gas-exit temperature (°K)
S
T = ambient air temperature (°K)
Si
Since this equation is appropriate for the neutral stability con-
dition, it must be modified when applied over a range of stability condi-
tions. The following modification is used to allow for a range of from
1.3 Ah, for very unstable conditions, to Ah for neutral stability.
h = h* + Ah(1.4 - 0.1S) (12)
The plume rise Equation (11) frequently underestimates the effective
height of emission; thus its use often provides a slight "safety" factor.
If the stack parameters V or d are not available for a particular
s
source, or if the user wishes to employ a plume rise equation different
from the Holland equation, Equation (11), then an estimate of the plume
rise (in the form uAh) may be made. The uAh value(defined as the nor-
malized plume rise) is an input to the Source File. If any of the stack
parameters V or d are not available from the source file and if the uAh
S
value is also not available, the input physical stack height, h, is assumed
to represent the effective stack height. If either h or uAh is used in
place of Equation (11), the plume rise modification for variable stability
is not applied.
For some point sources (e.g., power plants with tall stacks) when
the mixing height is low the effective emission height will be above the
mixing height. Based on the assumption that the plume will not disperse
downward through the stable layer, these cases, are identified and elimi-
nated from consideration by the program. For area sources an average
effective height of emission must be estimated.
-------
The program computes area source contributions by converting the
area sources to equivalent, or "virtual," point sources. In the conversion
process, both the downwind distance and source strength are dependent on ,
the particular source-receptor configuration. , .. . . ..'
If the total emission is assumed to be concentrated at the center of
an area source, concentrations downwind tend to be overcalculated, especially
for nearby receptors. Since uniform spread of the plume across the sector
is assumed, it is logical to proceed a step further and .assume a virtual
point .source at such a distance upwind that the 22.5-degree sector used
subtends the area width. This concept is illustrated in Figure .4-4. Here
the program would use x instead of x as the source-receptor downwind dis-
tance in Equation (5) or (6). The vertical spread, as measured by Q^ , is
still calculated using x , the actual downwind distance.
WIND
DIRECTION
VIRTUAL POINT
SOURCE LOCATION
AREA SOURCE
RECEPTOR
Figure 4-4. Virtual Point Source Concept.
In a similar manner, nearby receptors are affected by emissions from
only a portion of the source area and, therefore, would show excessive con-
centration values if the total area emission value were used. To correct
this, the source emission rate is multiplied by an "area utilization"
factor, Q*, which is the ratio of that portion of the source area lying
within a 22.5-degree sector upwind of the receptor (A') to the total area
-------
(A). For example, in Figure 4-5, Receptor 1 would use the total area-
emission value, Q, while Receptor 2 would use the proportional amount,
QQ* = A(A'/A). Note that in this figure the virtual point source would be
defined by the reduced area width, W.
A'=AREA "SEEN" BY
RECEPTOR 2
22.5 SECTOR
WIND
DIRECTION
RECEPTOR 1
VIRTUAL SOURCE
LOCATION FOR A1
SOURCE AREA A
Figure 4-5. Area Utilization Concepts.
To account for decay of the pollutant from the atmosphere, a pollutant
decay factor is applied to the concentration value X, as determined from
Equation (5) or (6). The time-based decay factor is given by exp[-.693(x/u)/
(3600 T)], where T is the pollutant half-life in hours.
The diffusion model described above should only be applied when
competent meteorological advice is available to interpret the limitations
in the model. Important cautionary notes include:
(a) The basis of the model calculations, the point source
diffusion formula, was developed to represent the be-
havior of plumes from actual point sources. The field
data available for confirmation of the plume behavior
were obtained from open, flat terrain and for travel
distances of no more than a few kilometers in most cases.
Thus, the use of the point-source model for urban scale
projections has three specific weaknesses: (1) area
sources are only imperfectly modeled by " effective point
sources"; (2) plume behavior during horizontal transport
of more than a few miles is not well known; and (3)
plume behavior in regions of varying thermal and surface-
roughness characteristics has no.t been systematically
observed.
(b) The climatological data used in the model calculations
are obtained from airport weather observing stations in
nearly all cases. Frequently, the character of the lower
-------
atmosphere varies significantly between an out-of-town
observation site and the urban central region.
(c) The use of surface meteorological data only in the esti-
mation of mixing-layer heights has not been very success-
ful. Better modeling should result when climatological
data based upon vertical wind and temperature soundings
are used.
(d) The emission inventories presently available for use in
the model calculations are subject to error, and they.
cannot fully describe the individual source character-
istics found within the urban region.
(e) The present model uses average emission inventory data.
However, significant diurnal and seasonal variabilities
in emission rates normally occur. Such variabilities are
often (partially) correlated with the stability wind rose
data. Future versions of the model should include co-
variable meteorological and emissions data in the develop-
ment of seasonal average concentration estimates.
The listing of limitations cited here is not intended to imply that
the present model be kept from use. On the contrary, improved models can
only be developed when significant experience with the present formulation
has been achieved.
4.3.3 Analysis Data Tables
In general, the data manipulations involved in determining the
Analysis Data Table output are conversions of the total calibrated mean
concentration values to (1) individual source concentrations (Excess and
Source Contribution tables) and (2) short-term concentration values (Statis-
tical Table) . The specific equations used for each type of table are
given below.
4.3.3.1 Excess Table Calculations
For each pollutant the calibrated concentration at receptor, r, from
each source,, s, is given by
X
rs - B + A
Xr
X
where B and A are the calibration coefficients for a given pollutant as
determined in Equation (1) and x and x are defined by Equation (8).
ITS L
-------
The Excess Table requires the pollutant contributions from the set
of point sources and the set of area sources. These values are obtained
by summing Equation (13) over all point sources and then over all area
sources.
An additional requirement of the Excess Table is the percent emission
reduction required to reduce the excess concentration (v' - X , ,) to
Ar standard
zero. The percent reduction is given for both point source control and for
control of all sources.
4.3.3.2 Source Contribution Table
This table presents the individual source, X.' and the background
IT S
contribution to each of a selected set of receptors. The calculations of
X1 is given by Equation (13).
L S
4.3.3.3 Statistical Table
Larsen [1969] has developed a mathematical model for the expression
of air pollution concentration as a function of averaging time and fre-
quency, and has demonstrated how the model can be used to relate air
quality standards and emission standards. The model is employed here to
convert arithmetic average concentrations to expected maximum concentra-
tions and expected geometric mean and percentile concentrations for various
averaging times, under the assumption that the standard geometric devia-
tions are known.
The Larsen model was constructed on the basis of the following
characteristics, as observed from analysis of seven pollutants for six
cities over a three-year period:
(a) Concentrations are approximately lognormally distributed
for all pollutants in all cities for all averaging times.
(b) The median concentration (50 percentile) is proportional
to averaging time to an exponent.
If air quality data for the major cities are plotted on log-
probability paper (for given averaging times) the resulting curves are
nearly straight lines. This suggests that, to a good approximation, the
distribution of samples follows a lognormal curve. Figure 4-6 represents
-------
such a curve, with the logarithm of concentrations plotted on the hori-
zontal axis and the number of samples obtained for each concentration (for
a given averaging time) plotted on the vertical axis. The curve follows .-
the familar, bell-shaped probability distribution, the only difference :
being that the logarithm of concentration is plotted rather than the con-
centration itself. The center of such a curve falls not on the arithmetic-
mean, but on the geometric mean concentration (50-percentile for log-normal
distributions). This is the concentration which divides equally the area
under the curve: half of the samples will lie above this value and half will
lie below it. As with the normal probability curve, the standard deviation
is a measure of the "spread" of the curve. However, for the lognormal distri-
bution, it is called the standard geometric deviation, and is the ratio of
the concentration which is exceeded by 16% of the samples to that which is
exceeded by 50% of the samples.
w
Vi
o
g
1
~ 50-PERCENTILE
*~^
/'
A
^ /
^**fc
\ f~ HIGHEST 16-PERCENTILE
N
\
v HIGHEST
\ C 3-PERCENTILE
13/ -1^^ _
M /s M s M 2U ^
88 8 . g g s M
TAP AT? PAVT/TTUTTJ A TTAXTP ° °
Figure 4-6. Lognormal Distribution of Samples.
Since only two parameters are needed to define the shape of this dis-
tribution, it is possible, once these parameters are known, to calculate
the concentration for any percentile. In addition, since a specified,
averaging period corresponds to a fixed number of samples over a year,
the highest sample will correspond to a particular percentile. Thus, it is
-------
also possible to calculate the expected maximum concentration for the year.
Equation (14) is a general relationship for calculating the concentration
at any point along the curve as a function of the geometric mean and
standard geometric deviation.
C = Mg(sg)Z (14)
where:
C = = concentration corresponding to the desired percentile
and averaging time,
s = standard geometric deviation of samples (at the desired
averaging time),
M = geometric mean of samples (at the desired averaging
8 time),
z = plotting position which corresponds to the desired
percentile.
The parameters M and s are obtained from the actual distribution of
g g
sample data, while z is the number of standard deviations on a normal
probability curve that correspond to the desired percentile and may be
obtained from statistical tables [c.f., Pearson and Hartley, 1966].
Table 4-3 shows the values of z for several selected percentiles. In the
program the z values are obtained by an approximation technique which in-
volves solving the normal, cumulative-probability density function:
* r+*>
P ' f2T J e- /2 dx <15)
TABLE 4-3
VALUES OF Z FOR VARIOUS FREQUENCIES
Highest Percentile
50.0% 0.00
30.0% 0.52
15.0% 1.04
10.0% 1.28
5.0% 1.64
1.0% 2.33
0.1% 3.09
-------
Since a particular percentile is associated with the maximum con-
centration in any set of samples for a specified averaging time, a similar
table may be prepared in which the values of z correspond to the maximum
concentration for selected averaging times. Such values are listed below
in Table 4-4 and, when used in Equation (14), they permit calculation of
the expected maximum concentration in a distribution of samples (for a
single averaging time) where M and s are known.
o 6
TABLE 4-4
VALUES OF Z FOR CALCULATING THE MAXIMUM CONCENTRATION
Averaging Time 2
1 year 0.00
1 month 1.64
24 hours 2.94
8 hours 3.26
4 hours 3.46
2 hours 3.63
1 hour 3.81
The geometric mean for a given set of samples may be calculated
from the arithmetic mean and the geometric deviation for that same set
of samples in a relatively straightforward manner, as shown in Equation
(16).
M - X/(s ) n V (16)
o o
where:
X = arithmetic mean
M = geometric mean for a set of samples
O
s = standard geometric deviation for the same set of samples
O
In = the natural logarithm (base e) .
If s is for the desired averaging time, Equation (14) and Equation
o
(16) may be used to provide the desired output. If the desired averaging
-------
time is different from that associated with the input s , then s must be
g g
translated to the desired averaging time. It is assumed that the input
s corresponds to a 24-hour averaging time.
O
Larsen proposes a method to change averaging times by assuming that
the median concentration is proportional to averaging time to an exponent.
The standard geometric deviations for different averaging times may be
related as shown in Equation (17).
s = (s )k (17)
gn 824
where:
= , In 876Q/n
In 8760/24
I
and
s = standard geometric deviation at averaging period
n of n hours
s = standard geometric deviation of 24-hour samples
S24
The statistical relationships described above, along with the annual
arithmetic mean concentration computed by the diffusion model Equation
(9), allow the user to estimate the expected maximum, geometric mean and
various percentile pollutant concentrations at various averaging times.
4.4 PROGRAM OUTPUT
The types of output associated with each of the operational seg-
ments of the Air Pollutant Concentration Program are summarized in this
section. Specific examples of output from the Program are given in
Section 7.3.4.
4.4.1 Calibration Results
If the calibration option of the model is exercised, the following
two sets of calibration data will be obtained.
(a) Correlation Data Table. For each pollutant type con-
sidered, the measuring station locations and observed con-
centration levels (measured minus background) are tabulated,
-------
(x) In addition, the theoretical concentration values (ex-
cluding background levels) calculated by the diffusion
model at each measuring station location are shown.
(b) Regression Output Table. For each pollutant considered.
the y-intercept and slope of the calibration line and the
coefficient of correlation are tabulated. Also shown is
the theoretical value (5 percent confidence level) ex-
pected for the correlation coefficient. If the calculated
correlation coefficient is less than the theoretical
value, the following note is printed: NOT STATISTICALLY
SIGNIFICANT, COEFFICIENTS NOT USED. If the calculated
correlation coefficient is greater than or equal to the
theoretical value, the following note is printed:
STATISTICALLY SIGNIFICANT. If the regression constants
are input, only the Regression Table is output, with the
following note: VALUES NOT COMPUTED.
4.4.2 Generalized Receptor Output
(a) Receptor Concentration Table. For each pollutant con-
sidered, the total calibrated (if applicable) mean con-
centration values for each receptor will be output in
tabular form.
(b) Receptor Concentration Card Deck. At the option of the
user, the data contained in the Mean Concentration Table
can be obtained as a punched card deck. The format of this
deck is described in Section 7.3.4.
4.4.3 Source Contribution File Output
During the calculation of the generalized receptor output, the
program creates a Source Contribution File on magnetic tape (or disk). This
file is utilized by the Regional Strategies Program to calculate new air
quality values (based on application of emission standards). The file
contains the following information.
(a) Identification of each source
(b) Calibration constants for each pollutant
(c) Background concentrations for each pollutant
(d) Uncalibrated pollutant concentration for each source-
receptor combination, for each pollutant.
-------
4.4.4 Analysis Data Output
The following data may be obtained for each pollutant considered:
(a) Excess Table. This table displays those receptors (maxi-
mum of 50) at which the concentration levels exceed an in-
put ambient air quality standard value. For each such
receptor, the following information is given:
Total Concentration - this is the same value as in
the Mean Concentration Table.
Excess Concentration - the amount by which the total
concentration exceeds the input standard value.
Concentration Level From Point Sources - the total
point source contribution to the given receptor.
Concentration Level From Area Sources - the total area
source contribution to the given receptor.
Point Source Reduction Required - this value gives the
percent reduction of all point sources required to re-
duce the excess concentration to zero. A value
greater than 100% indicates that the excess concentra-
tion cannot be eliminated by control of point sources
alone.
Source Reduction Required - this value gives the per-
cent reduction of all sources required to reduce the
excess concentration to zero.
(b) Source Contribution Table. This table presents the
pollutant concentration contribution from each source
and from the background concentration to five receptors.
A note is printed with the table to indicate whether the
five receptors have been selected by the user or
represent the five highest-concentration receptors. The
total concentration values at each of the five receptors
(summation of the source and background values) are the
same as found in the Mean Concentration Table.
(c) Statistical Table. A table of statistical data for 12
selected receptors may be output for each selected
averaging time (maximum of five). Each table is identi-
fied with respect to the pollutant being considered and
the averaging time for which the data is applicable.
The table includes the following information for each
selected receptor:
Mean Concentration values - these are the long-term
(annual average) concentration values given in the
Mean Concentration Table and do not vary with averag-
ing time.
-------
Expected Geometric Mean Concentration.
Expected Maximum Concentration.
Percentile Concentration - concentration values are
given for three selected percentiles.
Standard Geometric Deviation - the input standard
geometric deviation value for a 24-hour averaging
time converted to the selected averaging time.
4.5 SOURCE CONTRIBUTION FILE MERGE PROGRAM
For large or densely populated regions, multiple Air Pollution Con-
centration Program runs might be required to provide sufficient receptor
density. The operating procedure for multiple runs is to divide the
region into a contiguous set of sub-regions and then execute the program
on a sub-region by sub-region basis. This allows use of the full 225
grid - 50 individual receptor system for each sub-region. This procedure
will also produce a Source Contribution File for each sub-region. Since
the Regional Strategies Program requires a single input Source Contribu-
tion File, the set of sub-regional files must be merged.
A file merge program is provided which allows the user to combine all
sub-regional files into a single file. This program does not provide any
update or listing capabilities. The detailed execution procedures of the
Source Contribution File Merge Program are given in Section 7.4.
-------
-------
5.0 CONTROL COST SEGMENT
5.1 PURPOSE
The Control Cost Segment consists of the Control Cost Program and
the Control Cost File Update Program. This segment generates data result-
ing from application of additional control devices to each point source
contained on the Source File.
These data are made available to the user in the form of printed
tables, and to the Emission Standards Program as a data file (Control Cost
File) on magnetic tape.
The function of the Control Cost File Update Program is to allow an
existing data file to be updated without rerunning the Control Cost Program.
The update program is described in Section 5.6. The remaining sections in
this chapter are devoted to the operation of the Control Cost Program.
5.2 INPUT INFORMATION
The Control Cost Program utilizes data from the Source File and from
punched card input. The data required, consisting of the three categories
below, are of the type generally collected and used by air pollution '
control authorities.
Emission Source Information (from the Source File)
Regional Information (from punched card input)
Control Device Information (pre-set or punched card input)
Emission source information is read directly from the Source File
by the program. No user generated source data are input to the program.
The regional information, relating basically to the fuel availability
pattern present in the air quality control region, must be input by the
user each time the prbgram is used. The control device information is pre-
set in the Control Cost Program. These values may be changed or modified
by the user before running the program. Certain other types of data are
also included within the program with a user modification option; these
I
data will be described later in this chapter.
Calculation of control cost data requires specific information re-
garding the type and size of the pollution source being considered. There-
fore, since derailed source characteristics for area sources are not
-------
available, only point sources are considered by the Control Cost Program.
The program input and operating procedures are given in Section 7.5.
5.2.1 Source Information
All point source data contained on the Source File are read into the
Control Cost Program. Although all of the point source data are not re-
quired by this program, the set must be passed on to the Control Standards
Segment (this segment reads only area source data from the Source File).
The Source File data utilized by the Control Cost Program consists of the
following items:
(a) Identification. Each source is identified in several
ways. First, a generic name (such as "Power Plant -
Boiler" or "Grain Elevator") describing each source is
used. .The name facilitates examination of the output
records by persons unfamiliar with the various coding
schemes used within the program. The four-digit
Standard Industrial Classification (SIC) code* must be
supplied for each source. Many of the control device
selection routines in the program are keyed to the SIC
code identification. The two digit process code is also
required by this program. It is used, in addition to the
SIC code, to specify the exact nature of each emission
source.
(b) Effluent Gas Stream. The type and size of control
devices applicable to a source are strongly affected
by the two gas stream parameters: maximum exhaust gas
volume and stack exit temperature. For example, con-
siderably more expensive fabric-filter installations are
required when high-temperature gas must be cleaned. The
maximum effluent gas volume is the prime factor influenc-
ing the cost and size of pollution control devices.
(c) Existing Pollution Controls. The type and efficiency of
existing air pollution control devices must be available.
When adding new control devices they must be compatible
with existing equipment, and their efficiencies must be
adjusted to account for pollutant removal by the existing
device.
(d) Operating Schedule. The annual hours of plant operation are
required in the computation of operating costs for various
pollution control devices.
SIC and process code classifications used in this program are listed in
Table 5-3.
-------
(e) Fuel Usage. For each combustion source, the types, quan-
tities, and sulfur and ash contents of all fuels presently
used must be supplied. These data form the basis for
determining the applicability and effectiveness of the
fuel substitution methods of control. Also, the control
efficiency achieved by some of the control devices depends
on the type of fuel burned by the pollution source.
(f) Maximum Process Rate. For industrial processes, the
maximum process rate is used as the measure of plant
capacity which, in turn, is used to determine the types
of control measures -available to a particular source.
(g) Emission Rates. The actual amount of pollutants emitted
by each source is required in numerous calculations (cost,
fuel switch, etc.)
5.2.2 Regional Information
The regional information is, in general, specific to the particular
air quality control region being considered. For this reason, there are
no pfe-set values for this type of data, the user must input a complete
set of regional data for each run. Although some of the items included
in the regional data base may vary somewhat within a given air quality
control region, such variations have been determined to be small in
comparison to inter-regional differences.
The regional information required includes the following items:
(a) Labor Cost Rate. This is the average hourly wage rate
for unskilled labor within the region. Although the
quantity of labor required depends on the characteristics
of the emission source and the control device applied
(see Section 5.2.3), the labor cost rate is determined
only by the regional labor market.
(b) Interest Rate. The prevailing interest rate must be
specified. This item is used in computing an annual
cost based on the purchase and installation costs of
control devices.
(c) Fuel Information. Information on fuels available to the
region is required for fuel substitution computations.
Each geographical area of the country represents an
individual situation regarding fossil fuel usage and
availability. Data on costs, sulfur content, ash content
and heat content must be collected for a variety of fuel
types and grades. The user may specify up to and includ-
ing five grades of coal, five grades of residual oil and
three grades of distillate oil. Natural gas is not graded.
-------
For each fuel grade specified, the upper and lower limits
(maximum and minimum) of the sulfur content, the average
heat content in BTU per ton, gallon, or cubic foot (coal,
oil, gas) and the unit cost for three categories of fuel
usage must be provided by the user. The three categories
of fuel usage are defined as follows: steam-electric power
generation, industrial fuel usage (sources having SIC codes
beginning with the digits 2 or 3) and general purpose fuel
use (all other SIC codes). For each grade of coal, the
user must also input the average ash content in percent by
weight. In addition, for the control device types 30, 31,
and 32 (described in Section 5.3) the user must input the
maximum allowable sulfur content for coal, residual oil,
and distillate oil (i.e., nine values).
(d) Utility Costs. The cost of electricity and water used in
pollutant disposal are required for annual device cost
calculations.
5.2.3 Control Device Information
A set of data is required concerning each control device whose
application is simulated by the Control Cost Program. The control device
information consists of control device description data, which is pre-set,
but may be changed by card input, and device applicability data, which is
fixed in the program, but may be extended by card input.
Since the set of available control devices is essentially the same
for all regions, the control device information is pre-set within the
Control Cost Program. Only changes in control technology (such as new or
improved devices) or general economic changes will require user input con-
trol device descriptive information. For each device, the following device
descriptive information is pre-set in the program (the pre-set values are
given in Subsection 7.5.4):
(a) Device Identification. A name is given for each control
device (e.g., "Electrostatic Precipitator - High Effi-
ciency"). This identification assists in the recognition
of the type of control device mentioned in the model out-
put. A three-digit numeric code is also assigned to each
control device or measure. This code is utilized inter-
nally by the program. The device names and their respec-
tive numeric codes are presented in the next section.
(b) Price Coefficients. The cost of each control measure to a
particular source is determined by multiplying some meas-
ure of the source size by input price coefficients.
Usually the measure of size is the number of cubic feet of
-------
gas per minute to be treated. For some devices however,
the power-generating capacity, fuel usage, or some other
measure is used. The price coefficients for most devices
were taken from the Control Techniques Documents for
Particulates and Sulfur Oxides prepared by the National
Air Pollution Control Administration.
(c) Installation Cost Factor. This factor is used in deter-
mining the total cost of installing a control device on a
particular pollution source. It accounts for those cost
elements which depend on the characteristics of the source
and of the device itself. The installation cost factor
includes the costs of transportation, erection, architect-
ural and engineering, auxiliary equipment, utility con-
nection, startup, spare parts, and land and buildings.
For each control device pre-set in the program, a corres-
ponding installation cost factor, which represents a frac-
tion of the total purchase price, is also pre-set. The
pre-set factors are those presented in the 1969 NAPCA
document, Control Techniques for Particulates.
(d) Expected Life. The length of service expected from each
control device is included in each device record. This
item is used to apportion the total installed cost of the
control device into an annual charge value.
(e) Labor Quantity. This is the yearly amount of labor necessary
to operate and maintain each device. Labor quantities
associated with four different plant sizes are required.
The appropriate value for each particular emission source
is selected and applied by the Control Cost Program. The
total labor expense, which is one of the major components
of device operating and maintenance costs, is calculated
as the product of the quantity of labor and the labor
cost rate. Labor quantity is computed by converting skilled
and supervisory hours into equivalent unskilled hours.
(f) Operating Cost Factors. A number of factors relating to
each device are considered in the computation of operating
cost. The pressure drop associated with each device is a
function of the resistance to gas flow through the device
and therefore provides a measure of the amount of power
necessary to operate it. Chemical costs give the rela-
tive costs of additives used in wet scrubbing when gases
in the effluent stream are reacted. If afterburner type
devices are used a fuel factor must be included. This
factor corrects the computed fuel usage to account for the
various heat input requirements (see Particulate Control
Techniques Document).
(g) Disposal Cost or Credit. For each pollutant collected,
there must be a charge for its disposal. This charge is
associated with the control device, since the form in
which the pollutant is collected is quite important. If
-------
the collected pollutant has value, either directly or by
return to a process, then the disposal charge will be
negative relative to the other device costs.
(h) Rated Efficiency. These data elements represent the basic
removal efficiencies of the control device under considera-
tion for the various pollutants. These efficiencies are
modified within the Control Cost Program to reflect varia-
tions in source characteristics. The modifications are
made on the basis of pre-programmed engineering criteria
which take into consideration the effect of existing con-
trol devices.
The device applicability data relates each control device to the SIC
and process code groups to which it may be applied. Since the SIC and
process code list used by the program does not include all possible source
types it may be necessary to add additional code numbers. If new SIC and
process code numbers are required, the associated device applicability data
must also be included. The user may add up to five additional source types
(SIC and process codes) and their device applicability data. However, no
existing source types or their applicability pre-sets may be changed or
deleted from the program nor may any new control device categories be added
to the table by this mechanism. These modifications require changes in
the program code.
5.3 CONTROL MEASURES
The control devices for which information is pre-set in the program
are listed in Table 5-1. This table also indicates the numeric device code
used throughout the Implementation Planning Program. A general description
of each of the control devices listed in Table 5-1 is given below. Although
most of the control devices are designed to remove a particular pollutant,
the user should note that some devices (or control methods) simultaneously
reduce emissions of two or more pollutants. The user should refer to the
pre-set device data (Subsection 7.5-4) for examples of the relative device
efficiency difference between high, medium and low efficiency devices.
(a) Wet Scrubbers or Wet Collectors. (Device Codes: 001, 002,
003) are devices which use a liquid, commonly water, to remove
particulates or gases directly from a gas stream. The removal
is accomplished by contact, or through an increase in the
collection efficiency of a second-stage collector by increas-
ing the effective particle diameter. The simplest wet scrubber
is a spray chamber into which water is injected by a spray
-------
TABLE 5-1
POLLUTION REDUCTION DEVICES OR METHODS
001 Wet Scrubber - High Efficiency
002 Wet Scrubber - Medium Efficiency
003 Wet Scrubber - Low Efficiency
004 Gravity Collector - High Efficiency
005 Gravity Collector - Medium Efficiency
006 Gravity Collector - Low Efficiency
007 Centrifugal Collector - High Efficiency
008 Centrifugal Collector - Medium Efficiency
009 Centrifugal Collector - Low Efficiency
010 Electrostatic Precipitator - High Efficiency
Oil Electrostatic Precipitator - Medium Efficiency
012 Electrostatic Precipitator - Low Efficiency
013 Gas Scrubber
014 Mist Eliminator - High Velocity
015 Mist Eliminator - Low Velocity
016 Fabric Filter - High Temperature
017 Fabric Filter - Medium Temperature
018 Fabric Filter - Low Temperature
019 Catalytic Afterburner
020 Catalytic Afterburner with Heat Exchanger
021 Direct Flame Afterburner
022 Direct Flame Afterburner with Heat Exchanger
027 Eliminate Coal Combustion
028 Eliminate Coal and Residual Fuel Oil Combustion
029 Change all Fuel Use to Natural Gas
030 No Fuel Use Over a Maximum Sulfur Content (Specified
by the User in the Regional Data Base*)
031 Same as Device 030 but with a Different Allowable
Sulfur Content
032 Same as Device 030 but with a Different Allowable
Sulfur Content
039 Catalytic Oxidation - Flue Gas Desulfurization
See Section 5.2.2.
-------
TABLE 5-1
POLLUTION REDUCTION DEVICES OR METHODS (Continued)
041 Dry Limestone Injection
042 Wet Limestone Injection
043 Sulfuric Acid Plant - Contact Process
044 Sulfuric Acid Plant - Double Contact Process
045 Sulfur Plant
-------
nozzle. Wet scrubbers applied to a hot gas stream have
the additional property of gas cooling and humidification.
(Used for Particulates or Sulfur Oxides)
(b) Mechanical Collectors (004-009) are devices which remove
particulate matter from a gas stream by using only the
force of gravity or centrifugal force. Nothing is in-
jected into the gas to combine with or entrain the
particles. The two principal types of mechanical collec-
tors are:
(1) Gravity Collectors (004, 005, 006). These devices
are chambers in which the gas flow is slowed down
sufficiently for large particles to settle out.
Gravity collectors are typically very low in
efficiency except for the removal of relatively
large particles, and require considerable space.
(Used for Particulates)
(2) Centrifugal Collectors or Cyclones (007, 008, 009).
These devices use the centrifugal force created by
spinning the exhaust gas stream to drive particulate
matter from the gas. The spinning gas stream is set
up inside a cylindrical container by tangential gas
inlets, vanes, or fan action.
(Used for Particulates)
(c) Electrostatic Precipitators (010, Oil, 012) are devices
which remove particles from a gas stream by electrically
charging the suspended particles as the gas passes through
a corona discharge. The charged particles are then
collected on a grounded collection plate. High-voltage
precipitators, which are the only electrostatic devices
considered by the program, can be operated over a relatively
wide range of collection efficiencies. These devices pro-
duce a low pressure drop and consequently have low operat-
ing costs for large gas volumes. Low-voltage precipitators
are not considered since they are generally used for in-
dustrial hygiene purposes and not for air pollution
control.
i
(Used for Particulates)
(d) Gas Scrubber (013) is a device in which water (or another
liquid) is brought into intimate contact with the effluent
gas stream. The pollutants are removed by absorption or
by chemical reaction. The cost elements of this device
were expressly tailored to gas removal. While this device
can be applied for particulate or mist removal it is gen-
erally more costly than the alternate devices listed here.
Consequently, the program applies this device for gas re-
moval only.
-------
(Used for Sulfur Oxides)
(e) Mist Eliminators (014, 015) are devices designed to remove
liquid droplets. The principal collection mechnaisms are
interception and impaction. Operation is much like that
of fabric filters for dry particulates.
(Used for Particulates)
(f) Fabric Filters (016, 017, 018) are devices which remove
particles from a gas stream by passing the gas through
fabric tubes or envelopes. A cake of collected particles,
supported by the fabric, accomplishes the filtration.
Very high effeciencies can be attained using fabric filters,
A wide range of fabrics and cleaning techniques are
available.
(Used for Particulates)
(g) Afterburners (019, 020, 021, 022) are devices which remove
pollutants by combustion. The direct-flame afterburner
brings the gas stream into contact with a high-temperature
flame to achieve rapid oxidation. The catalytic after-
burner operates at a lower temperature by oxidizing the
pollutants on the surface of a catalyst.
(Used for Particulates)
(h) Fuel Substitution (027-032) are control methods (rather
than devices) involving changes in existing fuel use
patterns. They are divided into two basic types in the
Control Cost Program:
(1) Elimination of Certain Fuel Types (027, 028, 029).
These control methods require a combustion source to
meet the demand for heat using specified fossil fuels.
Although both particulate and sulfur dioxide emis-
sions are affected by these measures, they are used
only for particulate control in this program.
(Used for Particulates)
(2) Fuel Sulfur Content Limitation (030, 031, 032).
These control measures restrict the permissible sulfur
content of fuels to user input levels. The existing
pattern of fuel use (in terms of coal, residual fuel
oil, distilute fuel oil, and natural gas) is main-
tained, as far as possible, consistent with the fuel
sulfur limitations.
(Used for Sulfur Oxides)
(i) Flue Gas Desulfurization (039, 041, 042) control measures
rely upon injection of various chemicals into the exit
-------
gas stream (alternatively, the reactive or catalytic
material may be employed in a fixed or fluidized bed).
The injected chemicals either react with sulfur oxide
directly to produce a readily collectible solid or gas
or absorb the sulfur oxide by producing a physically
bonded sulfate. The more promising methods for cleaning
flue gases are:
(1) Catalytic Oxidation (039). This type of control for
sulfur dioxide in the flue gas is a recently developed
desulfurization process. After high-temperature
oxidation of the S02 to 863, an absorbing tower
procedure using sulfuric acid is employed. Sulfur
is recovered as commercially saleable sulfuric acid.
This process is reported to be applicable to larger
existing installations and to new power generating
stations [Stites, et al., 1969].
(2) Limestone Injection - Dry Process (041). This con-
trol measure employs finely ground limestone which
is injected into the boiler combustion zone. The
limestone reacts with the sulfur oxides to form
calcium sulfate. The sulfate is then removed from
the gas stream by a precipitator or other particulate
control device. The process is applicable to both
new and existing coal fired electric generating
facilities.
(3) Limestone Injection - Wet Process (042). This con-
trol measure employes the same basic injection of
limestone as the dry process. However, instead of
collecting calcium sulfate in the dry state, a liquid
slurry of lime is used to remove the sulfate and any
unreacted sulfur oxide. The process is applicable to
basically the same sources as the dry process described
above. The more expensive collection equipment needed
may indicate that the wet process may be more often
applied to new installations.
(Used for Sulfur Oxides)
(j) By-Product Manufacturing (043, 044, 045). Capitalizes
on the fact that either elemental sulfur or sulfuric acid
may be manufactured from a sulfur oxide-rich gas. Both
products are in relatively high demand in industrial
markets, and often can bring a price high enough to sub-
stantially offset the cost of controlling emissions. Cases
in which sulfuric acid and sulfur plants are used as con-
trol measures are not to be confused with cases where
similar plants are operated independently in such a manner
as to be emission sources themselves. Clearly, a sulfur
plant will not be considered a control measure for a
sulfur plant emission source.
(Used for Sulfur Oxides)
-------
5.4 PROGRAM OPERATIONS
The Control Cost Program performs three basic functions with respect
to each source defined on the Source File.
(a) Control devices, or methods, are assigned to each point
source within the region
(b) The expected pollution reduction efficiency is then
determined for each source-device combination
(c) Finally, the capital charges and maintenance expense are
estimated for each control device.
These steps, described in detail in the following subsections, produce a
set of source-device data (defined as a record in the Control Cost File)
for all point sources and their applied devices. Output from the program
will permit investigation of both overall and detailed pollution control
costs. Additionally, comparisons of costs versus pollutant removal
effectiveness can be made for the various source-device combinations
considered.
5.4.1 Assignment of Control Devices
In general, assignment of a control device to a particular source
depends upon a number of engineering factors related to both the source
and device characteristics. Within the Control Cost Program, device
assignment is performed in two basic steps which produce a list of pol-
lution control devices for each point source defined on the Source File.
The first step involves determining those devices which apply to the
general source type (defined by their SIC and process code). The
second step requires examination of each source within the SIC and pro-
cess group to determine which of the applicable devices can actually be
assigned (i.e., installed) to the source. As will be seen in Subsection
5.4.2.2, some of the devices applied will produce collection efficiencies
too low to be useful. The final list of control devices actually applied
to each source will include only those remaining after the criteria
described in both Subsections 5.4.2.1 and 5.4.2.2 have been applied.
-------
5.4.1.1 Control Device Applicability
Table 5-2 represents an inclusive list of control devices which may
be applied to a particular source category. Individual sources within this
category, however, may have characteristics which prevent the assignment of
certain of the devices. This problem is taken up in the next subsection.
This portion of the Control Cost Program merely determines a list of
applicable devices for each source type from the total number of control
devices available. Table 5-3 defines the source types listed in Table 5-2.
The source type identification code scheme used in these tables (and
throughout the Implementation Planning Program) is composed of the follow-
ing sets of numbers:
A four-digit Standard Industrial Classification (SIC) code,
XXXX, which identifies the nature of the industry.
A two-digit process code, XX, which provides the process
classification.
A zero in the second location of the process code (XO) indicates a
fuel combustion source. In this case, the first digit (X) identifies the
fuel burner type (as defined below). When selecting applicable control de-
vices (Table "5-2) for any source with a combustion source process code, the
devices are selected from the Fuel Combustion section of the table (first
ten Source Type lines of Table 5-3).
The fuel burner types defined by the process codes 00, 10, 20, ,
90 are defined as follows:
00. All types Not Listed
10. Pulverized, General
20. Pulverized, Dry Bottom
30. Pulverized, Wet Bottom without Flyash Reinjection
40. Pulverized, Wet Bottom with Flyash Reinjection
50. Cyclone
60. Spreader Stoker without Flyash Reinjection
70. Spreader Stoker with Flyash Reinjection
80. All Other Stokers
90. Hand Dired.
-------
TABLE 5-2
APPLICABLE CONTROL DEVICES
sou
TYI
COMB
2011
2029
2032
2037
2041
?042
2043
2046
2062
20871
209?
2095
2099
2299
Zt'.i-,
2499
2511
2C21
26_41_
2645
2655
?661
(711
2741
2751
2752
-Z1U.
2816
2919_
tCE
00
10
20
30
40
50
60
,'0
80
90
01
0!
01
Oi
01
02
03
01
02
01
01
01
01
0!
01
02
03
04
0!
01
01
01
01
01
02
03
04
05
06
I'
01
01
01
01
01
01
0!
ni
..O.L
01
02
03
04
05
Ob
JU-
01
02
03
04
OS
07
SOURCE
TYPE
CONTROL DEVICE TYPE
01
X
X
X
X
_x
X
X
JL
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
01
02
X
X
X
X
X..
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
J?
03
...
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X j
X
X
X
X
X
X
03
04
04
OS
05
OE
--
06
07
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
07
OB
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
OB
09
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
09
10
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
10
11
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
II
12
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
12
13
X
X
X
X
X
X
13
14
X
X
X
X
14
15
.._
X
X
IS
16
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
16
17
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
x_.
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
17
18
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
IS
19
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
19
20
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
20
21
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
21
22
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
27
23
23
24
24
25
S
26
K
27
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
27
28
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
28
29
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
29
30
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
x
X
30
31
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
31
32
X
X
33
x !
X
X
X
JS.
_x
X
X
u.
1
-
32
-.
--
33
34
35
I'
---
34
36
-
--
--
--
1
35
36
37
-
37
38
3B
39
X
X
X
X
X
JL
X
X
X
--
-
-
39
40
r-
.
40
41
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
x
--
-
X
-
-
41
4?
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
...
X
:.:
4?
43
~-
-
...
43
44
._.
- -
-
44
45
-
z
- -
--
45
44
-
-"
--
-
46
4:
1-
J_
J.
..:
-
.,
-
47
48
-
._
._
.. -
-
-
L_
4t
4- '30
r
r
L
i
~r
-
z
_
-
1
I""
-
(-
_
L_
49
4
J_
L_
j
!
_
_
-
-
-
~
50
CONTROL DEVICE TYPE
-------
TABLE 5-2
APPLICABLE CONTROL DEVICES (Continued)
sou
TV
2821
?822
2833
2U34
841
284?
2843
2851
28/1
2891
2892
2899
?9II
291)1
ZliL
2992
2999
3069
30/9
3211
311L
?14L
3251
3 2 Si.
32.M
1"? / 2
32/3"
32M
328F
3291
3?95J
3297
3312
3313
Kl
K
08
09
11
12
01
01
01
01
"I
01
01
01
02
03
04
III
01
01
01
01
02
.01..
04
05
06
0!
08
ni
02
03
04
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
02
03
01
01
01
01
01
01
02
01
01
01
02
03
01
01
02
113
04
05
06
o;
08
01
SOURCE
TYPE
CONTROL DEVICE TYPE
i
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
Jl_
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
01
02
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
02
3
X
X
X
X
X
n
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
I
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
03
04
04
05
05
OS
U
07
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
07
OB
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
08
09
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
09
10
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
10
II
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
II
a
X
X
X
X
I
X
i
X
X
X
X
1?
13
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
13
14
X
14
15
15
16
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
IE
17
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
17
18
X
X
X.
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
18
19
X
X
X
X
19
20
X
X
X
X
20
21
X
X
X
x
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
21
22
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
22
23
23
24
24
25
25
26
X
27
27
28
28
29
21
30
30
31
31
32
_..
J?
33
33
34
34
35
35
36
36
37
37
38
38
39
X
39
40
'
I
i
40
41
41
42
47
43
43
44
44
45
45
46
«
47
47
48
41
49
49
50
50
CONTROL DEVICE TYPE
-------
TABLE 5-2
APPLICABLE CONTROL DEVICES (Continued)
SOURCE
TYPE
3321
3322
3323
3332
3334
3339
3341
3362
3369
3391
3399
3411
3441
3451
3452
3519
3639
3661
4952
4953
2816
3296
37UJ
01
12
0.'
H
01
u?
_li
01
u3
04
J5
r>i
01
:1 _
o;
(13
34
05
06
o;
08
09
_S1
01
02
03
04
05
06
o;
08
1)1
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
Oi
02
03
04
05
H
f 1
01
01
SOURCE
TYPE
CONTROL DEVICE TYPE
01
X
_..
X
X
"
X
X
X
X
x
02
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
31
X
X
X
X
X
-*.
X
X
::
03
X
-
:
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
_x_
X
X
;
04
04
1)5
1
05
06
07
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
0,
X
X
07
08
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
08
09
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
09
10
X
JL
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
x
X
X
X
10
11
X
JS_
X
X
X
X
X
X.
X
X
X
X
X
X
11
i;
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
12
13
x
X
13
14
14
15
15
16
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
16
i;
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
17
18
X
X
X
X,
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
IB
19
X
X
X
19
20
X
X
20
21
X
X
X
X
21
22
X
X
X
n
23
23
24
24
25
25
26
26
27
27
28
28
29
29
30
30
31
31
32
32
33
33
34
34
35
35
36
36
37
37
38
39
39
X
39
40
40
41
41
42
42
43
X
X
14
X
X
43
44
45
X
X
45
46
47
46
47
48
49
48
50
49
50
CONTROL DEVICE TYPE
-------
TABLE 5-3
STANDARDIZED SOURCE TYPES
2011 MEAT PACKING PLANTS
xO.
01.
Combustion*
General
2013 SAUSAGES AND OTHER PREPARED MEAT PRODUCTS
xO. Combustion
2026 FLUID MILK
xO. Combustion
2029 DAIRY PRODUCTS
xO. Combustion
01. General
2032 CANNED SPECIALTIES
xO. Combustion
01. Soups
2033 CANNED FRUIT, VEGETABLES, PRESERVES, JAMS, AND JELLIES
xO. Combustion
2037 FROZEN FRUITS, FRUIT JUICES, VEGETABLES, AND SPECIALTIES
xO. Combustion
01. General
2041
FLOUR AND OTHER GRAIN MILL PRODUCTS
xO.
01.
02.
03.
Combustion
General
Wheat
Barley
2042 PREPARED FEEDS FOR ANIMALS AND FOWL
xO. Combustion
01. General
02. Alfalfa
2043 CEREAL PREPARATIONS
xO.
01.
Combustion
General
* xO indicates the group of fuel combustion sources 00, 10,.
described in Subsection 5.4.1.1.
5-17
-------
TABLE 5-3
STANDARDIZED SOURCE TYPES (Continued)
2046 WET CORN MILLING
xO. Combustion
01. Starch
2051 BREAD AND OTHER BAKERY PRODUCTS, EXCEPT COOKIES AND CRACKERS
xO. Combustion
2062 CANE SUGAR REFINING
xO. Combustion
01. General
2071 CANDY AND OTHER CONFECTIONARY PRODUCTS
xO. Combustion
2073 CHEWING GUM
xO. Combustion
2082 MALT LIQUORS - BREWERIES
xO. Combustion
01. General
2085 DISTILLED, RECTIFIED AND BLENDED LIQUORS
xO. Combustion
2092 SOYBEAN OIL MILLS
xO. Combustion
01. General
2093 VEGETABLE OIL MILLS, EXCEPT CORN, COTTONSEED, AND SOYBEAN
xO. Combustion
2094 ANIMAL AND MARINE FATS AND OILS
xO. Combustion
2095 ROASTING COFFEE
xO. Combustion
01. Direct Fired
02. Indirect Fired
03. Stones and Cooler
04. Spray Cooler
-------
TABLE 5-3
STANDARDIZED SOURCE TYPES (Continued)
2098 MACARONI, SPAGHETTI, VERMICELLI, AND NOODLES
xO. Combustion
2099 FOOD PREPARATIONS, NOT ELSEWHERE CLASSIFIED
xO. Combustion
01. General
2299 TEXTILE GOODS, NOT ELSEWHERE CLASSIFIED
xO. Combustion
01. General
2445 BARRELS
xO. Combustion
01. General
2499 WOOD PRODUCTS, NOT ELSEWHERE CLASSIFIED
xO. Combustion
01. General
2511 WOOD HOUSEHOLD FURNITURE, EXCEPT UPHOLSTERED
xO. Combustion
01. General
2514 METAL HOUSEHOLD FURNITURE
xO. Combustion
2515 MATTRESSES AND BEDSPRINGS
xO. Combustion
2591 VENETIAN BLINDS AND SHADES
xO. Combustion
2621 KRAFT PULP MILLS
xO. Combustion
01. Digester Blow System
02. Smelt Tank
03. Lime Kiln
04. Recovery Furnace
05. Multiple Effect Evaporator
06. Oxidation Tower
-------
TABLE 5-3
STANDARDIZED SOURCE TYPES (Continued)
2641 PAPER COATING AND GLAZING
xO. Combustion
01. General
2642 ENVELOPES
xO. Combustion
01. General
2645 DIE CUT PAPER AND PAPERBOARD AND CARDBOARD
xO. Combustion
01. General
2651 FOLDING PAPERBOARD BOXES
xO. Combustion
2655 FIBER CANS, TUBES, DRUMS, AND SIMILAR PRODUCTS
xO. Combustion
01. General
2661 BUILDING PAPER AND BUILDING BOARD MILLS
xO. Combustion
01. General
2711 NEWSPAPERS: PUBLISHING, PUBLISHING AND PRINTING
xO. Combustion
01. General
2741 MISCELLANEOUS PUBLISHING
xO. Combustion
01. General
2751 COMMERCIAL PRINTING, EXCEPT LITHOGRAPHY
xO. Combustion
01. General
2752 COMMERCIAL PRINTING, LITHOGRAPHY
xO. Combustion
01. General
2813 INDUSTRIAL GASES
xO. Combustion
01. General
-------
TABLE 5-3
STANDARDIZED SOURCE TYPES (Continued)
2816 INORGANIC PIGMENTS
xO. Combustion
01. Calcination
02. Digestion
03. Chloride Process
04. Chloride Coke or Ore Drying
05. Ore Grinding
06. Titanium Oxide Ore Drying
07. Varnish Reaction Kettles
2818 INDUSTRIAL ORGANIC CHEMICALS, NOT ELSEWHERE CLASSIFIED
xO. Combustion
01. General
2819 INDUSTRIAL INORGANIC CHEMICALS, NOT ELSEWHERE CLASSIFIED
xO. Combustion
01. Sulfur Recovery Incinerator
02. Sulfuric Acid
03. Nitric Acid
04. Ammonium Nitrate
05. Hydrofluoric Acid
06. Calcium Carbide - Coke Dryer
07. Calcium Carbide - Electric Furnace Hood
08. Calcium Carbide - Electric Furnace Vents
09. Calcium Carbide - Stack
10. Calcium Carbide - Calcination
11. Phosphoric Acid
2821 PLASTICS MATERIALS, SYNTHETIC RESINS, AND NONVULCANIZABLE
ELASTOMERS
xO. Combustion
01. General
2822 SYNTHETIC RUBBER (vulcanizable elastomers)
xO. Combustion
01. General
2833 MEDICINAL CHEMICALS AND BOTANICAL PRODUCTS
xO. Combustion
01. General
2834 PHARMACEUTICAL PREPARATIONS
xO. Combustion
01. General
-------
TABLE 5-3
STANDARDIZED SOURCE TYPES (Continued)
2841 SOAP AND OTHER DETERGENTS, EXCEPT SPECIALTY CLEANERS
xO. Combustion
01. General
2842 SPECIALTY CLEANING, POLISHING, AND SANITATION PREPARATIONS,
EXCEPT SOAP AND DETERGENTS
xO. Combustion
01. General
2843 SURFACE ACTIVE AGENTS, FINISHING AGENTS, SULFONATED OILS
AND ASSISTANTS
xO. Combustion
01. General
2851 PAINTS, VARNISHES, LACQUERS, ENAMELS, AND ALLIED PRODUCTS
xO. Combustion
01. Varnish Cookers
02. Alkylresin
03. Cooking and Blowing
04. Polymerization
2871 FERTILIZERS
xO. Combustion
01. General
2891 ADHESIVES AND GELATIN
xO. Combustion
01. General
2892 EXPLOSIVES
xO. Combustion
01. General
2899 CHEMICALS AND CHEMICAL PREPARATIONS, NOT ELSEWHERE CLASSIFIED
xO. Combustion
01. General
2911 PETROLEUM REFINING
xO. Combustion
01. Fluid Catalytic Units
02. Moving Bed Catalytic Units
03. Sulfur Recovery
04. Acid Refining of Lube Oils
-------
TABLE 5-3
STANDARDIZED SOURCE TYPES (Continued)
05. Microfines Unit
06. Calciner Kiln
07. Fluid Coker
08. Process Emissions Source
2951 ASPHALT BATCHING
xO. Combustion
01. Batching
02. Quarrying
03. Rock Drying
04. Sheet Rock Cutting and Trimming
2952 ASPHALT FELTS AND COATINGS
xO. Combustion
01. General
2992 LUBRICATING OILS AND GREASES
xO. Combustion
01. General
2999 PRODUCTS OF PETROLEUM AND COAL, NOT ELSEWHERE CLASSIFIED
xO. Combustion
01. General
3069 FABRICATED RUBBER PRODUCTS, NOT ELSEWHERE CLASSIFIED
xO. Combustion
01. General
3079 MISCELLANEOUS PLASTICS PRODUCTS
xO. Combustion
01. General
3111 LEATHER TANNING AND FINISHING
xO. Combustion
3199 LEATHER GOODS, NOT ELSEWHERE CLASSIFIED
xO. Combustion
3211 FLAT GLASS
xO. Combustion
01. General
-------
TABLE 5-3
STANDARDIZED SOURCE TYPES (Continued)
3221 GLASS CONTAINERS
xO. Combustion
01. General
3241 CEMENT, MANUFACTURING
xO. Combustion
01. Dry Process
02. Wet Process
03. Sand Dryer
3251 BRICK AND STRUCTURAL CLAY
xO. Combustion
01. General
3255 CLAY REFRACTORIES
xO. Combustion
01. General
3271 CONCRETE BLOCK AND BRICK
xO. Combustion
01. Cut Stone and Stone Products
3272 CONCRETE PRODUCTS, EXCEPT BLOCK AND BRICK
xO. Combustion
01. Continuous Process
3273 READY-MIXED CONCRETE
xO. Combustion
01. General
3274 LIME PRODUCTION
xO. Combustion
01. Rotary Kiln
02. Vertical Kiln
3281 CUT STONE AND STONE PRODUCTS
xO. Combustion
01. General
3291 ABRASIVE PRODUCTS
xO. Combustion
01. General
-------
TABLE 5-3
STANDARDIZED SOURCE TYPES (Continued)
3293 GASKETS, PACKING, AND ASBESTOS INSULATIONS
xO. Combustion
3295 MINERALS AND EARTHS, GROUND OR OTHERWISE TREATED
xO. Combustion
01. Crushing
02. Conveying, Screening, and Shaking
03. Storage Piles
3296 MINERAL WOOL
xO. Combustion
01. General
3297 NON-CLAY REFRACTORIES
xO. Combustion
01. General
3299 NON-METALLIC PRODUCTS, NOT ELSEWHERE CLASSIFIED
xO. Combustion
3312 IRON AND STEEL MILLS
xO. Combustion
01. Blast Furnace
02. Basic Oxygen Furnace
03. Sintering
04. Coking Operations
05. Electric Arc Furnace
06. Open Hearth Furnace
07. Bessemer
08. Scarfing
3313 ELECTROMETALLURGICAL PRODUCTS
xO. Combustion
01. Molybdenum Production
3316 COLD ROLLED STEEL SHEET, STRIP, AND BARS
xO. Combustion
3321 GRAY IRON FOUNDRIES
xO. Combustion
01. Cupola
02. Electric Induction
03. Reverberatory Furnace
-------
TABLE 5-3
STANDARDIZED SOURCE TYPES (Continued)
3322 MALLEABLE IRON FOUNDRIES
xO. Combustion
01. General
3323 STEEL FOUNDRIES
xO. Combustion
01. Electric Arc
02. Electric Induction
03. Open Hearth
3332 PRIMARY SMELTING AND REFINING OF LEAD
xO. Combustion
01. Sintering
02. Blast Furnace
03. Reverberatory Furnace
04. Refining of Lead
05. Lead Oxide Manufacturing
3334 PRIMARY PRODUCTION OF ALUMINUM
xO. Combustion
01. General
3339 PRIMARY SMELTING AND REFINING OF NON-FERROUS METALS,
NOT ELSEWHERE CLASSIFIED
xO. Combustion
01. General
3341 SECONDARY SMELTING AND REFINING OF NON-FERROUS METALS
xO. Combustion
01. Aluminum - Chlorination Station
02. Aluminum - Crucible Furnace
03. Aluminum - Reverberatory Furnace
04. Aluminum - Sweating Furnace
05. General Aluminum Operations
06. Brass and Bronze - Crucible Furnace
07. Brass and Bronze - Electric Furnace
08. Brass and Bronze - Reverberatory Furnace
09. Brass and Bronze - Rotary Furnace
3352 ROLLING, DRAWING, AND EXTRUDING OF ALUMINUM
xO. Combustion
-------
TABLE 5-3
STANDARDIZED SOURCE TYPES (Continued)
3356 ROLLING, DRAWING AND EXTRUDING OF NON-FERROUS METALS,
EXCEPT COPPER AND ALUMINUM
xO. Combustion
3361 ALUMINUM CASTINGS
xO. Combustion
3362 BRASS, BRONZE, COPPER, COPPER BASE ALLOY CASTINGS
xO. Combustion
01. General
3369 NON-FERROUS CASTINGS, NOT ELSEWHERE CLASSIFIED
xO. Combustion
01. Lead - Cupola
02. Lead - Pot Furnace
03. Lead - Reverberatory and Sweating
04. Zinc - Galvanizing Kettles
05. Zinc - Calcine Kilns
06. Zinc - Pot Furnace
07. Zinc - Sweating Furnace
08. Zinc - Distillation Furnace
3391 IRON AND STEEL FORCINGS
xO. Combustion
01. Forge Furnaces
3392 NON-FERROUS FORCINGS
xO. Combustion
3399 PRIMARY METAL PRODUCTS, NOT ELSEWHERE CLASSIFIED
xO. Combustion
01. General
3411 METAL CANS
xO. Combustion
01. General
3441 FABRICATED STRUCTURAL STEEL
xO. Combustion
01. General
3443 FABRICATED PLATE WORK (boiler shops)
xO. Combustion
-------
TABLE 5-3
STANDARDIZED SOURCE TYPES (Continued)
3444 SHEET METAL WORK
xO. Combustion
3451 SCREW MACHINE PRODUCTS
xO. Combustion
01. General
3452 BOLTS, NUTS, SCREWS, RIVETS, AND WASHERS
xO. Combustion
01. General
3481 MISCELLANEOUS FABRICATED WIRE PRODUCTS
xO. Combustion
3492 SAFES AND VAULTS
xO. Combustion
3493 STEEL SPRINGS
xO. Combustion
3519 INTERNAL COMBUSTION ENGINES, NOT ELSEWHERE CLASSIFIED
xO. Combustion
01. General
3522 FARM MACHINERY AND EQUIPMENT
xO. Combustion
3531 CONSTRUCTION MACHINERY AND EQUIPMENT
xO. Combustion
3541 MACHINE TOOLS, METAL CUTTING TYPES
xO. Combustion
3569 GENERAL INDUSTRIAL MACHINERY AND EQUIPMENT, NOT ELSEWHERE
CLASSIFIED
xO. Combustion
3613 SWITCHGEAR AND SWITCHBOARD APPARATUS
xO. Combustion
-------
TABLE 5-3
STANDARDIZED SOURCE TYPES (Continued)
3621 MOTORS AND GENERATORS
xO. Combustion
3639 HOUSEHOLD APPLIANCES, NOT ELSEWHERE CLASSIFIED
xO. Combustion
01. General
3661 TELEPHONE AND TELEGRAPHIC APPARATUS
xO. Combustion ,
01. General
3711 MOTOR VEHICLES
xO. Combustion
01. General
3712 PASSENGER CAR BODIES
xO. Combustion
3714 MOTOR VEHICLE PARTS AND ACCESSORIES
xO. Combustion
3722 AIRCRAFT ENGINES AND ENGINE PARTS
xO. Combustion
3741 LOCOMOTIVES AND PARTS
xO. Combustion
3742 RAILROADS AND STREET CARS
xO. Combustion
3842 ORTHOPEDIC, PROSTHETIC, AND SURGICAL APPLIANCES AND SUPPLIES
xO. Combustion
3861 PHOTOGRAPHIC EQUIPMENT AND SUPPLIES
xO. Combustion
3999 MANUFACTURING INDUSTRIES, NOT ELSEWHERE CLASSIFIED
xO. Combustion
4021 SLEEPING CAR AND OTHER PASSENGER CAR SERVICE
xO. Combustion
-------
TABLE 5-3
STANDARDIZED SOURCE TYPES (Continued)
4911 ELECTRIC COMPANIES AND SYSTEMS
xO. Combustion
4931 ELECTRIC AND OTHER SERVICES COMBINED (electric service
less than 95% total)
xO. Combustion
4952 SEWERAGE SYSTEMS
xO. Combustion
01. General
4953 REFUSE SYSTEMS
xO. Combustion (fuel)
01. Municipal Incinerator
02. Open Burning
03. On-Site Multichamber Incinerator
04. On-Site Single Chamber Incinerator
05. Flue-fed incinerator
06. Other
4961 STEAM SUPPLY
xO. Combustion
6513 OPERATORS OF APARTMENT BUILDINGS
xO. Combustion
8061 HOSPITALS
xO. Combustion
8221 COLLEGES, UNIVERSITIES, AND PROFESSIONAL SCHOOLS
xO. Combustion
8999 SERVICES, NOT ELSEWHERE CLASSIFIED
xO. Combustion
9100 FEDERAL GOVERNMENT
xO. Combustion
9900 NON-CLASSIFIED ESTABLISHMENTS
xO. Combustion
9999 AREA SOURCES
-------
The basic references used to match control device to industrial
process types were the National Air Pollution Control Administration's Con-
trol Technology documents. The device applications shown in Table 5-2
are present in the Control Cost Program as fixed relationships (i.e., they
can only be alerted by program modification).
If the Source File contains a pollution source whose SIC or process
type is not included in Table 5-2, the user must input the appropriate
source-device applicability data for that source. Up to five additional
SIC codes and their device application criteria may be added to this table
through NAMELIST card input. Since the cost and efficiency characteristics
of each device are pre-programmed, only the devices listed in Table 5-1 may
be selected as applicable to the additional sources. Those device numbers
shown in Table 5-2 but not in Table 5-1 have been included to facilitate
future device applications. The user must be thoroughly familiar with the
program logic before attempting to utilize these device numbers (i.e.,
modification of the program). Exact instructions for the NAMELIST card in-
puts are given in Section 7.5.
5.4.1.2 Control Device Assignment and Effective Rating
Once a list of devices applicable to the particular SIC-Process
code has been formulated, specific characteristics of the source must be
considered. Each control device category has certain operating requirements
which insure compatibility with the source parameters.
(a) Wet Scrubbers (001, 002, 003)
No specific restrictions are placed on the application of
these devices on the basis of source parameters.
(b) Gravity Collectors (004, 005, 006)
These devices do not achieve high enough collections to
meet current air pollution control levels and will not
be utilized in the Implementation Planning Program.
They are included here mainly for completeness; specific
device applicability criteria are not presented.
(c) Cyclone Collectors (007. 008. 009)
Cyclone collectors are not applicable for the control of
particulate emissions from fuel combustion sources burn-
ing (predominately) residual or distillate fuel oil or
gas. There are no other restrictions on the application
of these devices consistent with Table 5-2.
-------
(d) Electrostatic Precipitators (010, Oil, 012)
For fuel combustion sources using oil or gas as a major
fuel, only the high-efficiency device (010) will be used
and its applied efficiency will be set at 75 percent.
(e) Gas Scrubber (013)
No specific source parameters affect the application of
this device.
(f) Mist Collector (014, 015)
These devices are applicable at their rated efficiency.
However, if the existing device is a mist collector, then
only device 014 will be applied and its applied efficiency
will be 90 percent.
(g) Baghouse (016, 017. 018)
Only one of these devices will be assigned to any given
source. For example, if device 017 is applied, then
devices 016 and 018 will not be used. The following
criteria have been programmed for this device category:
(1) These devices are not applicable if the existing
device is 001, 002, 003, or 013.
(2) If exit temperature is less than or equal to 180°F
(355°K) device 018 is used.
(3) If exit temperature is more than 355 K but less than
or equal to 394°K, device 017 is used.
(4) If exit temperature is more than 394 K, device 016
is used.
(h) Afterburners (019, 020, 021. 022)
These devices are assigned without restriction.
(i) Fuel Substitutions (027-032)
The program attempts each fuel substitution on every com-
bustion source. If no change in fuel usage is required
then no output record is created.
(j) Flue Gas Desulfurization (039, 041, 042)
Assignment of flue gas desulfurization depends on the
following conditions:
-------
(1) The source must be a power plant (SIC 4911).
(2) The source must emit more than 20 tons/day of
sulfur dioxide.
(3) If more than 40 percent of the usable heat energy of
the source is produced by the combustion of coal,
then use device 039, 041, and 042.
(4) If less than 40 percent of the usable heat energy of
the source is produced by combustion of coal, then
only device 039 is used.
(k) Sulfuric Acid - Sulfur Plants (043. 044. 045)
These control measures should be applied as specified in
Table 5-2 when the source's emissions are greater than
20 tons/day of sulfur dioxide.
If the temperature of the gas entering the control device (approxi-
mated by exhaust temperature) exceeds 532°K, the program will reduce the
temperature to an acceptable level and determine the associated cost. Sub-
section 5.4.2.4 details the calculations required.
The basic pollutant collection efficiency of each assigned device is
adjusted to account for the particular characteristics of the source to
which it has been applied. All such efficiency corrections used in this
program relate to the particulate collection efficiency. Sulfur oxide
removal efficiency is calculated on the basis of the unadjusted rated
efficiencies.
If a control device is assigned to a source with an existing device
(as defined by the Source File) and if a high degree of particulate re-
moval has already been achieved, additional collection is quite difficult.
To account for the reduced efficiency of "second" devices, Table 5-4
has been created and programmed as a part of the Control Cost Program.
Efficiency corrections for the three most widely used types of particulate
collectors are calculated on this basis. After the correction factor
has been determined (for the approporiate device classifications) from
Table 5-4, the actual applied efficiency is calculated by means of the
following equation:
Applied Eff. = 1. - (1. - Rated Eff. ) (Correction Factor)
-------
Existing
Efficiency
> 0 and £40
>40 and £60
>60 and £65
>65 and £70
>70 and £75
>75 and £80
>80 and £83
>83 and £86
>86 and £89
>89 and £91
>91 and £93
>93 and £95
>95 and £97
>97 and £99
>99 and <100
TABLE 5-4
EXISTING DEVICE CORRECTION FACTORS
Correction Factor
Wet Scrubber
(001,002,003)
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.5
1.8
2.2
2.6
3.1
3.5
4.1
4.7
5.5
7.3
10.0
Dry Cyclone
(007,008,009)
1.0
1.3
1.8
2.3
2.7
3.2
3.8
4.4
5.1
5.8
6.6
7.6
9.0
11.0
12.0
Electrostatic
Precipitator
(010,011,012)
1.0
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.6
2.0
2.5
2.9
3.4
3.9
4.4
5.4
7.5
11.0
-------
Applied Efficiency and Rated Efficiency are decimal fractions. The rated
efficiency is given in the device record for each control device. An
example of this efficiency is as follows:
A high-efficiency electrostatic precipitator (010) is applied to a
source already employing a 99 percent efficiency particulate
collection system. According to Table 5-4, a factor of 7.5 should
be used; the actual applied efficiency will be:
Applied efficiency = 1 - (.01) 7.5 = .925
= 92.5% instead of the rated 99%.
Should the effect of this correction be to reduce a device's applied
particulate collection efficiency below 30 percent, then that source-device
combination is rated not acceptable and is not included in the output re-
cords. Only after a device has been rated acceptable for a specific
source (according to criteria presented in this and the previous subsection)
are the cost calculations carried out. After the set of assigned control
devices has been determined for each pollution source, the costs associated
with applying and operating each device are calculated.
5.4.2 Cost Calculations
The total annual cost resulting from the assignment of a control
device to a source involves the component costs: purchase cost, installation
cost, interest: charges, and operating and maintenance cost. The calcu-
lations involving each of these component costs are described in the
following subsections.
5.4.2.1 Purchase Cost
The purchase cost of control devices depends, in general, upon the
characteristics and complexity of the control device and the size of the
pollution source to be controlled. In the Control Cost Program, these
parameters are used to determine a basic purchase cost equation for each
control device. The general form of this equation is:
2
y = a + bx + ex ,
where y = purchase cost in thousands of dollars, and a, b, and c are user
input coefficients in the device specification. Experience has shown
that the coefficient c in the above equation can be set equal to zero in
most instances. Table 5-5 displays the pre-set coefficients associated
-------
TABLE 5-5
MANUFACTURER'S PRICE
Control Measure
Wet Collector
001 High Efficiency |
002 Medium Efficiency |
003 Low Efficiency
Mechanical Collectors
Gravity Collectors
004 High Efficiency
005 Medium Efficiency
006 Low Frequency
Centrifugal Collectors
007 High Efficiency
008 Medium Efficiency
009 Low Efficiency
Electrostatic Precipitators
010 High Efficiency
Oil Medium Efficiency
012 Low Efficiency
Fabric Filters
016 High Temperature Type
017 Medium Temperature Type
018 Low Temperature Type
Gas Scrubber
013
Mist Eliminator
014 High Velocity
015 Low Velocity
Purchase Cost Equation
y = 2.886 + .228x*
y = 1.257 + .145x
y = -.445 + .326x
y = -.042 + .155x
y = .003 + .056x
y = 2.413 + .197x
y = 1.507 + .157x
y = .244 + .099x
y = 42.413 + .623x
y = 31.243 + .441x
y = 19.695 + .318x
y = 1.448 + .838x
y = 3.478 + .448x
y = 2.658 + .325x
y = 3.175 + .251x
y = 2.658 + .325x
y = 1.772 + .217x
*Cost Functions y = 10 Dollars, x = 10 ACFM.
-------
TABLE 5-5
MANUFACTURER'S PRICE (Continued)
Control Measure Purchase Cost Equation
Increased Combustion Efficiency (Afterburner)
019 Catalytic Combustion . y = 7.550 + 1.515x*
020 Catalytic with Heat Exchange y = 7.550 + 1.515x
021 Direct Flame Combustion y = 5.713 + 1.174x
022 Direct Flame with Heat Exchange y = 5.713 + 1.174x
2
Fuel Substitution
3
Flue Gas Desulfurization
039 Catalytic Oxidation Io8in y = -12-412 + 1-67 log,n x
-7 -17 9
041 Limestone Injection (dry) y = 9.95*10 x -6.03- 10 x
042 Limestone Injection (wet) y = 1.108-10~ x -4.81'KT1 x
9.572-10 8sx - 4.16-10 18sx2
By-Product Manufacture
043 Sulfuric Acid Plant (Contact Process)
044 Sulfuric Acid Plant (Double Contact) (See Page 5-44, item (f))
045 Sulfur Plant
*Cost Functions y = 103 Dollars, x = 103 ACFM.
Heat exchangers are considered accessory equipment and their costs are
included under installation costs.
2
Fuel substitution cannot be represented by a simple formula. A complete
explanation of the procedure used to compute the cost of fuel substitution
is found in Section 5.4.5.
3
The "x" terms in the equations should be at the rated capacity of the
source (BTU/hr).
In practice, this process only applies to coal. The parameter "s" appear-
ing in the cost equation is the sulfur content in percent by weight (i.e. ,
0 < s < 100).
-------
with each control device included in the Control Cost Program. The
variable x represents the measure of the source's size, as described be-
low.
(a) Devices 001. 002. 003, 013
For these devices, x is exhaust gas volume in thousands
of ACFM. Since a temperature change occurs in these
wet collection devices, a new exhaust volume based on
the original gas volume is computed, as follows:
T = 294 + .097 (T -294)
n o
where T = new exit temperature (°K)
n
T = exit temperature as obtained from the
° Source File (°K)
then
x = C (T /T )
o n o
where C = exhaust gas volume as obtained from the Source
° File (ACFM)
(b) Devices 004-012 and 014-018
The parameter x is the exhaust gas volume in thousands of
ACFM as obtained from the source file, with no corrections
applied.
(c) Devices 019-022
The parameter x in these purchase price equations is the
actual exhaust gas emission rate. As these devices
(afterburners) also produce a change in the exit tempera-
ture, adjustments must be made. 'The new exit temperature
(T ) is given by:
T = T + t
n o
where T = existing exit temperature (°K)
t = 288 for device 019
139 for device 020
556 for device 021
222 for device 022
-------
(d) Device 039
For this device, x is the logarithm (base 10) of the
rated capacity of the plant (BTU/hr.)> and y is the
logarithm (base 10) of the purchase cost (10^ $).
(e) Devices 041-042
For these devices, x is the rated capacity of the plant
(BTU/hr.) as obtained from the Source File.
(f) Devices 043-045
For these devices, x is the logarithm (base 10) of the
amount of sulfur in the exhaust gas in tons/day, calcu-
lated as follows:
x = log10 (Es/2)
where E = annual SO. emission rate as obtained from
S £-
the Source File (tons/day).
For these devices the price coefficient "a" is determined
by the program. This is done on the basis of the device
and the percent by volume of sulfur dioxide in the ex-
haust gas. This percent is calculated using the following
formula:
P = 18.48E T/V
S
where E = annual sulfur dioxide emission rate as obtained
from the Source File (tons/day)
T = exit temperature as obtained from the Source
File (°K)
V = exhaust gas volume as obtained from the Source
File (ACFM)
P = percent sulfur dioxide by volume in the exhaust
gas
The quantity "a" (to be used in the cost equation) is then
determined as follows:
-------
Device 043 Device 044
0_< P _< 3.0 a = -0.8218 a = -0.7426
3.0< P _< 6.0 a = -1.0647 a = -0.9855
6.0< P _<10.0 a = -1.2937 a = -1.2145
P >10.0 a = -1.3449 a = -1.2657
Device 045
Q<_ P <_ 5.0 a = -0.5779
5.0< P _< 7.0 a = -0.7069
P > 7.0 a = -0.7629
In this case the "y" value, which the cost equation gives,
is not the purchase cost in thousands of dollars as it
is for other devices; instead it is the logarithm (base
10) of the purchase cost in millions of dollars.
In summary, the cost equation for devices 043, 044, and
045 is:
y = a + bx
where y = logarithm (base 10) of purchase cost (10 $)
a = number determined by device type and percent
S0_ in exhaust gas.
b = user input Manufacturer's Price Coefficient
No. 2.
x = logarithm (base 10) of the amount of sulfur
in the exhaust gas (tons/day).
A final test is made to eliminate very low efficiency
devices (based on purchase cost). If y is less than
1.0-106 for device 043, 1.2-106 for device 044; or 2.5-106
for device 045, the device is not applied.
When the corrosive gas stream from acid manufacturing facilities
are controlled, more expensive control device construction materials must
be used. For these cases the Control Cost Program, utilizes the following
factors to increase the device purchase price:
If exit temperature _< 330°F, multiply purchase cost by 1.7.
If exit temperature > 300°F, multiply purchase cost by 5.0
-------
5.4.2.2 Installation Cost
The cost of installing a control device on a particular source is
calculated on the basis of an installation cost factor. This factor is
expressed as a percentage of the purchase price and is a user input item
for each control device. The program sums purchase cost and installation
charge to determine the total installed cost for each source-device com-
bination.
For some control device installations however, extensive modifica-
tions of the source are required and it is not possible to identify a
purchase cost figure independent of the installation charge. For these
devices, the total installed cost is estimated by the purchase price equa-
tions described in Subsection 5.4.2.1. No additional factor is required
in these cases to account for installation at a source site. Devices in
this category are the flue gas desulfurization units (039, 041, 042)
and by-product manufacturing facilities (043, 044, 045).
5.4.2.3 Annual Capital Charge
After the total installed cost (purchase plus installation) of a, de-
vice has been determined, an annualized capital charge is calculated,
based on the user inputs: rated life of the control device and prevailing
interest rate. Therefore, the annual cost comprises both depreciation of
the initial investment total (installed cost from Subsection 5.4.2.2) and
the interest costs.
The particular accounting technique employed here is called the
Capital Recovery Factor (C.R.F.). The use of the C.R.F. allows the write-
off of the initial investment to be divided into a uniform series of end-
of-year payments.
The C.R.F. multiplied by the initial investment cost (debt) deter-
mines the uniform end-of-year payments necessary to repay the debt in "N"
years (the rated life of the device) with an interest rate "i." The
C.R.F. is calculated by the following relation:
c.R.F.
(1 + i)N - 1
-------
The annual capital charge is then computed to be the product of the total
installed cost and the C.R.F. value.
In practice, the capital recovery concept operates as follows:
(1) Payments are made at the end of each year in the amount
determined by multiplying the capital recovery factor by
the initial debt.
(2) Interest payments are made to the bondholders at the end
of each year in the amount determined by multiplying the
interest rate by the initial debt.
(3) The difference between the equal annual payments and the
interest payments to the bondholders is placed into a
depreciation account where it is assumed to draw interest
at the same rate paid to the bondholders.
The total yearly cost to the source for controlling pollution by
means of a specified device is then the sum of the annual capital charge
and the annualized operating and maintenance expense discussed in the next
subsection.
5.4.2.4 Operating and Maintenance Expense
Operating and maintenance (O&M) expenses are usually a major portion
of the annualized control device cost. The factors which must be con-
sidered in determining the annual O&M cost of a particular source-device
combination consist of: the amount of power (calculated as electrical
power) necessary to maintain the effluent gas flow through the control de-
vice, the quantity of labor required, the cost of liquid or additional fuel
used by the device, and the cost or credit resulting from disposal of the
collected pollutant. These factors are used in the following equations
to determine the O&M cost for each type of control device pre-set in the
program.
For control devices 001 through 022, a single equation is used to
compute the annual O&M cost:
O&M = AB + CD + EF + GI + JK + LM,
where A = electricity quantity (kwhr/yr) (a)*
B = electricity cost ($/kwhr) (input as regional
data)
*
The letters refer to the following items which describe the computation
of these data elements.
-------
C = water quantity (gal/yr) (b)
D = water cost ($/gal) (input as regional data)
E = chemical quantity (ton/yr) (c)
F = chemical cost ($/ton) (input as device data)
G = fuel quantity (cu.ft./yr) (d)
I = fuel cost ($/cu. ft.) (natural gas value, input
as regional data)
J = disposal quantity (ton/yr) (e)
K = disposal cost ($/ton) (input as device data)
L = labor quantity (hr/yr) (f)
M = labor cost ($/hr) (input as regional data)
The computation of these data elements are as follows:
(a) Electricity Quantity (kwhr/yr) = (1.955 10~4)pVH
where p = pressure drop (in H~0)
V = exhaust gas volume (ACFM) this is the new
computed volume (x) in the case of a wet device
(Subsection 5.4.2.1 item (a)).
H = operating hours (hr/yr)
If the device is one of the electrostatic precipitators
(010, Oil, 012), the following quantities are added to
the electricity quantity:
Device 010, add (0.34 10~3) VH
-3
Device Oil, add (0.26 10 ) VH
Device 012, add (0.19 10~ ) VH
_2
(b) Liquid Quantity (gal/yr) = (3.0 10 ) VH
The liquid quantity is only computed for wet device's
(001, 002, 003, 013). For these cases the exhaust gas
volume (V) will always be the new computed volume.
(c) Chemical Quantity (ton/yr) = P H
5
where P = amount of SO- removed by the device.
S £
(d) Fuel Quantity = fVH .
where f = 0.490, if device 019
0.245, if device 020
1.000, if device 021
-------
0.40A, if device 022
0.000, all other devices
It should be noted that additional fuel is only used for
the catalytic and direct flame afterburners. The program
assumes that the additional fuel is natural gas.
(e) Disposal Quantity - Emission rate for pollutant in
question (tons/day) times new device efficiency (after ad-
justment) for same pollutant times 365 (days/year).
This is computed for each of the pollutants.
(f) Labor Quantity = LH
Where H = operating time (hr/yr)
L = labor (labor hours/operation hours)
There are four, user input, labor values which relate
to the source size being controlled (small, medium,
large, and extra large). Source size is measured by V,
actual cubic feet of exhaust gas per minute (as corrected).
The program selects the appropriate value as follows:
Use the "small" value for V £ 40,000
Use the "medium" value for 40,000 < V <_ 250,000
Use the "large" value for 250,000 < V <_ 1,000,000
Use the "extra large" value for V > 1,000,000
For any particular control device, only some of the terms in the above
equation will be non-zero. An electrostatic precipitator, for instance,
will not use liquid, chemicals, or additional fuel. The quantity JK how-
ever, will always be calculated.
Operating and maintenance costs for the remaining control devices
cannot be estimated by the above calculations. These devices are generally
more complex (involving sulfur oxide removal), and separate equations have
been developed to compute their O&M expenses. These equations are based
on manufacturers' specifications and operating experience reported in the
literature.
For the three flue gas desulfurization measures considered, the fol-
lowing calculations of operating cost are used.
-------
Device 039 - Catalytic Oxidation
O&M = 0.05'(total installed cost)
+ AB + JK
Where A, B, J, and K are as defined
above.
Device 041 - Dry Limestone
O&M = 365 PC (0.17 + 7.0 SC ) + 25,000
Device 042 - Wet Limestone
O&M = 365 P (0.196 + 3.82 SC ) +
130,000 C C
where P = coal burned in ton/day (Source File)
S = coal sulfur content, decimal (Source File)
C = chemical cost in $/ton (input as device data)
The O&M costs associated with the use of sulfuric acid or sulfur
by-product manufacturing as a pollutant control measure (devices 043, 044,
and 045) are computed from the following equation:
O&M = JK - (Purchase Cost)/(Rated Life) + y
where, for each device:
J = disposal quantity, as calculated in item (e) above,
K = input disposal cost
Purchase Cost = value computed in Subsection 5.4.2.1, item (f)
Rated Life = input as device data
y = value as calculated below. The variable P used in these
computations is the percentage concentration of sulfur1
dioxide, by volume, in the exhaust gas as given in Sub-
section 5.4.2.1, item (f).
Devices 043, 044 - Sulfuric Acid Plant - Single Contact and
Double Contact Process
logioy = °'75 logiox + a
where y = annual cost (in 10 $)
x = sulfur emission in ton/day
-------
if 0 <_ P < 3.0, then a = 1.6903
3.0 <_ P < 6.0, then a = 1.4445
6.0 <_ P < 10.0, then a = 1.2076
P > 10.0, then a = 1.721
Device 045 - Sulfur Plant
Iog10y =0.81 log1Qx + a
where y = annual cost (in 10 $)
x = sulfur emission (above)
if 0 <_ P < 5.0, then a = -1.210
5.0 <_ P < 7.0, then a = 1.375
P >_ 7.0, then a = 1.435
In addition to the O&M costs described in this Subsection, the program
calculates the cost of necessary cooling of the effluent gas stream prior
to device application. This cost is calculated whenever the temperature
of the gas entering the cooling device (approximated by the exhaust gas
temperature) exceeds 532°K (500°F). The cost computations, performed for
each source assigned device combination, are as follows:
If exhaust gas volume is greater than or equal to 2000 ACFM but less
than 6800 ACFM,
Cost ($) = 1131.7 [ eC'436 ln (S/10°°)] j + 124 + .07185 S'
- 71 9
+ S[(. 0003225 + .000016286 T ) H
-0000019 (.24T - 71.26) H
-------
If exhaust gas volume is greater than or equal to 6800 ACFM but less
100,000 ACFM
Cost ($) = 720.17 f e['668 ln M + 124 + .07185 S'
OAT _ 71 9
+ S[(.0003225 + .000016286 _ ) H
, .0000019 (.24T - 71.2)
+ n + . U4 J
where
S = exhaust gas volume (ACFM)
S1 = volume of cooled gas to control device (ACFM @ 500°F)
= S[526.2 + .023T]/T
H = operating hours per year
= 365 (number of shifts/day) 8
T = exhaust gas temperature (°K)
If the gas volume is less than 2000 ACFM the program will not apply
the device being considered, and will go on to the next assigned device.
If the gas volume is greater than 100000 ACFM, the program will divide
the ACFM value into equal parts, each of which is less than 100000 ACFM.
The gas cooling data will then be calculated using the procedure described
above. The resulting cost and cooled exhaust gas volume is then multiplied
by the number^of equal parts to produce the total values for the device.
The costs calculated above combine purchase, installation, and operat-
ing costs for the gas cooling measure (assumed to be of the water spray
type) and are on an annualized basis. The new exhaust gas volume (S') and
new exhaust gas temperature (532°K) become the new source-device character-
istics.
The total annual device cost, output by the program, is then the
annual capital cost (defined in Subsection 5.4.2.3) plus the O&M cost and,
if applicable, the gas cooling cost described in this subsection.
-------
5.4.3 Fuel Substitution
In addition to the devices just described, a set of emmision control
methods have been included in the Control Cost Program. These methods
are designed to provide a reduction in combustion source emissions by
using fuel substitutions to modify the existing fuel use pattern. The
following sections describe the data inputs required, the calculations
used, and the types of output values created by the various fuel sub-
stitution measures.
5.4.3.1 Fuel Parameters and General Calculations
The fuel substitution portion of the Control Cost Programs uses the
data items shown in Table 5-6 (obtained from the locations indicated).
Prior to entering a specific fuel substitution routine, the program
calculates the following quantities in the manner shown. These quanti-
ties are calculated once for each point source and are used later in the
various fuel substitution calculations.
(1) BTU contribution of each fuel burned, B
(a) B.(BTU/year) = A. H. (Boiler Eff). 365
(2) Annual cost of each fuel burned, P.
(a) P1($/year) = C± A± 365
(3) Potential emission from each fuel burned, E..**
(a) Esc(ton/day) = 19.0 AC SG 10"3
(b) ESR(ton/day) = 79.3 AR SR 10~6
(c) ESD(ton/day) = 71.8^ SD 10"6
(d) ESG(ton/day) = 0.2 AG 10"9
(e) Epc(ton/day) = 0.5 AC a f± 10~3
(f) EpR(ton/day) = 0.5 AR f2 10~6
Table 5-6 for subscript identification
Table 5-7 for (Boiler Eff)i values.
See Tables 5-8 and 5-9 for f.. and f values respectively.
-------
TABLE 5-6
FUEL PARAMETERS
Symbol
H.
e.
J
Ni
Ni
MA.
Variable Name
Source ID number
Amount of each existing
fuel burned
Sulfur content of each
existing fuel burned
Heat content of each
existing fuel burned
Ash content of coal
burned
Units
Tons, gallons, cu.
ft. per day*
Percent by weight
(decimal equivalent)
BTU per ton, gallon
or cu. ft.*
Percent by weight
(decimal equivalent)
Existing device efficiency
for each pollutant Decimal fraction
Emission rate for each
pollutant
Unit cost of each exist-
ing fuel burned
Sulfur content of each
new fuel available
Heat content of each new
fuel available
Ash content of each new
coal available
Maximum allowable sulfur
content for each fuel type
Tons per day
Dollars per ton
gallon, cu. ft.*
Percent by weight
(decimal equivalent)
BTU per ton, gallon
or cu. ft.*
Percent by weight
(decimal equivalent)
Percent by weight
i subscripts refer to type of fuel (C - coal, R - residual
D - distallate oil, G - gas)
j subscripts refer to pollutant (S - SO , P - particulate)
Where Obtained
Source data
Source data
Source data
Source data
Source data
Source data
Source data
Region data
Region data
Region data
Region data
Region data
oil,
For coal, oil. and gas respectively.
-------
TABLE 5-7
BOILER EFFICIENCES
BTU Range Efficiency
Residual Distillate Natural
Coal Oil Oil Gas
Annual BTU Output >_ 0.1 x 109 .87 .86 .86 .82
Annual BTU Output < 0.1 x 109 .75 .77 .77 .80
NOTE: Boiler efficiencies are utilized in the following manner to
calculate the amounts of new fuel required:
Q
1. Assume annual BTU > 0.1 x 10
2. Use efficiencies from first row.
3. Compute: H. A. Eff. for each fuel (i) and total them
r ill
together
9
4. If total in No. 3 is less than 0.1 x 10 , then the
initial assumption (step 1) was incorrect and the
computation is redone using the set of
efficiencies from the second row.
-------
TABLE 5-8
(f ) COAL PARTICULATE EMISSION FACTORS
Process No. Combustion Type f..
00 All types not listed 15
10 Pulverized, general 16
20 Pulverized, Dry bottom 17
30 Pulverized, Wet bottom without
fly ash reinjection 13
40 Pulverized, Wet bottom with
fly ash reinjection 24
50 Cyclone 2
60 Spreader Stoker without fly
ash reinjection 13
70 Spreader Stoker with fly
ash reinjection 20
80 All other stokers 5
90 Hand fired 20/a*
a = ash content of coal burned, percent by weight (decimal equivalent)
-------
TABLE 5-9
(f2) OIL AND GAS PARTICULATE EMISSION FACTORS
SIC codes
Fuel 4911 2xxx, 3xxx All Other
Residual Oil 8 23 23
Distillate Oil 6.5 15 15
Natural Gas 15 18 19
-------
(g) EpD(ton/day) = 0.5 Ad f,, 10 6
(h) EpG(ton/day) = 0.5 AQ f2 10~9
S^, S0, S^ and a are all expressed as a percent (i.e., a
(_. K U
number between 0 and 100). The coefficients were obtained
by combining conversion dimensional factors with appropriate
emission factors (generated by HEW).
To insure the compatibility of the input data, the program next com-
pares the input total emission rates (e.) with the calculated fuel emission
rates (E.). This comparison is made as follows (where the emission rates have
have been corrected for any existing control devices):
(ESC + ESR + ESD + ESG} (
(EPC + EPR + EPD + EPG} (
1 - V = Es
ES EP
If0.8< < 1.2 and 0.8 < < 1.2, then the input data is
- es - - eP
assumed to be correct for the purposes of this test. However, if the
ratio of the emission rates is not within these limits for either pollu-
tant, the program terminates operations on that source, prints £he follow-
ing data, and begins operating on the next source:
(Source ID Number) - fuel data error - E. = (Calculated Emission Rate)
e. = (Input Emission Rate)
After making these calculations, the program begins application of specific
fuel substitution measures.
5.4.3.2 Specific Fuel Substitution Measures
The program contains three fuel elimination methods (Devices 027,
028, and 029) and three fuel sulfur content limitation methods (Devices
030, 031, and 032). The fuel elimination methods are primarily intended
to control particulate emissions and as a result, are likely to yield
misleading results if applied to sulfur oxides emissions.
The operational characteristics of the fuel substitution measures are
as follows:
-------
(a) (Device 027) Elimination of Coal
This method converts any coal which a source may be burn-
ing to residual oil, distillate oil, or natural gas with
an equal or lower sulfur content. If the source is not
burning coal (i.e., B = 0), this method is inapplicable
and the program moves to the next control method. If the
source is burning coal (i.e., Bc ^ 0), the program examines
the alternate fuel information in the regional data, and
picks the grade of residual oil with the highest sulfur
content less than or equal to the sulfur content of the
coal being replaced. In the event there is no residual
fuel oil in the region data input which satisfies the
above requirements, the program will examine distillate
oil and attempt, in the same manner as above, to select
an alternate fuel. If no distillate oil is available
which meets the requirements, the program switches to
natural gas (if available) as the only possible alternate
fuel. If gas is not available, the program moves to the
next control method. In this case the program prints an
error message to the effect that the specified fuel sub-
stitution could not be made. The quantity of new
(substituted) fuel needed is determined by the require-
ment that the usable heat input (BTU/hr) must remain un-
changed after the fuel substitution.
(b) (Device 028) Elimination of Coal and Residual Oil
This control method operates in the same manner as
Device 027, except that the first fuel switch attempted
(from coal and residual oil) is to the proper grade of
distillate oil.
(c) (Device 029) Elimination of Coal and All Fuel Oil
This control method operates in the same manner as
Device 027, except that all existing fuels are switched
to gas.
(d) (Devices 030, 031, 023) Fuel Limitation Based on Maximum
Allowable Sulfur Content
The three fuel sulfur content limitation methods differ
only in that a unique set of allowable sulfur content
levels may be input for each method. For each method,
an allowable sulfur content for coal, oil and gas must
be input.
The program is designed to replace existing high sulfur
content fuels with lower suflur content fuels (of the
same type if possible) taken from the input region data
base. For the program to perform realistic fuel (or fuel
grade) switches the user must insure that the input
alternate fuel data and the input fuel sulfur limitation
values are compatible. Failure to do so is likely to result
-------
in the program simulating unnecessary fuel switches that
would not be resorted to in practice. If this occurs,
the cost and emission data produced by the program will
be misleading.
The basic series of steps followed by the program for
assigning fuel usage under the various sulfur limitations
are outlined below:
(1) Each existing fuel being burned is examined to deter-
mine if the specified sulfur limitation is exceeded.
(2) If the limit is exceeded, then a search is made of the
regional data base for a fuel of the same type (i.e.,
coal, residual oil, etc.) having the proper percent
sulfur.
(3) If no fuel of the same type meets the requirements,
then alternate fuel types are considered. Alternate
fuel types are examined in the following order until
a suitable fuel is found: Residual Oil (grades 1
through 5), Distillate Oil (grades 1 through 3), and
Natural Gas. The user should note that switching
fuel types will change the maximum allowable sulfur
content (since a separate allowable content for each
fuel type is input).
5.A.3.3 Fuel Substitution Computations
After a suitable fuel grade has been determined, the program carries
out a series of calculations leading to the determination of the cost and
the various fuel use and emission parameters. The first step is to compute
the amount of each new fuel required. This is accomplished through use of
the annual cost (P.) and annual BTU contribution (B.), as calculated in
Subsection 5.A. 3.1. The specific procedure for the fuel elimination and
sulfur content limitation methods are as follows:
Devices 027, 028, 029
For these devices, the total usable heat produced by the elimi-
nated fuels (Bi,i = C and/or R and/or D) must equal the total
usable heat produced by the substitute fuel (B ,i = R or D or
n \ i " i
G), i.e.,
y B. = B
*i i Ni
Substitute fuels are sought having the same or lower
sulfur content as the fuel to be eliminated. If these
requirements cannot be satisfied for a given fuel substi-
tution, the program will attempt to meet the conditions
with a more costly fuel substitution (e.g., for device
027, if residual oil is not acceptable switch to
distillate oil is attempted).
-------
Devices 030, 031, 032
For the sulfur limitation methods, a number of fuels may
be eliminated in favor of a number of others, but the
substitutions are made on a one-for-one basis so that the
usable heat produced by an eliminated fuel will be exactly
matched by the usable heat produced by the corresponding
substitute fuel, i.e.,
BXT. (i=C,R,D, or G) = B. (i=C,R, or D)
Ml i
The process is repeated unti the requirements are met or
the fuel types available for substitution are exhausted,
in which case the program will print a message to the
user and go on to the next control method (device) in the
table.
The amount(s) of new fuel(s) is then determined from the following
equation:
n
Nl (i = C.R.D, or G)
.
i HNC (Boiler Eff.)
The annual cost of each new fuel is then computed as
PNi = ANi CNi*
Summing P for all new fuels used gives the total annaul cost of the
fuel(s). The annual costs of the fuels to be eliminated (P.) are then
summed. The total additional annual fuel cost (C ,,) is the total new
add
fuel sum minus the total old fuel sum.
The new (controlled) emission rates are now calculated by use of the
following equations:
eNS= [llD7 - ES +<5-2ANCSNC10~5>
+ <21-5 ANR SNR 10"8) + (17'7 AND 10"8)
(5.5
--E +(1'37ANCaNfl
-------
(1'37 V f2 10") + (1'37aND f2
f2 10
-12,
(1 - Dp)
The decimal efficiencies of the control method are calculated from:
D = ! _ . D = ! _
UNS L eQ ' °NP i eD
b r
The final calculations for the fuel substitution methods consist
of: (1) summing the total fuel, by fuel category, used by the source
after application of each method and (2) for devices 030, 031, and 032,
calculating the sulfur dioxide allowable emission rate.
The sulfur dioxide allowable emission rate for devices 030, 031,
and 032 is based upon the existing source emissions and upon the existing
and allowable sulfur content. If a source already uses fuel with a sulfur
content at or below the allowable levels then the allowable emission rate
is set equal to existing emissions. If sulfur content levels higher than
the maximum allowable are being used then the following computation is
I
carried out for each fuel type.
,,, ,, . . T- ,. T? Allowable Sulfur Content,-
Allowable Emission. = Existing Emission. -= : - : - ., , - - - 1
i & i Existing Sulfur Content.^
where the existing emission rate used in this equation represent the emis-
sions from a particular fuel type. These allowable emissions are then
summed by fuel type to provide an overall allowable source emission rate
under the sulfur content limitation specified by the control measure.
5.5 PROGRAM OUTPUT
The Control Cost Program produces output in printed table form and
on magnetic tape. The magnetic tape output, defined as the Control Cost
File, is used by the Emission Standards Program. Both types of output
contain the same information. As a result, the tabular data may be used
to verify the Control Cost Program results before proceeding with the
Emission Standards Program run. Example computer generated output for the
Control Cost Program is presented in Subsection 7.5.
-------
The program table output consists of the following:
Regional Data
The Regional Data Table displays those user input param-
eters which describe regional economic and fuel availability
conditions. This table provides a convenient reference for
selection of sulfur limitation standards in the Emission
Standards Program.
Device Data
This output displays the control device data used during
the Control Cost Program run. These data may be either
pre-set or user generated input values. The table lists all
the devices available for application in the Control Cost
Program together with their efficiencies, cost information
and operating characteristics. This table provides a con-
venient reference to use if apparently incorrect values
are calculated in the application of particular control
devices.
Device Applicability 'Criteria
If the user has included source types other than those
fixed in the program (see Table 5-3), an output is provided
displaying the added source types. This output consists
of SIC code and process number for each new source along
with an indication of which control devices may be applied
to this source.
Control Cost Data
The basic output data generated by the Control Cost Program
consists of both calculated data and unaltered data from
the Source File. For each source a line of unaltered data
is printed (ID line) and a line of data (DEV line) for each
applied device is printed.
The Source ID line consists of the existing data: emission
rates, device efficiency, rated capacity and maximum process
weight, fuel heat contents, and plant parameters (shifts and
use factor. The DEV lines (containing data resulting from
application of each device) consists of device identification,
efficiency (both pollutants), resulting exist gas temperature
and volume, total annualized costs, operating and maintenance
cost, cost effectiveness figures, and fuel use rates after de-
vice application. A flag is also shown to indicate if gas
cooling has been used. The first device considered is always
the existing device, represented by a device identification of
0. (This does not reflect the existing device identification
number input to the Source File). Therefore, the first print-
ed line under the DEV line is also data taken directly from
the Source File.
-------
5.6 THE CONTROL COST FILE UPDATE PROGRAM
The data on the Control Cost File, created by the Control Cost
Program, may be reviewed by the user through the table outputs described
in the previous subsection. In addition, a NAMELIST dump of the file con-
tents may be obtained through the use of the Control Cost File Update
Program. If errors or omissions are detected which may be corrected the
existing file may be updated through use of the update program. This pro-
gram is written in the FORTRAN language and allows the user to update any
Control Cost File record. However, the update capability is limited in
that no record may be deleted entirely and no new record may be added to
the file. It is anticipated that extensive changes of this type would
require the user to rerun the Control Cost Program. Subsection 7.6.3 gives
the detailed input and output specifications for the update program.
-------
-------
6.0 CONTROL STRATEGIES SEGMENT
6.1 PURPOSE
The basic function of the implementation Planning Program is to
determine the effects of various regional air pollution control alterna-
tives on source emission rates, control costs and ambient air quality
levels. This capability is exercised through application of the Control
Strategies Segment, which brings together the economic and technical
estimates generated by the Control Cost Segment and the regional pollutant
dispersion information produced by the Air Pollutant Concentration Segment.
The Control Strategies Segment can be used to simulate the enactment
of a variety of emission standards for particulate matter and sulfur
dioxide. Provision is made for each political jurisdiction within the
region to select a set of emission standards independently of other juris-
dictions. As a result, realistic simulations of legislatively possible
and politically feasible air pollution control effects are possible.
The Control Strategies Segment consists of the three separate pro-
grams; Emission Standards Program, Emission Standards File Update Program,
and Regional Strategies Program. These programs are designed to be run
as separate job steps.
The operation of this segment begins with the use of the Emission
Standards Program to apply candidate emission standards to the point
sources within each political jurisdiction. The candidate emission
standards are selected, by the user, from a list of standards types fixed
in the program. The point source characteristics (obtained from the
Control Cost File) which comply with these standards are then output on
the Emission Standards File for use by the Regional Strategies Program.
If the user desires to apply emission standards types or control
devices not considered by the program, the appropriate application data
(user generated) must be added to the Emission Standards File. The modi-
fication of this file is accomplished with the Emission Standards File
Update Program.
After the Emission Standards File is judged to contain all necessary
data, it is used by the Regional Strategies Program to construct the
-------
candidate emission control strategies. For each strategy, the program
summarizes the resulting source and device characteristics on both a polit-
ical jurisdiction and a regional basis. Summary tables are given for
existing emission rates, allowable emission rates (based on the applied
emission standards), controlled emission rates (resulting from control
device application required for emission standard compliance), and annual
cost of control. In addition to the emission rate and cost summaries,
new air pollutant concentration values are computed. The calculation of
the new concentration values is accomplished through use of the Source
Contribution File (the Air Pollutant Concentration Program need not be
re-executed) and is based on existing or allowable emission rates, which-
ever is less. Emission control effects on area sources is accounted for
by user input scale factors. The scaled area source emission rates are
included in the summary tables and are used during calculation of the new
air quality.
The user may also obtain emission rate summaries and new air quality
for future (projected) time periods. This is accomplished by input pro-
jection factors for each source (both point and area) in the region.
These factors are used to project both the existing and allowable emission
rates resulting from a selected strategy.
6.2 EMISSION STANDARDS PROGRAM
6.2.1 Emission Standards Input
The Emission Standards Program utilizes data from the Control Cost
File and punched card input. The punched card input specifies the region
identification and the particular emission standards to be applied.
Section 7.7 gives the input and operating procedures for this program.
6.2.1.1 Control Cost File Data
The basic calculations of the device application costs and efficiency
data are made within the Control Cost Program (Chapter 5). These calcula-
tions are carried out for each point source identified in the Source File.
The exact items which are output on the Control Cost File are described in
Section 7.6. In general, this file contains the source and device charac-
teristics resulting from utilizing each applicable control device and
method (contained in the Control Cost Program) with each point source
-------
identified in the region (computations and criteria used in assigning
device applicability are described in Chapter 5). This file also con-
tains the existing source characteristics, as defined by the Source File.
For each point source then, the Control Cost File contains data for all
available control alternatives which can be used in attempting to meet
the various emission standards. The file data includes the following
items:
(a) Source Identification - Each source-device combina-
tion is identified by SIC, site and process code,
political jurisdiction, and source type. This
identification is necessary since the emission
standards are applied on a source category-political
jurisdiction basis.
(b) Source Parameters - The source parameters required
for emission standards application are included '
(emission rates, maximum process rates, heat output,
etc.).
(c) Control Efficiency - The efficiency of each control
device or measure represents the degree of pollutant
removal expected as a result of applying a control
device to a particular source. The removal effic-
iencies, expressed as percentages, are given for
particulates and sulfur dioxide.
(d) Device Costs - The total annual cost is given for
each source-device combination. The figure includes
both an annual capital charge (based on the purchase
and installation costs) and yearly operation and
maintenance expenses. On the basis of the data from
the Control Cost File, the Emission Standards Program
selects, for each source, the least costly method of
meeting the various emission standards.
(e) Miscellaneous Information - Several types of infor-
mation are included in the Control Cost File which
are not used by the Emission Standards program.
However, this information is utilized by the Regional
Strategies Program, which communicates with the
Emission Standards File but not the Control Cost File.
As a result, the Miscellaneous Information is simply
"passed through" the Emission Standards Program to
the Emission Standards File. This information con-
sists of:
Fuel use data - the quantity of each type of
fuel used by each source after control. These
quantities are required for use in the "fuel
used" tabulations in the Regional Strategies
Program.
-------
Gas cooling indication - this indicator allows
each source utilizing gas cooling to be identi-
fied in the Regional Strageties Program output.
6.2.1.2 Punched Card Data
Punched card input consists of the region identification, run date
and specification of the emission standards to be applied.
The program has a number of emission standard types (Table 6-1)
whose application is controlled by user input. Each standard type has
pre-set curve coordinates (or other fixed parameters) which will be used
by the program unless the user inputs new data. The Type column listed
in Table 6-1 indicates the basic format for each emission standard. For
instance, "Heat Input" indicates that the amount of pollutant a combustion
source may release is based on the quantity of heat energy input to the
source (i.e., its allowable emission rate). The input variables shown
for each standard are those which the user may adjust to suit the specific
conditions and requirements of the political jurisdiction to which the
standard is applied. The pre-set values of these variables are given in
Section 7.7. Figures 6-1 through 6-17 illustrate the pre-set curves.
The "curve coordinates" notation in the Input Variables column of Table
6-1 indicates that any curve may be used as long as it can be represented
by a series of connected straightline segments on log-log paper. For
example, any emission standard based on heat input, process weight, or
potential emission may be evaluated by the program.
For each source category (fuel combustion, industrial process or
solid waste) - political jurisdiction (up to 10) - pollutant (sulfur
dioxide or particulate matter) combination, the user selects the emission
standards to be applied. For each of these combinations, any number of
the emission standards shown in Table 6-1 may be specified. However, for
a particular combination, each emission standard may be specified only
once. As detailed in the remainder of this section (and in Section
7.7) some of the emission standards are not applicable to every source
category-pollutant combination. Therefore, it is recommended that the
user review the applicability of the emission standards before making his
selection.
-------
Standard
Number
TABLE 6-1
EMISSION STANDARDS
Statement of Emission Standard
Input Variables
EST01
EST02
EST03
EST04
EST05
EST06
EST07
EST08
EST09
Null No regulations applied
Maximum Use the most efficient device or measure available
Technology (from the Emission Standards File) for each source
as determined by the Control Cost Program.
Maximum Same as No. 2 except that up to ten devices or
Technology measures can be excluded from available controls.
Maximum Same as No. 2 except that up to ten devices or
Technology measures can be excluded from available controls.
Potential Use Potential Emission Curve (Figures 6-1, 6-2)
Emission giving potential emission rate vs. allowable
emission rate.
Potential Use Potential Emission Curve (Figures 6-1, 6-3)
Emission giving potential emission rate vs. allowable
emission rate.
Potential Use Potential Emission Curve (Figures 6-1, 6-4) giving
Emission potential emission rate vs. allowable emission rate.
Heat Input Use Heat Input Curve (Figures 6-5, 6-6) giving heat
input vs. allowable emission.
Heat Input Use Heat Input Curve (Figures 6-5, 6-7) giving heat
input vs. allowable emission.
None
None
List of devices to
be excluded.
List of devices to
be excluded.
Curve coordinates
Curve coordinates
Curve coordinates
Curve coordinates
-------
TABLE 6-1
EMISSION STANDARDS (Continued)
Standard
Number
Type
Statement of Emission Standard
Input Variables
EST10
EST11
EST12
EST13
EST14
EST15
EST16
Heat Input
Heat Input
Effective
Stack
Height
Exhaus t
Concentra-
tion
Exhaust
Concentra-
tion
Exhaus t
Concentra-
tion
Exhaust
Concentra-
tion
Use Heat Input Curve (Figures 6-5,6-6) giving heat
input vs. allowable emission.
Use Heat Input Curve with Stack Height Limitation
(Figures 6-8,6-9) giving heat input vs. allowable
emission.
Use Effective Stack Height Curve (Figure 6-10) giving
effective stack height vs. allowable emission.
Stack gas concentration not to exceed a given
value, in parts per million (ppm).
Stack gas concentration not to exceed a given ppm
limitation.
Stack gas concentration not to exceed a given level,
in grains per standard cubic foot (gr/scf). Two ex-
haust gas concentrations are specified for use above
and below a certain source size which is also speci-
fied by a process weight value.
Stack gas concentration not to exceed a given gr/scf
limitation.
Curve coordinates
Curve coordinates
Curve coordinates,
Met parameters
ppm value
ppm value
gr/scf values, pro-
cess weight value
-------
TABLE 6-1
EMISSION STANDARDS (Continued)
Standard
Number
Type
Statement of Emission Standard
Input Variables
I
>«J
EST17
EST18
EST19
EST20
EST21
EST22
EST23
Exhaust Stack gas concentration not to exceed a lb/1000 Ib
Concentra- exhaust gas limitation.
tion
Process Use Process Weight Curve (Figures 6-11, 6-12, 6-13)
Weight giving process weight vs. allowable emission.
Process Use Process Weight Curve (Figures 6-13, 6-14, 6-15)
Weight giving process weight vs. allowable emission.
Process Use Process Weight Curve (Figures 6-13, 6-16, 6-17)
Weight giving process weight vs. allowable emission.
Fuel Allows for elimination of specified fuels based on the
Switch numbering system; 1 .= eliminate coal, 2 = eliminate
coal and residual oil, 3 = switch to gas. (Only for
particulate control).
Fuel Allows for elimination of specified fuels based on the
Switch numbering system; 1 = eliminate coal, 2 = eliminate
coal and residual oil, 3 = switch to gas. (Only for
particulate control).
Sulfur Allowable sulfur content for each of three fuel types,
Content (i.e., coal, residual fuel oil, distillate fuel oil)
Limitation as input to regional data base for sulfur content
limitation-under Device 030. .
lb/1000 Ib value
Curve coordinates
Curve coordinates
Curve coordinates
Number of fuel
switch desired
Number of fuel switch
desired
None (Device 030
-------
TABLE 6-1
EMISSION STANDARDS (Continued)
Standard
Number
Type
Statement of Emission Standard
Input Variables
EST24
EST25
EST26
oo
Sulfur
Content
Limitation
Sulfur
Content
Limitation
Equivalent
Fuel Sulfur
Limitation
Allowable sulfur content for each of three fuel
types (i.e., coal, residual fuel oil, distil-
late fuel oil) as input to regional data base for
sulfur content limitation under Device 031.
Allowable sulfur content for each of three fuel
types, as input to the regional data base for sul-
fur content limitation under Device 032.
Allows use of flue gas desulfurization when emissions
equivalent to those produced by a specified fuel
sulfur content; 1 = equivalent sulfur content same as
Device 30, 2 = equivalent sulfur content same as
Device 31, 3 = equivalent sulfur content same as
Device 32.
None (device 031 is
applied)
None (Device 032 is
applied)
Number of fuel sulfur
-------
VO
1000
100
c.
o
I/I
in
01
CO
=: 10
10
100
1000 10,000
Potential Emission (Ib/hr)
100,000
1,000,000
Figure 6-1. Allowable Sulfur Dioxide Emissions as Related to Potential Emission Rates
-------
1000
ON
O
300
100
2 60
in
in
to
I 10
6000 10,000 30,000 100,000
10 20 100 1000
Potential Emission (Ib/hr)
-------
10
s_
.0
O
in
JD
ra
0.2
I
io.i
EST 6
0.01
10
20
100
1000
Potential Emission (Ib/hr)
Figure 6-3. Allowable Particulate Emissions Related to
Potential Emission Rates (EST06).
-------
1000
300
100
I/I
r
LU
01
!o
5 10
1.8
10
100
1000
10,000
100,000
1,000,000
Potential Emission (Ib/hr)
-------
IUU
=3
CO
o
O
-o in
6
r
to
I/I
r-
LU
"""""..
* .
"***
*'l
-,..
10
25 100 1000
Heat Input (10b BTU/hr)
10,000
100,000
Figure 6-5. Allowable Sulfur Dioxide Emissions Based on Heat Input Capacity
-------
10
0.6
c
o
jT 0.2
-------
ON
I
IU
co ]
o
0
^ 0.5
ission (
E 0.18
LU
OJ
'n n 1
(O
O
0.01
EST 9
""""....
0.1 0.25
10
100
1000
5000 10,000
Heat Input (10b BTU/hr)
-------
.1
100
1000
10,000
100,000
Heat Input (10 BTU/hr)
-------
10
I
K-1
vj
CO
vo
o
o
I/)
d)
3
-------
1000
100
S-
-C
l/l
l/l
UJ
O)
10
icr
23
TCJO
738 1000
Effective Stack Height (ft)
Figure 6-10.
Allowable Particulate and Sulfur Dioxide Emissions
Based on Effective Stack Height (EST12).
-------
(->
VO
100
10
o
-O
o
to
0.1
100
1000
10,000 100,000
Process Weight (Ib/hr)
1,000,000
10,000,000
-------
I
N3
O
1000
100
c
O
10
1
0.1
EST 18
>« **»
10
X
X
.X
TOO
1000 10.000
Process Weight (Ib/hr)
X
X
100.000
1,000,000
-------
N>
10,000
1000
c:
o
0)
jQ
O
10
0.1
EST
EST 19<%<
EST 20 X*
**
..»
100 1000 10,000 100,000 1,000,000
Process Weight (Ib/hr)
10,000,000 100,000,000
Figure 6-13. Allowable Sulfur Dioxide Emissions Based on Industrial Process Weight
-------
100
«n
M
I LU
tSJ
NJ tt>
11
0.1
10
EST 19X'
III Klllllllllllllll
100
100,000
1000 10,000
Process Weight (Ib/hr)
Figure 6-14. Allowable Particulate Emissions Based on Industrial Process Weight (EST 19).
-------
I
NJ
to
1000
100
I
0.1
EST19
10
100
1000 10,000
Process Weight (Ib/hr)
100,000
1 ,000,000
-------
i
S3
100
c
o
01
JO
ID
S i
o.i
EST20 ..'**
*
TOO
1000
10,000 100,000
Process Weight (Ib/hr)
1,000,000 10,000,000
-------
100
10
K)
Ln
V)
I/I
-------
6.2.2 Emission Standard Program Operation
The Emission Standard Programs attempts to apply each specified
emission standard to every point source that has the same source category-
political jurisdiction-pollutant designation as the standard. For each
candidate source, the allowable emission rate is obtained and, based on
the control device information from the Control Cost File, an appropriate
device (or method) is selected. Selection of the appropriate control
device is based on the following tests:
(a) If the existing emission rate is less than the allowable
emission rate, no device is chosen.
(b) If not (a) then apply the device which results in a con-
trolled emission less than the allowable emission defined
by the standard.
(c) If more than one device produces sufficiently low emis-
sions, the device having the lowest annualized cost is
selected.
When none of the available devices allows the sources to meet a par-
ticular emission standard, the most efficient* device is selected, and a
flag is placed in the output record to indicate that the user should deter-
mine the availability of a more effective control device. If during appli-
cation of an emission standard which employs a curve, the curve limits are
exceeded, the program will proceed as follows:
(a) If the input variable to the curve exceeds the largest
independent variable used in defining the curve, an
error message will be printed and the standard will not
be applied to that particular source.
(b) If the input variable to the curve is less than the
smallest independent variable used to define the curve,
a warning message will be printed and the allowable
emission rate will be set equal to the existing emission
rate of that particular source.
The operating sequence performed by the Emission Standards Program
may be summarized as follows:
(a) All selected standards are applied to a particular source.
(b) All sources within a source category are handled as in
(a).
*Based on pollutant removal efficiency.
-------
(c) All categories within a political jurisdiction as in (b),
(d) All political jurisdictions within the region as in (c).
The description of each of the available emission standards (shown
in Table 6-1) is given below.
For each emission standard applicable to solid waste-particulate
matter sources (with the exception of EST01) an option is provided which
allows the user to eliminate open burning sources during application of
the standard.
EST01 - Null Standard
The first emission standard represents a null
standard. That is, no changes in existing
emission levels are required for the particular
source category-political jurisdiction-pollutant
combination specified by the user. If applied
to each political jurisdiction, this standard
may be used to provide a regional display of
existing air pollution levels. It may also be
used to test the result of certain control op-
tions which allow particular segments of the
region (defined by their source type-political
jurisdiction identification) to continue opera-
ting without additional emission restrictions.
EST01 may be applied to all source category-
pollutant combinations. Its region wide applica-
tion is recommended since a summary of existing
conditions provides a baseline from which to
judge the effectiveness of the more restrictive
control options.
EST02 - Maximum Technology
The second emission standard (EST02) requires
each point source of pollution to install the
most efficient pollution control measure avail-
able in the program. The most efficient measure
that may be applied to a source is defined as
that control device or method which results in
the lowest pollutant emission rate. All of the
control devices applied to the source, as defined
by the Control Cost File, are considered. For
certain source categories the most efficient
pollution control measure may not be technically
possible or economically feasible. For example,
the most efficient control of fuel combustion
-------
sources is often a switch of fuel to natural gas.
This may be a practical impossibility on a regional
basis. EST02 does, however, represent a potential
lower limit of pollutant emissions. A regional
strategy based on the application of EST02 to all
source category-pollutant combinations provides
output summary data which represents the lowest
regional emissions based on the application of
current technology. This display, together with
that generated using EST01 (null-standard), repre-
sents upper and lower bounds on the regional air
quality and, as such, provides useful planning
guidance. It is, therefore, recommended that EST02
be applied to all source categories for both
pollutants.
EST03, EST04 - Restricted Maximum Technology
Since application of a maximum control measure may
be quite unrealistic as a control option, the next
two emission standards (EST03, EST04), identical in
format, allow user generated modifications to the
maximum technology standard (EST02). EST03 and EST04
are designed to allow the user to specify up to ten
control devices or methods which are to be excluded
from consideration when the most efficient control
device is determined. For example, fuel switches
to natural gas may be excluded. A separate set of
control devices to be excluded can be input for
each of these emission standards. Both of these
standards may be applied to either pollutant and
all emission source categories.
EST05, EST06, EST07 - Potential Emission Standards
Emission standards five through seven (EST05, EST06,
EST07) simulate emission restrictions that are based
on the potential emission rate from each source.
The allowable emission rate, in this case, is based
on the emission rate that would result if the source
was totally uncontrolled. The uncontrolled (i.e.,
potential) emission rate for each source is computed
from the input parameters which characterize the
source. The computation uses the existing emission
rate, existing control device efficiency and use
factor (Chapter 3). The use factor is a ratio of
the design operating capacity of the plant or pro-
cess to the actual operating conditions. This ratio
is necessary in the computation of potential emissions
-------
since the allowable emission rate, as determined under
the emission standard, should reflect the degree of
control required to bring the maximum possible source
emission into compliance. The following equation is
used to determine potential emission rate from any
source type for both pollutants.
Potential Emission Rate -
(Existing Emission Rate)(Use Factor)
1 - Existing Control Efficiency
The potential emission rate is then converted into
the appropriate units (pounds/hour) and the allow-
able emission rate is determined.
The allowable emission rate determined in this
manner may be considered a maximum or design allow-
able and therefore cannot be directly compared with
the existing rate to determine compliance. The con-
trol efficiency required under this emission standards
type can be determined by the following equation:
Required Control Efficiency =
/ Potential \ _ / Allowable
\Emission Rate/ \Emission Rate
Potential Emission Rate
Since many sources already have existing pollution
control equipment, the additional control efficiency
required is given by the following equation:
New Control Efficiency =
/ Required \ / Existing \
\Control Efficiency/~\Efficiency/
(1 - Existing Efficiency)
This new control efficiency is,used to calculate an
allowable mass emission rate based on the existing
emissions. (All efficiencies displayed in the two
equations above are decimal fractions.)
The pre-set curves relating potential to allowable
emissions for particulate matter control (under
standards EST05, EST06, and EST07) are shown in
Figures 6-2, 6-3 and 6-4, respectively. For sulfur
dioxide, a single pre-set curve is used for the
three standards relating potential to allowable
emission rates (Figure 6-1). For particulates,
these standards are applicable to industrial
processes and solid waste disposal. They may be
applied to all source categories for sulfur
dioxide control.
-------
EST08, EST09, EST10 - Heat Input Standards
The next set of emission standards (EST08, EST09,
EST10) represent heat input types of standards
applicable to fuel combustion for indirect heating.
The heat input quantity (in units of 1Q6 BTU/hr) is
used to define an allowable emission rate. The quantity
of heat input on a design or maximum basis (whichever
is greater) is a required user input to the Source
File. This value must be present in the Source File
record of each fuel combustion source before these
standards are applied. Since the allowable emission
rate is calculated on a design basis it must be cor-
rected to reflect the actual source operating practice
before a decision can be made concerning the degree
to which existing emissions must be reduced. The cor-
rection is achieved by use of the following equation:
Allowable Emission Rate =
/Design Allowable^ Actual Heat Input (BTU/hr) ,
V Emission Rate / Rated Capacity (BTU/hr)
The actual heat input computation is based on the fuel
usage rates and heat contents supplied by the user in
each fuel combustion source record.
The pre-set curves depicting the allowable particulate
emission values for standards EST08 and EST10 are dis-
played in Figure 6-6. Particulate pre-sets for EST09
are shown in Figure 6-7. The sulfur dioxide emission
levels pre-set for these standards are shown in Figure
6-5.
EST11 - Heat Input Plus Physical Stack Height Standard
Emission standard eleven (EST11) also defines allowable
emission rates for fuel combustion sources based on
input heat capacity. Here, however, the physical stack
height of the source is used in determining the approp-
riate allowable emission curve. Seven stack heights may
be input for the standard. Associated with each input
stack height is an input set of coordinates defining a
curve relating the allowable emission rate to the
source input heat capacity. The operational procedure
for this emission standard is as follows:
(a) The stack height of each source to which the
standard applies is examined to determine which
heat input curve is applicable.
(b) If the stack height is above or below the
specified limits, an error message is printed
and operations are terminated on that particu-
lar source.
-------
(c) After the proper curve has been selected (Step
a) the allowable emission rate calculation
proceeds as in standards eight through ten.
This standard is applicable to fuel combustion sources
only. The pre-set curves for sulfur dioxide and par-
ticulate control are shown in Figures 6-8 and 6-9,
respectively.
EST12 - Effective Stack Height Standard
Emission standard twelve (EST12) determines the allow-
able emission rates from the source effective stack
height. Input to the standard consists of meteorologi-
cal parameters; ambient temperature and barometric
pressure, average wind speed, and the curve coordinates
of allowable emission rate versus effective stack height.
After computing the effective stack height, the program
uses the curve to determine the allowable emission rate.
This standard is applicable to all source categories
and to either pollutant. Either the normalized plume
rise or the following stack parameters must be included
in the Source File for each source to which this ,
standard is applied: stack height, stack diameter,
stack exit temperature and the exhaust gas exit velocity.
Figure 6-10 shows the pre-set curve for EST12 for both
particulate and sulfur dioxide air pollutants. i
EST13, EST14 - Exhaust Concentration Standards
Emission standards thirteen and fourteen (EST13, EST14)
specify a maximum allowable exhaust gas concentration.
These standards are identical. As the concentration
is specified in terms of parts per million by weigh't
these standards apply only to sulfur dioxide emissions.
All source categories may be controlled by these two
standards. The application of these standards to indus-
trial process and solid waste disposal sources requires
the exhaust gas volume and temperature. In the case
of fuel combustion sources the fuel use rates are used
to compute the volume of exhaust gas that would be ;
produced under specified combustion conditions; this
volume is then used to compute the allowable emission
rate.
EST15 - Exhaust Concentration Standard
Emission standard fifteen (EST15) is also an exhaust
concentration limitation. In this case, the limit is
expressed in terms of grains per standard cubic foot.
For this reason, EST15 is only applicable to the con-
trol of particulate pollution. Two grain loading values
are used in this standard. A process weight value
defines the range of source sizes to which each grain
loading limitation applies. The Source File record for
each source being controlled by EST15 must have a pro-
cess weight entry. The actual computation of the allow-
able emission rate proceeds in the same manner as for
EST13 and EST14. EST15 applies to all pollutant-source
categories except fuel combustion.
-------
EST16 - Exhaust Concentration Standard
Emission standard sixteen (EST16) specifies a single
exhaust gas concentration value in grains per standard
cubic foot. The calculation of an allowable emission
rate is carried out on the same basis as is done in EST15.
This standard is applicable to all source types for particu-
late pollution only.
EST17 - Exhaust Concentration Standard
Emission standard seventeen (EST17) specifies an allowable
exhaust gas concentration in terms of pounds of pollutant
emitted per thousand pounds of exhaust gas. The computa-
tions carried out in this standard uses the same source
parameters as the preceding grain loading standard but with
different constant values and scale factors. This standard
is applicable to all source types for particulate pollution
only.
EST18, EST19, EST20 - Process Weight Standards
Emission standards eighteen, nineteen, and twenty (EST18,
EST19, and EST20) determine the allowable emission rate
from the size of the source (based on the weight of materials
processed). A curve is used in each of the standards relat-
ing process weight (input to the Source File) in pounds per
hour to the maximum allowable emission rate, also given in
pounds per hour. These standards may be applied to the
industrial process and solid waste disposal categories for
both sulfur dioxide and particulate air pollutants. Figures
6-11, 6-12, 6-14, 6-15, 6-16 and 6-17 display the pre-set
particulate standards for industrial process and solid waste
disposal sources. The sulfur dioxide standards are shown
in Figure 6-13.
As in the case of heat input type standards, the allowable
emissions obtained directly from the curves which define the
process weight standards represent allowable emissions
under maximum operating conditions. These cannot be direct-
ly compared with existing emission levels. The following
equation is used to calculate an actual allowable emission
level.
, ,.,, , i r, _, j Design Allowable Emission Rate
Actual Allowable Emission Rate = a
Use Factor
The actual allowable emission rate is then compared with
the existing emission rate to determine the required control
efficiency.
EST21, EST22 - Fuel Type Restrictions
Emission standards twenty-one and twenty-two (EST21 and EST22)
specify restrictions as to the types of fuels which may be
burned. The user may elect to eliminate coal, coal and re-
sidual fuel oil, or all fuels except natural gas. These
standards are only applicable to the control of particulate
emissions for fuel combustion sources.
-------
EST23, EST24, EST25 - Fuel Sulfur Content Standards
The next three emission standards (EST23, EST24, and EST25)
apply sulfur content limitations to the three types of
fuels which may be burned (coal, residual oil, and distil-
late oil). The sulfur content limitations which are avail-
able to the user in these standards are those which were
included in the regional data base in the Control Cost Pro-
gram (Subsection 5.2.2). EST23, EST2A, and EST25 utilize
the sulfur limitation specified for devices 30, 31, and 32,
respectively, in the Control Cost Program. These standards
are applicable to sulfur dioxide emission control for the
fuel combustion source category. ,
EST26 - Equivalent Fuel Sulfur Content Restriction
The last emission standard (EST26) also applies a fuel sul-
fur content limitation. In this standard, however, the
alternative of flue gas desulfurization is allowed if the
source's emission level can be reduced by an amount equiva-
lent to an actual fuel substitution. The user may utilize
the same sulfur content limitations that were available in
EST23, EST24 or EST25. Note that sulfur dioxide emissions
from fuel combustion sources may be restricted by applica-
tion of EST26.
6.2.3 Emission Standards Program Output
Output from the Emission Standards Program consists of the following
variables for each source-emission standard considered by the program:
Source identification (Region, Political Jurisdiction and
Category).
Device cost, pollutant removal efficiency and flag indicat-
ing if gas cooling was required.
Emission rates; existing, allowable and controlled.
Emission standard number.
Quantity of fuel (coal, distillate oil, residual oil and
gas) used after control.
Theoretical control efficiency required to reduce the po-
tential (existing control removed) emission to the allowable
emissions.
This data is both printed and stored on magnetic tape (defined as
the Emission Standards File) for use by the Regional Strategies Program.
Subsection 7.7.4 gives a detailed description, and examples, of the output
generated. ,
-------
6.3 EMISSION STANDARDS FILE UPDATE PROGARM
Before proceeding with the execution of the Regional Strategies Pro-
gram, the output from the Emission Standards Program (as contained on the
Emission Standards File) should be reviewed by the user to determine
whether any modifications to the data are required. Two conditions
commonly occur which require the user to update the file (as opposed to
correcting input errors and re-executing the Emission Standards Program).
They are:
(a) In any given air quality control region, certain emission
standards not available in the program may be of particular
interest. Such standards usually require information not
in the program (e.g., distance from the point of emission
to the nearest property line). The application of unique
emission standards requires the user to independently
determine (for each source effected) the same set of data
that would have been generated by the Emission Standards
Program (see Sections 7.7.4 and 7.8).
(b) Manually-input data may also be required in the selection
of appropriate control devices to meet each emission
standard. For any source, the Emission Standards Program
can only consider those control devices selected by the
Control Cost Program. If none of the control devices
meets an emission standard, then it is impossible to
evaluate the cost of implementing that standard. In such
a case, it would be desirable for the user to supplement
the internal analytic capabilities of the model. Experi-
ence has shown that it will usually be possible to specify
a device which will produce the necessary emission reduc-
tion, as well as an estimate of cost for applying this
device to the particular source. Addition of this infor-
mation to the Emission Standards File will increase the
validity of the subsequent Regional Strategies Program
evaluation process.
Modification of the Emission Standards File is accomplished by the
Emission Standards File Update Program. This program may be used to add
or delete file records (i.e., complete device-source data sets) or to
update data in existing records. Section 7.7 gives the input and operating
procedures for this program.
-------
6.4 REGIONAL STRATEGIES PROGRAM
6.4.1 Regional Strategies Program Input
The Regional Strategies Program utilizes data from the Source File,
Emission Standards File, Source Contribution File, and punched card input.
Section 7.9 gives the input and operating procedures for this program.
6.4.1.1 Source File Data
The Source File (Chapter 3 and Section 7.2) provides the area source
emission rate data. These data are scaled (by user input scale factors
and/or projection factors) and, together with the controlled point source
emission data, are used in the emission rate summary tables and the cal-
culations for the new air quality data.
6.4.1.2 Emission Standards File Data
The Emission Standards File provides the emission standards data
base from which the emission control strategies output is constructed.
The contents of this file are described in Subsection 6.2.3.
6.4.1.3 Source Contribution File Data
The Source Contribution File (Chapter 4 and Section 7.4) is used by
the Regional Strategies Program to calculate new air quality values based
on specified emission control strategies. This file contains the follow-
ing items:
Number of receptors and sources
Date of run
Background pollutant concentrations for each
pollutant
Calibration constants used by the Air Pollutant
Concentration Program for each pollutant
Identification number and location of each
receptor
For each source: identification, political
jurisdiction and uncalibrated pollutant contri-
bution to each receptor.
If multiple sub-regional runs were made by the Air Pollutant Concen-
tration Program (and their Source Contribution Files merged), the receptor
identification numbers on the merged file will not correspond to the
-------
numbers shown in the individual Air Pollutant Concentration Program output
tables. Instead, a consecutive numbering system appears in which each
set of receptors is placed in the order in which their files are merged
(see Section 7.4).
6.4.1.4 Punched Card Data
The detailed list of punched card input variables required in the
operation of the Regional Strategies Program is given in Subsection 7.9.3.
In general, the user must specify the following data:
(a) Area Source Scale Factors - Area source scale factors
are used to simulate the degree of control over area
source emissions expected from a particular control
strategy. For each area source scale factor, the
existing emission rate is multiplied by the scale
factor to produce the controlled emission rate. The
user should determine these factors for each strategy
tested. One scale factor may be input for each polit-
cal jurisdiction. In addition, individual area sources
may be assigned scale factors. If both inputs are used,
the individual area source scale factor will be utilized
by the program. One set of scale factors is required for
each strategy specified.
(b) Projection Factors. Projection factors for point and/or
area sources may be input. These factors are used to
modify both the allowable and existing emission rate
levels to reflect the expected conditions at some future
point in time. These factors are applied in conjunction
with a specified emission strategy. The user must review
regional economic and population trends and growth rates
to determine appropriate projection factors.
(c) Calibration Constants and Background Concentration Values.
If the calibration constants or background values used in
the Air Pollutant Concentration Program are not desired,
they may be replaced by new input constants.
(d) Statistical Parameters. Analysis Data Output tables (as
described in Subsection 4.4.4) may be requested as Regional
Strategy Program outputs. If these tables are desired,
appropriate input data must be supplied (e.g., output
receptor number, desired averaging times, geometric
standard deviations and percentile levels).
(e) Strategies Specification. For a given pollutant, an
Emission standard must be specified for each political
jurisdiction-source category combination. Each emission
standard selected must, of course, have been previously
-------
computed in the Emission Standards Program. The collec-
tion of standards for all combinations, for a single
pollutant, constitutes a strategy. Any number of
strategies may be specified.
6.4.2 Regional Strategies Program Operation
In defining the control strategy for a particular pollutant, the
user specifies, for each of the political jurisdictions which make up the
region, the number of the emission standard to be applied to the point
sources in each category (fuel combustion, industrial process, and solid
waste). The Regional Strategies Program then searches the Emission
Standards File for all fuel combustion sources in the first political
jurisdiction and tabulates the results of the selected emission standard.
This process is repeated for the industrial process and solid waste
categories, producing a complete emission control strategy for the first
political jurisdiction. Repeating this process for the remaining political
jurisdictions produces a region wide emission control strategy . A regional
control strategy consists of specific emission limitations applied to point
sources for a selected pollutant emission (i.e. , particulates or sulfur
oxide). Area source emissions are not controlled by the strategy, but by
use of scale factors which the user may input to simulate emission reduc-
tions in this source type.
To evaluate the impact of the region wide emission control strategy
on regional air quality, the Source Contribution File is required. The
procedure is to adjust each receptor concentration value in the Source
Contribution File by adjusting the contribution of each source according
to its "new" emission rate. The "new" emission rate for each source is
determined as follows:
(a) If the existing emission rate is less than the allowable
emission, the existing emission rate is used. Otherwise
the allowable emission rate under the appropriate emis-
sion standard is used.
(b) For area sources, the input scale factor is applied to
the existing emission rate and the resulting emission
rate is employed by the program.
-------
If the Source Contribution File is not available (e.g., Air Pollutant
Concentration Program not executed, or tape read error of existing file),
the program will not produce new air quality values. However, all other
output from the program will be produced.
For each specified emission control strategy, the user may also
obtain output for projected regional pollutant emissions for some future
time period. User input projection factors are used to adjust both the
existing and allowable emission rates produced by the applied emission
control strategy. For area sources the projection factors are applied to
existing and scaled emission rates. Projection factors may be input on
an individual source (point and area) bases. As with scale factors, a
set of projection factors may be input which apply to all area sources
within each political jurisdiction. The individual projection will take
precedence over the political jurisdiction factor. After applying these
factors, the program calculates the projected air quality values in the
same manner that new air quality values were determined.
6.4.3 Regional Strategies Program Output
The output from the Regional Strategies Program is designed to give
a comprehensive picture of the impact of each candidate emission control
strategy. Since each air pollution control agency is primarily concerned
with sources within its own jurisdiction, the effects of a strategy on
individual sources are described separately for each jurisdiction. In the
presentation of estimated air quality concentrations after application of
the strategy, no distinction is made between political jurisdictions .
The types of printed output produced by this Program are described
below. Examples of the formatted output, including output variable
descriptions are presented in Subsection 7.9.4.
Input Emission Standards - This output displays the set of
emission control standards which were input by the user to
make up the emission control strategy. These standards
-------
are presented by political jurisdiction and emission source
type. This information makes each Regional Strategies out-
put listing a complete, self-contained package for con-
venience of examination.
Emission Standard Effect on Source Emissions - This output
contains a source by source summary of the effects of each
emission standard included in the regional control strategy.
In the Regional Strategies Program output this format is
repeated for each source category in each political juris-
diction. This output allows the type and efficiency of the
control device applied to each source to be examined in
relation to the emission level allowed under the emission
standard. The examination will permit a judgement regard-
ing the stringency of the emission standard in comparison
with the available control technology. In addition the
detailed information necessary to evaluate the impact of
an emission standard on particular sources or source
categories may be determined.
Jurisdiction Summary - The jurisdiction summary presents
the summary data which the Regional Strategies Program com-
putes and outputs for each political jurisdiction within the
air quality control region. This output summarizes the
overall effect of each emission standard contained in the
control strategy being examined. Emission reductions are
presented for each source category as well as accumulated
totals for the political jurisdiction. The degree of reduc-
tion in area source emissions (produced by the user input
scale factors) is also displayed. The jurisdictional fuel
use pattern following the application of these emission
standards is shown. Since each political jurisdiction has
the authority to set its own emission standards, this data
provides the user with valuable planning information.
Regional Summary - The output of the Regional Strategies
Program contains a number of summary statistics which indi-
cate the degree of pollutant reductions expected from the
application of each control strategy tested. These data
consist of the total pollution reductions, costs required
in each political jurisdiction, and the aggregated regional
values. An additional parameter is output, which relates
the total regional cost of implementing the strategy to the
average reduction in ground level pollutant concentration.
Ground Level Concentrations - The most important decision
which must be made concerning each control strategy tested
is whether or not the application of the strategy allows
achievement of regional air quality goals. This output dis-
plays the computer generated estimates of air pollutant con-
centrations following the point and area source reductions
called for under the control strategy. The program also
-------
outputs this data in punched card form so that an isopleth
plot can be produced for easy visualization of the result-
ing concentrations. (An example of such an air quality plot
is shown in Chapter 1 of Volume II.)
If projection factors are used to produce simulated emission levels
representing some future time period, the following three tables will also
be output by the Regional Strategies Program.
Projected Emission Inventory - This output indicates the
revised projected emission levels for each emission source
within the region. Both the existing emission rate and the
"allowable" emission, as defined by the emission standards
which make up the control strategy, are displayed in this
tabulation.
Projected Emissions Summary - This is a summary table show-
ing the accumulated projected emission levels for each poli-
tical jurisdiction and on a region wide basis.
Projected Ground Level Concentrations - When the user selects
the projection option, the Regional Strategies Program
produces a tabulation of ground level pollutant concentra-
tions based on the projected emission levels. A punched
card output from which isopleth maps may be produced is also
generated. This output, both printed and punched cards,
uses the same format as the mean pollutant concentration
output, without projection.
-------
-------
-------
7.0 USER'S GUIDE
7.1 INTRODUCTION
The Implementation Planning Program is a collection of distinct pro-
grams which are, in practice, executed independently. This chapter presents
the detailed input methods required for execution of each program. It is
assumed that at this point the user has the basic data and all that is re-
quired is its conversion to proper form and input to the computer. De-
scriptions of the collection and significance of the data base for each
program are given in Chapters 3 through 6.
7.1.1 Guide Organization
The card input description of each program is contained in a seperate
subsection of this chapter. Figure 7.1-1 illustrates the chapter divisions
and the overall system flow of the Implementation Planning Program. This
illustration is an expanded version of Figure 2-2.
The Roman numerals I-IV in Figure 7.1-1 indicate the sequence in which
the program segments are executed under conditions of normal usage. To
completely utilize the capabilities of the Implementation Planning Program,
all of its component segments must be executed. However, within the seg-
ments, the Source Contribution File Merge Program, and the Control Cost
and Emission Standards Update programs may or may not be required. The
applications of these programs are discussed in Chapters 2 through 6 and
Sections 7.4, 7.6 and 7.8.
7.1.2 General Setup Information
To operate each of the programs, the user must prepare punched card
data, required for program operation, and Job Control Language (JCL) cards,
which relate the program requirements to the computing facility character-
istics.
Punched-Card Input Data
There are several types of punched-card input data which must be pre-
pared for operation of the Implementation Planning Program. These are:
(a) Fixed-Format inputs require the user to locate input data
exactly as specified in the instructions. The instructions
-------
i F
r SOURCE
DATA
ACTION CARD
SOURCE DATA MANAGEMENT
PROGRAM
CREATE, UPDATE, LIST
CHAPTERS, SEC. 7.2
~1
SOURCE
LISTING
I SOURCE DATA MANAGEMENT ./
AIR POLLUTANT
CONCENTRATION
PROGRAM
CHAPTERS 4.0, 7.3
POLLUTANT
CONCENTRA-
TION TABLES
FILE UPDATE PROGRAM
CONTROL
COST FILE
SOURCE CONTRIBUTION
CONTROL
COST FILE
LISTING
FILE MERGE PROGRAM
[CONTROL COST
UPDATE DATA
STEP II
AIM POLLUTANT
CONCENTRATION
SEGMENT
EMISSION
STANDARDS
EMISSION
STANDARDS
DATA
REGIONAL STRATEGIES
f EMISSION
I STANDARDS
I
EMISSION
STANDARDS
FILE
CONTROL
STRATEGY
SUMMARIES
EMISSION STANDARDS
FILE UPDATE
PROGRAM
SEC. 6.3, 7.8
EMISSION
STANDARDS
FILE LISTING
GROUND LEVEL
CONCENTRA-
TION DATA
J
"I
DEVICE DATA
(REGIONAL DATA
CONTROL COST
PROGRAM
CHAPTER 5.0
SEC. 7.5
l
t
CONTROL
COST TABLES
I STEP IV(b) CONTROL STRATEGIES SEGMENT STEP IV(a) I
Figure 7.1-1. Implementation Planning Program Sequence.
-------
include column numbers and the exact form of the input
data required.
(b) NAMELIST inputs allow the user a free-form flexibility
in locating input data between columns 2 and 80 of the
punched card. The user is instructed to provide the
name of the variable, followed by an equal sign and then
the single or multiple values of the variable. Each
value associated with a variable must never exceed the
maximum number specified in the instructions. If repeti-
tive values are encountered while preparing the input data,
a special format can be used which specifies the number of
repetitions and the value of the variable. For example,
the format 10*.7 represents ten entries of the values
.7. The number of value entries per punched card is left
up to the user, but with the stipulation that each value
(including the last value entered) must be followed by a
comma. Three input modes are used in the NAMELIST
format:
Floating Point - A decimal point can appear anywhere in
the field used for the value. A field is defined as
the number of columns between commas or between the
equals sign and the first comma. A comma must separate
multiple values and must follow the last value. The
values may also be expressed in exponential form, with
a number such as 100 input as .100E3.
Integer - No decimal points are used. The comma separating
values or ending a string of values must immediately
follow the last digit of a value. The values must be
right-justified with respect to the commas.
Alphabetic - All alphabetic values must be enclosed in
single quotes and must be followed immediately by
a comma.
A description of the input data for each program is given which includes
the type of data required and the results to be expected if the data is
omitted. A specific "Data Type" code is associated with each NAMELIST and
fixed-format punched card input. Neither the code nor the description is
punched on cards; it is merely a guide to the user. The code is as
follows:
0 - Data is optional and is not required for program operation.
M - Data is mandatory and is required for program operation.
N - Data is in the NAMELIST format.
P - Floating point mode.
-------
I - Integer mode.
A - Alphanumeric mode.
F - Data is in the fixed format.
Job Control Language Inputs
Job Control Language inputs are used to control the operation of
the program and to specify certain computing facility characteristics.
The user must coordinate the preparation of these punched cards with the
systems programmers assigned to the computing facility. The Job Control
Language inputs for the execution of each program are shown in the actual
form prepared for the installation test case (Volume II, Chapter 3) at the
TRW Systems computing facility (an IBM 360/40 computer operating under OS
Release 18). The user should note however, that some of these inputs are
unique to the TRW facility (e.g., tables and tape numbers). The user is
advised to refer to IBM [1969] and to seek the assistance of systems
programmers assigned to his installation for preperation of the JCL inputs.
No attempt will be made in this chapter to describe each element of the
JCL input cards.
-------
7.2 SOURCE DATA MANAGEMENT
-------
7.2 SOURCE DATA MANAGEMENT PROGRAM
7.2.1 Description
The Source Data Management Program is written in the Common Business
Oriented Language (COBOL), a computer program language specifically
designed for business rather than scientific problems. COBOL has many
features which are directly applicable to maintenance of data files.
COBOL is like a natural language in that it has a vocabulary and grammar
of its own. Under the guidance of a COBOL computer programmer, changes can
be made to the Source Data Management Program by forming sentences and
paragraphs describing these changes in the COBOL language. The system can
be changed to increase the number of fields per record, the number of
records per file, or any other system aspect.
The overall flow of the Source Data Management Program is shown in
Figure 7.2-1. This program is used to perform each of the following
operations:
(a) File Creation
(b) File Update - This includes deletion of existing source
records, data changes for existing records, and addition
of new records.
(c) File Listing.
During the creation and update operations the program manipulates the in-
put data as follows:
(a) Edit - Inputs are edited for numeric and alphabetic fields
and for valid codes. Warnings are printed for invalid
fields and the record is rejected (warning messages are
summarized in Chapter 8).
(b) Conversion - Data inputs in feet and feet/sec are con-
verted to the metric system, temperature in degrees
Fahrenheit is converted to degrees Kelvin, and exponential
inputs are converted to non-exponential equivalents.
Although the program is designed to perform only one of the above operations
at a time (i.e., for a given job step), several operations may be combined
for a given run (e.g., file update and file listing).
-------
SOURCE DATA
ACTION CARD
SORT ROUTINE
UPDATE
SORTED
NPUT DATA
(SOURCES
CTIONS)
CREATE
SCRATCH OLD
FILE-RENAME
NEW FILE TO
OLD FILE
I
'SOURCE"
FILE
.(NEW)
LIST
SOURCE
FILE
UPDATE OLD
SOURCE FILE
(INCLUDES EDIT)
1
I
CREATE SOURCE
FILE (INCLUDES
EDIT)
SOURCE
FILE
Figure 7.2-1. Source Data Management Program Major Functions,
-------
7.2.2 JCL and Deck Setup
The input deck setup required for the execution of the program
consists of the job control language (JCL) cards, the program deck, the
program action card, and the data cards set.
Figure 7.2-2 illustrates the deck setup for an update and list run.
The JCL cards associated with this setup are shown in Figure 7.2-3. This
setup was used for the installation test case with the following
assumptions:
(a) Source Data Management Program in object deck form
(b) Source File is on disk
(c) Object deck for list operation is referenced back to
update operation (therefore a second object deck is not
required for this run).
Deviations from this configuration require appropriate JCL card changes.
Figure 7.2-4 illustrates the JCL cards used for the create and list run
of the installation test case.
7.2.3 Input
In addition to the JCL cards, the user must provide the action card
and the source data cards (both point and area) described in the following
subsections. Since these cards are ordered by the program they may be in-
put in any order. It is recommended however, that the input be arranged in
the order in which it is used, that is: action card, point source data
cards, and area source data cards.
7.2.3.1 Action Cards
This card describes the action that the program is to perform, i.e.,
create, update, or list. The formats for the action cards are provided in
Table 7.2-1. Since only a few action cards are involved in the Implementa-
tion Planning Program, no special data form has been designed and the user
should employ the standard data forms available at his computing facility.
In using Table 7.2-1. and succeeding tables of this form, the user
should note that the notation "AAA" or "3A" under the heading "Picture"
means that, the user should punch (or write on the data forms) three
-------
o STEP 5 JCL CARDS
o STEP 4 JCL CARDS
o LIST ACTION CARD
LIST
UPDATE
o STEP 3 JCL CARDS
o PROGRAM OBJECT DECK
o STEP 2 JCL CARDS
o UPDATE ACTION CARD
o DATA CARDS
o STEP 1 JCL CARDS
Figure 7.2-2.
Example Deck Configuration for Source File
Update and List Run.
-------
SOURCE: UPDATE AND LIST
//STFP1 EXEC PGM = lhHPRCGM
//SYSPMNT 00 SYSOUT=£
//D01 DO UNIT = 231<,,OISH
//SYSIN DO *
SCRATCH CSNAMEsQLUSORC? , VOL=231( I, l^.A.h
END
/*
//STEP3 EXEC COBFLG
//LKEO.SYSIN DD »
.CJNTIG)
.CJNTIG)
.CONTIGI
.CCNTIGI
.CONTIG)
.CONTIG)
P^Cf =(CVL, (1,1)1
. 1,A ,79t I, ill ,FORMAT=CH
OBJECT OECK
/*
//GO. TRANS DD OSN=£SO TOTP AN, 01 SP'< OLD, DELETE )
//GO. OLD DD DSN=OLDSORCE,UNIT=231«,VOL=SLR=COj07«,DIiP=OLC
//GO.NEnl DO DS
// DISP=(NEW,KEFP» ,
// SPACE=(CYL,( 1,11)
//GO. ERROR DD SYSOUT*A
/*
//STEP* EXEC SORTD
//SORT.SORTIN DD * ,DC B= ( i»ECFM =FB, LR ECL- 80 , BLKS I If-SC I
/*
//SORT.
//SORT,
//SORT,
//SORT.
//SORT,
//SORT,
//SORT,
//
SOHThKOl
SORTWK02
SORTHK03
SORTWK04
SORTWK05
SORTMK06
SORTOUT
LIST ACTION CARD
DD UNIT=SVSDA,SPACE=(CYL,
DD UNIT^SVSDA.SPACE-(CYL,
DO UNIT»SYSDA,SPACE»(CVL,
DD UNIT=SYSDA,SPACE«ICVL,
DD UNIT=SYSDA,SPACE=(CYL,
DO UNIT*SYSDA,SPACE=(CYL,
10),.CONTIG)
10),,CONTIGI
10).,CONTIG)
10),.CONTIG)
10),.CONTIG)
10) , .CONTIG)
DC DSN<=£SRTDTR AN, UNI T'SYSDA .SPACE «. T«ANS 00 CSN = £SRTDTRAN,DI SP = ( OLD, DELE TE )
//STtPS.TLD DO CUM^Y
//STEPS. NEW DD DSN=Nf hSOPCfc ,? I SP=OLD ,VOL=S6H =OOCC 78 ,UNI T
//STEPS. EFROR DD bVSOUT=A
//STEPS. SYSIN 00 DU«MY
/*
Figure 7.2-3.
Example JCL Card Setup for Source File Update
and List Run.
-------
SOURCE: CPEATE t LIST
//STEP1 EXFC SOPTD
//SORT.STRTIN OD *,DC8=(kECFM=F8,LKECL=flO,BLKSIZE=«CI
CREATE ACTION CARD
SOURCE DATA CARDS
/*
//SO'T.SORTwKOl DD UNIT=SYSOA,SPACE*(CYL
//SOB T.SO«T*KC2 OD 'J"JIT=SYSOA. SPACE=(CYL
//SO&T.S3RTXKC3 OD UNIT=SYSCA,S°ACC=(CYL
//SOKT.STRTWKC* DD UN IT = SYSOA,SPACE = (CYL
//STRT.S^HTrtKC J 00 UN! T= SYSOA , SPACE = ( CYL
//SORT.SO»Tw*06 OP UNIT=SYSDA,SPACE=(CYL
101
1CI
101
101
10)
10)
//StlRT.SJKTQUT
II
//SORT.SYSIN
SORT FIELDS=Ii
.CONTIG)
,CONTIG)
.CONTIG)
.CONTIG)
,CONTIG)
,CONTIG)
DD
DP
= CSRTDTRAN,JNI T^SYSDA .SPACE = ( CYL, ( 1, 1 I ) ,
/*
//STEP2 EXEC CiJBFLG
//LKEO.SYSIN DO »
OBJECT DECK
/*
//GO.TRANS 00 USN = tSRTDTRAN,01SP = (OLD,DELETE I
//GO.OLD DD DUMMY
//GO.NEW DD OSN=NEWSORCE,UNIT=2il*,VOL=SER=000078,
// DCB=|RECFM=FB,LRECL=221,3LKSIZE=221*1,
// DISP>=(NE*,KEEP) ,
// SPACE*(CYL,I 1,1) I
//GO.ERR'JR DD SYSOUT=A
/*
//STEP3 EXEC SOPTO
//SORT.SDRTIN 00 » ,DC8»(RECFM-fB,LKECL = 80,BLKSI Li = ac
LIST ACTION CARD
/*
//SCRT.SORTHKOl
//SORT.SJRThK02
UNI T=SYSDA , SPACE' ( CYL ,
UNI T=SYSOA, SPACE* ( CYL t
UNI T=SYSOA, SPACED ( CYL .
UNI T=SYSDA . SPACE= ( CYL ,
UN!T=SYSDA, SPACE' (CYL ,
UNI T=SYSDA ,SPACE= ( CYL ,
10)
1C)
1C)
10)
10)
10)
= tSRTOTR AN.UNIT=SYSDA,SPACE =
DP
DD
DC
//SORT.SDRTHKO* OD
//SORT.SORTHK05 DO
//SORT.SORTWK06 DD
//SORTtSORTOUT DD
//SORT. SYSIN 00 *
SORT FIELDS'! 1.12, A, 80,1, A, 74. 1 ,0) , FORMAT=CH
END
/*
//STEP* EXEC PGM=*.STEP2.LKED.SYSLMOD,
// CONO = 1 (i,LT,STEP2.LKEDI I
//STEP*. TRANS DD OSN=6SRTDTR XN.DI SP= (OLD, DELE TE )
//STEP^.OLO DO DUMMY
//STEP*. NEW DO OSN=Nt*SORC=
//STEP«.6RR01 OD SYSOUT=A
//STEP*. SYSIN DP
, CONTIG)
.CONTIG)
.CONTIG)
.CONTIG)
.CONTIG)
.CONTIGI
( 1 , 1 I I .
Figure 7.2-4.
Example JCL Card Setup for Source File
Create and List Run.
-------
TABLE 7.2-1
ACTION CARD FORMAT
Column Picture Description Edit Action
1-3 XXX Region Number
(001 thru 999)
4-9 AAAAAA Action Code; Create
enter CREATE or or
UPDATE Update
10-27 18A Creation or Update Date;
this date is printed by
other programs to
identify Source File
used.
28-80 Blanks
For Create or Update use Above Format; For List Use Format Below
1-3 XXX Region Number
4-9 AAAAAA Action Code; List
Enter LIST
(left justified)
10-29 20A Region Name
30-80 Blanks
-------
alphanumeric* symbols in the columns indicated under the heading "Column"
of the table. The notation "5X" or "XXXXX" means that the user should
punch five numeric** symbols in the columns indicated. The notation
'XX.XX" means that the user should punch four numeric symbols in the
columns indicated. In this case the program will assume that a decimal
point exists between the second and third numeric symbols.
The user should note further that the information given in the
Picture column does not imply that any alphanumeric or numeric symbols are
acceptable. The further restrictions on actual symbols that may be punched
are detailed under "Description" in Table 7.2-1. Furthermore, the nota-
tion "Blank" means that nothing is punched in the columns indicated.
7.2.3.2 Point Source Punched Card Input
The basic point source data format consists of three punch cards for
each source. The formats for the point source data cards are described in
Table 7.2-2. When constructing the deck the input cards can be arranged in
any order. The sort function of the program will sequence the point source
cards in ascending order on columns 1-12 and 80. Column 80 contains the
card number (1, 2 or 3). Columns 1-12 contain the identification field
consisting of the region number, SIC code, site number, and process code,
in that order. The data cards are also sequenced on column 79 in descend-
ing order. Column 79 contains the transaction code, defined as follows:
(a) Add - when creating the source file or adding a point
source to the file in an update procedure, the transaction
code is A^. At least cards 1 and 3 are required in this
case.
(b) Change - in an update procedure, when changing a data
field for an existing point source in the Source File,
the transaction code is C_. When a change is made to a
field, the entire card containing that field must be
reentered. However, only those cards in the set of three
cards having changed fields are required.
A, , 2,0,1, ,9,$, etc.
**0,1, ,9.
-------
TABLE 7.2-2A
Column
1-3
4-7
8-10
11-12
13-35
47
48
49-55
56-62
Picture*
XXX
XXXX
XXX
XX
23A
36-39
40-44
45-46
XXX. X
XXXX.X
XX
POINT SOURCE INPUT FORMAT
(Card Number 1)
Description
Region Number
(001 thru 999,
see Appendix B)
SIC Code
(four digits,
see Table 5-3)
Site Number
(001 thru 999,
arbitrary)
Process Code
(00 thru 99,
see Table 5-3)
Descriptive Name;
source name plus
brief description
Location X (km)
Location Y (km)
Political Juris-
diction
(01 thru 10)
Ownership
Source Type
XXXX.XXX
XXXX.XXX
S02 Emission Rate
(ton/day)
Particulate Emission
Rate (tons/day)
Program
Editing Action
Must be non-
blank
Must be non-
blank
Must be non-
blank
Must be non-
blank
Must be non-
blank
Must be numeric
Must be numeric
Must be numeric
Must be P, L, S
F or U
Must be B, P, or
S
Must be non-
blank if Partic-
ulate Emission
Rate is blank.
If non-blank,
must be numeric
Must be non-
blank if S02
Emission Rate
is blank. If
non-blank must
be numeric
-------
Column
63-66
67-68
69-71
72-75
76-78
79
TABLE 7.2-2A
POINT SOURCE INPUT FORMAT (Continued)
(Card Number 1)
Picture*
XXXX
X.X
XX.X
XX.XX
XXX
Description
Operating Time
(hrs/yr)
Shifts per Day
Existing SO Control
Efficiency {%)
Existing Particulate
Control Efficiency
80
Existing Control
Device ID (see
Table 5-1)
Transaction Code;
enter D if source
record is to be
deleted, C if change
ia to be made to an
existing source
record, A if a source
record is to be added
Card Number = 1
Program
Editing Action
Must be numeric
Must be numeric
If non-blank
must be numeric
If non-blank,
must be numeric
If non-blank
must be numeric
Must be D, C or
A
Must be 1
*NOTE: 1. All decimal points are implied.
2. Always right justify. E.g., in columns 1-3, Region No. 1 may
be punched as 001 or two blanks and then 1.
3. If the places after (to the right of) an input value are either
zero or unknown, then zeros must be punched in all columns
after the last digit, e.g., in columns 72-75, ninety nine
percent must be punched as nine-nine-zero-zero.
4. When editing function indicates field must be non-blank, then
at least one column must be punched, e.g., in columns 11-12 a
process code of 00 must be blank-zero-or-zero-zero.
-------
18-20
21-24
25-28
29-32
33-37
38-43
44-49
50-54
TABLE 7.2-2B
POINT SOURCE INPUT FORMAT
(Card Number 2)
Column
1-3
4-7
8-10
11-12
13-17
Picture
XXX
XXXX
XXX
XX
XXXXX
Description
Region Number
SIC Code
Site Number
Process Code
Rated Capacity
XX.X
XXX.X
XXX. X
XXXX
XXXXX
XXXXXX
xxxxxx
XXXXX
Program
Editing Action
Identification
field-see
Card No. 1
(106 BTU/hr)
Coal Heat Con-
tent
(106 BTU/ton)
Residual Oil
Heat Content
(103 BTU/gal)
Distillate Oil
Heat Content
(103 BTU/gal)
Gas Heat Con-
tent
(BTU/Cu.ft)
Coal Burned
(Tons/day)
Residual Oil
Burned
(gal/day)
Distillate Oil
(gal/day)
Gas Burned
(103 ft3/day)
If non-blank,
must be numeric;
converts to
BTU/hr
If non-blank,
must be numeric;
converts to
BTU/ton
If non-blank,
must be numeric;
converts to
BTU/gal
If non-blank,
must be numeric;
converts to
BTU/gal
If non-blank,
must be numeric
If non-blank,
must be numeric
If non-blank,
must be numeric
If non-blank,
must be numeric
If non-blank,
must be numeric;
converts to
ft3/day
-------
Column
55-57
58-60
61-63
64-68
69-71
72-78
79
TABLE 7.2-2B
POINT SOURCE INPUT FORMAT (Continued)
(Card Number 2)
Picture
X.XX
X.XX
X.XX
X.XXXX
XX.X
Blank
A
Description
Coal Sulfur
Content in (%)
Residual Oil Sulfur
Content (%)
Distillate Oil
Sulfur Content (%)
Gas Sulfur Content
Coal Ash Content
80
Transaction Code;
enter A if a source
record is to be added,
C if a change is to be
made to an existing
source record
Card Number = 2
Program
Editing Action
If non-blank,
must be numeric
If non-blank,
must be numeric
If non-blank,
must be numeric
If non-blank,
must be numeric
If non-blank,
must be numeric
Must be A or C
Must be 2
-------
Column
1-3
4-7
8-10
11-12
13-16
17-20
21-24
Picture
XXX
XXXX
XXX
XX
XXXX
XXXX
TABLE 7.2-2C
POINT SOURCE INPUT FORMAT
(Card Number 3)
Description
Region Number
SIC Code
Site Number
Process Code
XXXX
Program
Editing Action
Identification
field - see
Card No. 1
Stack Height (ft)
Stack Temperature
in (°F)
Normalized Plume
Rise in(ft2/sec)
If non-blank,
must be numeric;
converts to
meters
If non-blank,
must.be numeric;
converts to
°Kelvin
If non-blank,
must be numeric;
converts to m2/
sec
25-30
XXXXXX
31-35
36-38
39-41
42-44
45-78
XXXX
XX.X
XXX
X.XX
Blank
Maximum Process Rate
in(102 Ib/hr)
Maximum Exhaust Gas
Volume (102 ACFM)
Stack Diameter (ft)
Stack Velocity
(ft/sec)
Use Factor
If non-blank,
must be numeric;
converts to
Ib/hr
If non-blank,
must be numeric;
converts to
ACFM
If non-blank,
must be numeric;
converts to
meters
If non-blank,
must be numeric;
converts to m/sec
If non-blank,
must be numeric
-------
TABLE 7.2-2C
POINT SOURCE INPUT FORMAT (Continued)
(Card Number 3)
Program
Column Picture Description Editing Action
79 A Transaction Code; Must be A or C
enter A if a source
file is to be added;
C if a change is to
be made to an existing
source record
8 X Card Number = 3 Must be 3
-------
(c) Delete - In an update procedure, when deleting a point
source from the Source File, only the first card is
entered. The identification field (columns 1-12), the
card number (1 in column 80) and the transaction code D
(in column 79) are the only fields punched.
The card sequencing on column 79 takes precedence (i.e., D, C, A).
Therefore, when executing an update, all deletion cards are processed first,
then changes and last additions. When the file is first created, all the
cards must have transaction code A..
Since the point source data will frequently involve a large number
of punch cards, special data forms have been designed (Figure 7.2-5) which
correspond to Table 7.2-2. Each form has space for four sets of three
cards. Since the identification field will be the same for each card in
a given set of three, it is segregated on the upper left hand corner of
each set. The remaining 68 columns (13-80) of each card are below the
identification field. The individual fields are demarcated by short bold
vertical lines and the implied decimal point's position is marked by
a black triangle.
7.2.3.3 Area Source Punched Card Input
The area source data cards follow the point source data cards in the
program job deck and their sequencing follow the same rules given in the
previous section. However, only one data card is required for every area
source that is to be input to the Source File. The card format is described
in Table 7.2-3.
Special data forms have been designed for preparing the area source
data. The form is illustrated in Figure 7.2-6. Since the first seven
columns will remain unchanged for all area sources within the region, a
separate block for these columns is set aside in the upper left hand
corner of the data forms. The remainder of the sheet is devoted to the
non-blank entries of the card. Each of the twenty-five lines provides the
complete data field of a single card. The field demarcations are heavy
vertical lines and the implied decimal point locations are indicated by
black triangles.
-------
1 2
3
REGION
13 14
,
15
4
5
6
7
SIC
16
17
HATED CAP
iO6 BIU HH
13 14 15
16
STKHT (FT)
17
18
19
1
8
9
10
SITE
DE
20
f
tOA
IO6 BTuAON'
18
19
20
STK TEMP (°F)
1 2
3
IEGION
13 14
IS
4
5
6
7
X
16
17
RATED CAP
(IO6 BTU/HR)
13 14
IS
16
STKHT (FT)
17
18
19
1
8
21
22
II
12
PROC
SCRIPT IVE
23
1
24
f~
If SID Oil
(!03 STU/GAL)
HtAT
21
22
23
24
«0»MALI!E
PLM RISE FT2/SEC)
9
10
SITE
Dl
20
r
OA
(io* nuAON)
18
19
20
STK TEMP (°F)
1 2
3
REGION
13 14
15
4
5
6
7
SIC
16
17
RATED CAP
.IO6 BTU'HRI
13! 14 I 15 i 16
STK HT (FT)
17
18
8
21
22
II
12
PROC
SCR|PTIVE
23
^
24
IESID OIL
(10J BTU/GAL)
HEAT
^2?
22
23
24
NORM* IZE
PLMRISE(FTZ/SEC
IMPLEMENTATION PLANNING PROGRAM
POINT
£ EMISSION RATE (TON/DAY)
M(WC , , . *" *°1 PART CULATE
25
26
27
1
28
DIST OIL
(103 BTU/GAL)
CONTENT
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
6»S,
(BTU/FT3)
29
30
MAX PROC RATE (IO2 Lft/HR)
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
COAL (TON/DAY)
33
34
33
MAX EXH GAS VOL
36
37
1
j
38
39
40
41
42
43
RESID OIL (SAL/DAY)
FUEL
36
STK OIA (F)
39
40
41
STK VU (F/S)
NAME XOW
25
26
27
1
DIST OIL
(I03 ITU/GAL
CONTENT
25
26
27
28
28
29
30|3I
32
GAS
(BTUAn
29
3O
MAX PROC RATE (IO2 LfJ/HR)
9
10
SITE
D
19120
Y
COAL
(!06 BTUAON1
18
I9l20
STK TEMP (°F)
1 2
3
IEGION
13 14
Ib
4
5
6
7
SIC
16
17
RATED CAP
(IO6 6TU/HR)
13 14
IS
16
STK HT (FT)
17
18
8
21
22
II
12
PROC
SjC.R|FTlVE
23
'
24
(IO3 BTU/OAL)
HEAT
21 22|23|24
1
NORMALIZED
NAA
25
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
COAl (TON/DAY)
33
34
35
MAX EXH GAS VOL
no ArFM)
4E
26
27
28
DIST OIL
(IO3 ITU/GAL)
CONTENT
25]
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
OAT -|
(BTU/FTl
291
30
MAX PROC RATE (10 LE/HR)
9
10
SITE
_PJ
I9|20
T
10* BTUAON)
lei
19
20
STK TEMP (*F)
21
22
II
12
PROC
SCJMPTIVF.
23
24
(IO3 BTU/OAL)
HEAT
21
22
23
24
NORMALIZED
PLMRISE(FT2/SEC)
NAA
25
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
1
j
38
39
42
1
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
DIST OIL (GAL/DAY)
WINED
44
USE FACTOR
YIKM)
40
41
42
1
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
SO
SI
!
52
53
54
GAS (1C3 fT3/DAY)
SO
51
52
53
54
55
^
b6
57
COAL
55
56
57
58
A
59
l
6O
61 62
OPERATING TIME
HRSAR)
6i
RESID Oil PI" Oil
SUIFUR CONT (>
58
59
60
61 62
63
64
65
t*>
SHFT/
DAY
^
6.*
bB
GAS
u
64
65
66
67
68
CONTROL
*>,
69
70
COAL A
CONT
69
70
71
SH
%)
71
FFICIENCY (%)
PARTICUUTE
72
^
73
74
/t>
DATA RECORD
/ 1
DEVICE ID *- O
/b
/'/
its
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
/9
£
£
79
1
80
i
1
80
i
n
45
46
/
47
/
48
EMISSION KATE (TON/DAY)
*°1 1 PAITICULATE
49
IESIDOII (GAL/DAY) | DIST OIL (GAL/DAY)
FUEL BURNED
38
STK OIA (F)
39
40
41
STK VEl (F/S)
X(PCM)
36
37
COAl (TON/DAY)
33
34
35
MAX EXH GAS VOL
(10 ATFM)
36
37
\
38
,
39
42
1
43
44
USE FACTOR
Y(KM)
40
41
42
1
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52^
53
54
GAS (10 FT A»AY)
50
51
52
53
54
5S|S6
T
57
COAL
551
56
57
58
\
J
59
f
60
61 62
^ '
OPERATING TIME
(HRSAR)
63
RESIO Oil Din OIL
SULFUR CONT (1
^58
59
60
61 62
63
64
(
65
'
66
SHFT/
DAY
j
67
^
68
GAS
«
64
65
66
67
68
CONTROL
S0!
69
j
10
'
71
COAL ASH
CONT (%)
69
70
71
FFICIENCY (%)
PARTICULATE
72
j
73
74
75
DEVICE ID
76
77
78
721
73
74
75
76
77
78
?
79
1
79
1
1
80
2
|
O
80
3
PJ
45
46
/
47
/
48
EMISSION HATE (TON/DAY)
SOJ PARTICULATE
49
IESIDOIL (GAL/DAY) [ DIST Oil (SAL/DAY)
FUEL HJRNED
38
STK DIA (F)
39
40
41
STIC VEl (FA)
42
5
43
44
USE FACTOR
* X (KM) Y (KM)
26
27
^
28
DIST OIL
(IO1 BTU/OAl)
CONTENT
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
GAS
leiu/nT
29l
30
MAX PROC RATE (IO2 LB/HR)
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
COAL (TON/DAY)
33
34
39
MAXEXHGASVOL
(10? ACFM)
36
37
'
38
39
40
41
42
45
46
47
48
49
SO
SI
i
52
53
54
GASdo'f^/DAY)
50
51
52
53
54
55
^
56
57
COAL
55
56
57
58
1
J
59
r
60
61 |62
Y
OPERATING TIME
(HRSAW
63
64
1
65
66
SHFT/
DAY
J
67
68
RESIO Oil DIST OIL GAS
SULFUR CONT (%)
56
59
60
61 62
63
64
65
66
67
68
CONTROL
SO2
69
i
70
COAL A
CONT
69
70
71
SH
*)
71
FFtCIENCY (%)
PARTICULATE
72
j
73
74
75
DEVICE ID
76
77
78
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
?
79
?
^
79
o
(J
1
80
2
|
80
3
PJ
1
43
44
45
46
/
47
/
48
EMISSION RATE (TON/DAY)
*°2 PARTICULATE
49
KESID Oil (GAL/DAY) f DIST Oil (GAL/DAY)
FUEL BURNED
38
STK DIA (F)
39
40
41
STK Vil (F/S)
42
1
43
44
USE FACTOR
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
GAS (IO3 FT3/DAY)
50
SI
52
53
54
55
56
57
COAL
55
56
57
56
i
59
r
60
it SID OIL
s
58
59
60
61 62l
1 '
OPERATING TIME
(HRS/VR)
63
6I!T oil
ULFUR CONT (
61 62
63
64
i
65
66
SHFT/
DAY
i
67
68
GAS
«
64
65
66
67
CONTROL
"j
69
70
71
COAL ASH
CONT (%)
168 69
70
71
FFICIENCY (%)
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
7?
73
74
75
76
77
78
/
79
|
79
1
1
80
2
O
O
80
3
-------
Column
TABLE 7.2-3
AREA SOURCE INPUT FORMAT
Picture*
Description
Program
Editing Action
1-3
4-7
8-11
12
13-16
17-21
22-25
26-27
28-31
32-38
39-45
46-78
XXX
XXXX
XXXX
X
XXX.X
XXXX.X
XXX.X
XX
XXXX
XXXX.XXX
XXXX.XXX
Blanks
Region Number
(001 thru 999,
Appendix B)
SIC Code
(must be 9999)
Site Number
(0001 thru 9999
arbitrary)
Process Code
(must be 0)
Location X (km)
Location Y (km)
Area
Political Jurisdiction
Effective Stack
Height (ft.)
S02 Emission Rate
(tons/day)
Particulate Emission
Rate (tons/day)
Must be non-blank
Must be non-blank
Must be non-blank
Must be non-blank
If non-blank must
be numeric
If non-blank must
be numeric
If non-blank must
be numeric
If non-blank must
be numeric
If non-blank, must
be numeric; con-
vert to meters
At least one or
both
Must be non-blank.
If non-blank must
be numeric
All decimal points implied.
-------
TABLE 7.2-3
AREA SOURCE INPUT FORMAT (Continued)
Program
Column Picture* Description Editing Action
79 A Transaction Code; A, C, or D
enter D if source
record is to be
deleted; C if change
is to be made to an
existing source
record, A if a source
record is to be added
80 X Card Number ' Blank
*
All decimal points implied.
-------
REGION
SIC
1
2
3
4
9
5
9
6
9
7
9
IMPLEMENTATION PLANNING PROGRAM
AREA
DATA RECORD
vj
I
SITE
e
9
10
ii
b1
0£
a.
12
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
LOCATION X (KM)
13
14
15
J6
LOCATION Y (KM)
17
18
19
20
21
AREA (KM2)
22
23
24
25
POL
JUR
26
27
STACK HEIGHT
(FT.)
28
29
30
31
EMISSION RATE SO2
(TON/DAY)
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
EMISSION RATE PART.
(TON/DAY)
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
ACTION
79
-------
7.2.4 Output
The major output of the Source Data Management System is the Source
file stored on either a permanent disk file or magnetic tape (the Source
File record formats are described in Volume II, Chapter 3).
In addition to operations on the Source File itself, the main-
tenance program provides the printed output:
(a) Source File Edit Error Listing
(b) Source File Listing
A description of all error messages is presented in Chapter 8. Each
entry in the error list is identified by region, SIC code, and site number
designations. In addition, the entries include the field number and param-
eter value which are in question.
The error list identifies any source which is in error and describes
the error. If a card cannot be identified, i.e., a bad identification
transaction code or card number, the card is rejected and a message de-
scribing the problem is written.
Figures 7.2-7 and 7.2-8 illustrate the output formats for the printed
listing of records (sources) in the Source File.
-------
OUTPUT UNITS
SOURCE FILE FOk CENTRAL CITY REGION 907
CREATE DATE NOVEMBER 2, 1970 UPDATE DATE NOVEMBER 12, 197C
SOURCE ID
RATED CAPCTY
BTU/HOUR
STACK HEIGHT
METERS
DESCRIPTIVE NAMF
COAL HEAT
BTU/TQN
R OILHEAT
BTU/GAL
STACK TEMPERATURE
DEG K
LOC X
LOC Y PJ OWNER TY°c SQ2EMRAT PARTEMhT 3P T I MF SHIFTS SJ2C1NEFE P4STCONEFF DEVICE 13
KM - - TONS/DAY TONS/DAY HPS/YP « «
0 aiLHEAT GASHEAT COALRRN P. 'JIL3KN C TlLBhM GAS 3*N C')4LS: = 3ILSC J 31 L SC GAS SC C3AL iSH
BTU/GAL BTU/CU FT TON/JAY GAL/DAY GAL/JAY CJ FT/CAY < < * t *
PLUME RISE
METERS
MAX PROCESS RATE
LB/HR
MAX EXHAJST
A:FM
;AS VOL
STACK DIAMETER
METERS
STACK VELCC
M/SCC
USE FACT
r
POINT SOURCES
SOURCE ID DESCRIPTIVE NAME
907211900125 ADDITIONAL SOURCE
LOC X LCC Y PJ OWNER TYPE S02EMRAT PAKTEMf-T DP TIME SHIFTS SD2CUNECF PAPTCONEFF DEVICE ID
60.0 60.0 Cl P P .000 .100 876T J. C, .0 .GC
RATED CAPCTY COAL HEAT R OILHEAT 0 OILHEAT GASHEAT COALBRN R OILBRN D OILBFN GAS BRN CD4LSC
»O.OOOOOE»01 *0.000£»99 +O.OOOOE*00 *C.CCCOE»00 0 0 0 C C .00
OILSC 0 3ILSC GAS SC COAL ASH
.OC~ .00 .0000 .0
STACK HEIGHT
15.240
STACK TEMPERATURE
338.6CO
PLUME RISE
.ceo
MAX PROCESS KATE
JOO
MAX EXHAUST
20CC
;AS VDL
STACK !>IAMET£1
.60960
STACK VEL3C
15.24CO
us; FA:
i.io
i
10
en
SOURCE IU DESCRIPTIVE NAMt
907280004110 CHEMICAL PLANT-BOILER
LOC X
88.0
LOC Y PJ O«NER TY°H S02EMRAT PARTEMST OP TIME SHIFTS S02CON£FF PARTCONEFF DEVIC?
71.C C2 P B 2S.OOC 4.CCC 876C 3.0 .0 82.50 7
RATED CAPCTY COAL HEAT R TILHtAT D OILHEAT GASHEAT COAL3*N K JIL6RN .C OIL8PN GAS 8»N
»5.67000E+08 +2.300E*C7 »O.OCOOE+00 +C.OCCCe*00 0 385 0 C 0
STACK HEIGHT
24.079
STACK TEMPERATURE
483.716
PLUME RISE MAX PRIX?
.OCO
RATE
MAX EXHAUST
SOURCE ID DESCRIPTIVE NAME
907281903302 H2S04 PLANT
LOC X
88.3
LOC Y PJ OWNER TYPE
63.8 02 P P
RATED CAPCTY COAL HEAT R OILHEAT 0 OILHEAT GASHEAT
»0.00000e»0l *O.OOCE»99 »O.OOOOE+00 *C.OOCOE*00 0
STACK HEIGHT
29.870
STACK TEMPERATURE
361.952
SOURCE ID DESCRIPTIVE NAME
907281903402 H2S34 PLANT
RATED CAPCTY COAL HEAT
»O.OOOOOE+01 »O.OOCE»
-------
PAGE
NOTE. DATA GIVEN IN CONVERTED UNITS.
AREA SOURCES
SOURCE 10 LOC X(KI LOC Y(K)
to
90799990010C
907999900200
90799990030C
907999900400
90799990050C
907999900600
9079999C070C
907999903800
90799990090C
907999901000
9079999C110C
907999901200
907999901300
90799990140C
90799990150C
907999901600
907999901700
907999901800
907999901900
90799990200C
907999902100
907999902200
90799990230C
90799990240C
907999902500
90799990260C
3799990270C
42.0
42. C
42.0
42.0
62.0
62.0
62. C
62.C
62. C
72.0
62.0
72. C
62.0
72.0
62.0
82.0
82.0
82.C
82.0
82.0
82.0
82.0
82.C
92.0
82.0
82.0
10.C
30.0
50.C
70.0
LG.C
10.0
30.C
30.0
50.C
50.0
60.0
60.0
70.0
70.0
80.C
1C.O
30.0
50.C
5C.O
60.0
60.0
70.0
70.0
70.0
80.0
ARFA(SO KM)
4CC.C
4GC.C
400.0
4CC.O
4CO.C
400.0
4CO.O
1CO.O
1CC.O
100.0
1CO.O
KO.O
100.0
4CO.O
4rc.o
4co.o
ICC.O
1CC.O
10C.C
100.C
100.C
ICC.O
1CO.C
PJ EFFECTIVE STACK HGTIM)
SC2 EMISSION RATEIT/D) P»»T EMISSION RATE
.occ
.ooc
10.058
1C.058
.000
.OCC
10.058
10.058
10.058
1C.058
10.058
20.116
10.058
10.058
10.058
10 .058
1C.05B
1C.058
10 .058
1C
.C8C
.IOC
.50C
.550
.06C
.06C
.70C
.100
6.4CO
8.200
7. 100
19.60C
3.50C
4.200
.5CC
.070
.01C
.023
. 100
.12C
.015
.C15
.190
.020
1.700
2.300
1.8CC
5.OCC
1.000
1.1CC
. 110
.010
,015
-------
7.3 AIR POLLUTANT
-------
7.3 AIR POLLUTANT CONCENTRATION PROGRAM
7.3.1 Description
The Air Pollutant Concentration Program utilizes two types of input;
source file data and punched card input.
(a) Source File Data - These data are read by the program and
require the user to specify (on the JCL cards) the correct
data file to be read by the program. The specific data
read from the source file consists of the following items:
SIC code
Site code
Process code
Source coordinates: x and y (km). For area sources,
the area (km^) is also provided.
Stack Parameters; stack height (meters), stack exit
diameter (meters), stack exit velocity (meters/second)
and stack exit temperature (degrees Kelvin). If the
diameter, velocity or temperature values are zero, and
the normalized plume rise value is zero the program
assumes that the stack height value given represents
an effective stack height value (see Chapter 4). For
area sources the effective stack height (in this case
"effective height of release") concept is always used.
If the normalized plume rise value is greater than zero,
it will be used to determine the plume rise value.
Emission rate for each pollutant; S02 and particulates
(tons/day).
(b) Punched Card Input - This input consists of the JCL cards
and the card deck data set containing the NAMELIST input
parameters. Figure 7.3-1 illustrates the program use and
output options, as determined by the input NAMELIST varia-
bles. Examples of the types of output are shown in the
referenced figures.
7.3.2 JCL and Deck Setup
An example deck setup configuration is illustrated in Figure 7.3-2.
Figure 7..3-3 contains the specific JCL cards, corresponding to Figure 7.3-2.
The setup illustrated is based on the following configuration: £7
(a) Program is in object deck form.
-------
Lt
PRINT
RECEPTOR
CONCENTRATION
DATA
(FIGURE 7. 3-io]
^> ^
1
» NOT = o
:ALIBRATE|
CALCULATE
RECEPTOR
CONCENTRATIONS
1
CALIBRATION
SUBROUTINE
PRINT
CALIBRATION
DATA
(FIGURES 7.3-8,
7.3-9) 1__ J
(RECEPTOR
CONCENTRATI
MODE)
PUNCH CARD
OUTPUT FOR
CONCENTRATION
ISOPLETHS
(TABLE 7.3-2)
ATMOSPHERIC
DIFFUSION
MODEL
(ANALYSIS DATA
PRINT
EXCESS
TABLE
(FIGURE 7. 3-11;
^-
OUTPUTf '-
EXCESS
TABLE
CALCULATIONS
NO STATISTICAL
DATA
PRINT
STATISTICAL
TABLES
(FIGURE 7. 3-12)
^
t
STATISTICAL
TABLE
CALCULATIONS
STATISTICAL
MODEL
PRINT
SOURCE
CONTRIBUTION
TACLE
(FIGURE 7. 3-13)
^ '
I
I
f
SE ^Y^
NPUT 1
ECEPTORSi ,
SOURCE
CONTRIBUTION
CALCULATIONS
DETERMINE
FIVE MAXIMUM
CONCENTRATION
RECEPTORS
Figure 7.3-1. Air Pollutant Concentration Program
Flow.
-------
END CARD
,f DATA DECK
JCL CARDS FOR DATA
C" SET DEFINITION
END CARD
PROGRAM OBJECT DECK
OVERLAY CARD
JCL CARDS FOR
LOAD & EXECUTE
Figure 7.3-2.
Example Deck Configuration for the Air
Pollutant Concentration Program.
-------
JCL CJR AIR POLLUTANT C CNCENT S «T I ON
U>
O
LOAD AND
EXECUTE
END CARD
DATA SET
DEFINITION
DATA SET
END CARD
f //LG
V
PROGRAM
OBJECT DECK
AND OVERLAY
CARDS
//LKEO.SYSIN
PR OC = FT PTGLG.PARM.LKEO='««AP,LIST,nvLY,LET-
TO «
OECK Gots HERE
OVFPLAY A
INSERT INPUT,IHCNAMEL
OVERLAY A
INSERT CJNVRT
I\SEOT
TVFcLiY ^
INSERT CAMP
3VERLAY C
IMSEPT PTLUTl
3VERLAY C
TVEPLAY *-
IMS = RT "'UUT.P
TVFPLAY A
INSERT SrLECT
INSFRT EXCEED,JRDE«
OVERLAY 3
INSERT SEL12
OVERLAY 8
INSFRT POLUT2
/*
//GO.FT11FCC1 DP
//GP.FT12FC01 DC UNIT=24
// LAriFL = ( ,SL
//GO.SYSABENT DD SYSGUT=A
.KEEP) ,
.OUT )
OFCK GOES HERE
/*
-------
(b) Program overlay structure is used (see Volume II, Section
3.2).
(c) Source File is on disk.
Deviations from this configuration require appropriate JCL card changes.
7.3.3 Input
The punched card input variables used to construct the Data Set are
given in Table 7.3-1. An example data form with prepared inputs is given
in Figure 7.3-4.
7.3.4 Output
Three types of output are produced by the program, they are:
(a) Printed output of all calculated concentration data.
(b) Punched card deck of mean concentration values.
(c) Output tape containing source contribution data (Source
Contribution File).
The description of the printed and punched card output types are
given in the following paragraphs. The format and contents of the Source
Contribution File is given in Section 7.4.
Source Data (Figure 7.3-5)
That portion of the Source File data utilized by the program is
itemized in a source data output table. The data listed, for each point
and area source in the region, includes the source identification, loca-
tion, area, emission rate, physical stack height, and stack exit param-
eters: diameter, velocity and temperature. If a .normalized plume rise
value is used, its value is printed in the stack diameter column and
indicated by an asterisk. For area sources, the "Stack Height" column
represents the input effective stack height; the data in the stack exit
parameter columns however, does not apply.
Meteorological Input Data (Figure 7.3-6)
The input wind roses (frequency of occurrence values for wind direc-
tion and speed categories) for the five stability classes are output;
one wind rose per page. Figure 7.3-6 illustrates a wind rose for stabil-
ity class 3. Stability classes 1 through 5 correspond to very unstable,
-------
TABLE 7.3-1
PUNCHED CARD INPUT FOR THE AIR POLLUTANT
CONCENTRATION PROGRAM
Data Type Description
MN &INDATA - A NAMELIST variable indicating the start of a
list of namelist inputs. No equals sign or values are
associated with this variable.
ONA REGI0N - Up 'to 24 characters (preceded by an apostrophe
and followed by an apostrophe and comma) may be used to
describe the region being run. If omitted, the Region
designation will be blank.
ONA DATE - Up to 20 characters (preceded by an apostrophe and
followed by an apostrophe and comma) may be used to define
the run date. If omitted, the date will be blank.
ONI IP0LU1 - Flag to indicate single pollutant run: one (1)
indicates consideration of S02 only and a two (2) indi-
cates consideration of particulates only. If omitted or
input as zero (0), both pollutants are considered.
MNP DPTHMX - Mixing height (meters).
MNP WNDFRQ - Relative frequency of occurrence for each wind
speed class, wind direction, and wind stability class
combination (480 values). The order of input for the fre-
quency values associated with each stability-wind direction-
wind speed combination is as follows: stability 1-direction
1-speed 1, stability 1-direction 1-speed 2, , stability
1-direction 1-speed 6, stability 1-direction 2-speed 1,
, stability 1-direction 2-speed 6, , stability 1-
direction 16-speed 6, , stability 2-direction 1-speed
1, , stability 5-direction 16-speed 6.
MNP TA - Average ambient temperature (degrees Kelvin).
MNP PA - Average ambient pressure (millibars).
MNP BLIFE - Half-life factors (hours). The data must be pro-
vided in the order: S02> Particulate matter.
ONP BACKGR - Background concentrations (arithmetic mean,
micrograms per cubic meter) for each pollutant in the order:
S02» particulate matter. If omitted background values are
assumed to be zero.
ONI INCRX - Number of columns in the receptor grid. If omitted,
this variable is assumed to be zero.
-------
TABLE 7.3-1
PUNCHED CARD INPUT FOR THE AIR POLLUTANT
CONCENTRATION PROGRAM (Continued)
Data Type Description
ONI INCRY - Number of rows in the receptor grid. If omitted,
this variable is assumed to be zero.
ONP DELTA - Distance (kilometers) between two adjacent rows or
columns. If 'omitted, this variable is assumed to be zero.
ONP RBASE - X and Y coordinates (kilometers) of southwest
corner of receptor grid system. If omit-ted, these varia-
bles are assumed to be zero, zero.
ONI IADD - Total number of non-grid receptors. This value
must be less than or equal to 50. If omitted, this
variable is assumed to be zero. If input, XRECEP values
must be input.
NOTE: If both the grid system and IADD are omitted, the
run will terminate and print the message: 'RECEP-
TORS NOT INPUT.'
ONP XRECEP - X, Y (kilometers) coordinates for the IADD non-
grid receptors. If IADD is non-zero, these values must be
input.
ONI IPUNCH - Flag to indicate whether receptor ground level
concentration output is to be punched on cards (for use in
plotting concentration isopleths). Set to one (1) for
punched card output; a zero (0) indicates no punched card
output. If omitted, flag will be set to one (1).
MNI IREG - Flag to indicate which regression option is to be
used. A zero (0) indicates that input regression constants
are required; one (1) indicates calibration of the model
followed by the model run; a two (2) indicates calibration
only. If calibration values are to be calculated (IREG =
1 or 2), the following variables must be input: number of
stations (NS02 and/or NPART), and station location and
measured concentration data (S020B and/or PAR0B). If the
calibration constants are input, they are defined by S02CAL
and/or PARCAL.
ONP S02CAL - Regression line constants (y-intercept, slope)
for sulfur dioxide. If omitted (and IREG = 0), this varia-
ble is set to zero, one.
ONP PARCAL - Regression line constants (y-intercept, slope) for
suspended particulate matter. If omitted (and IREG = 0),
this variable is set to zero, one.
-------
TABLE 7.3-1
PUNCHED CARD INPUT FOR THE AIR POLLUTANT
CONCENTRATION PROGRAM (Continued)
Data Type Description
ONI NS02 - Number of S02 measuring stations. If omitted, this
variable is assumed to be zero.
ONI NPART - Number of particulate measuring stations. If
omitted, this' variable is assumed to be zero.
ONP S020B - Up to one hundred (100) sets of S02 measuring sta-
tion locations and measured concentration values are input
in the following order for each station: x-coordinate and
y-coordinate of station and measured concentration value.
If omitted, this variable is assumed to contain zero for
all values.
ONP PAR0B - Up to one hundred (100) sets of particulate matter
measuring stations and measured concentration values are
input in the following order for each station: x-coordinate
and y-coordinate of station and measured concentration value.
If omitted, this variable is assumed to contain zero for
all values.
ONI ISTAT - Flag to indicate if table data is desired: zero (0)
for no output, one (1) for output. These data include the
Excess Concentration Table, Source Contribution Table and
the Statistical Tables. If omitted, this variable is set
to zero.
ONP AQSTAN - Air quality standard for each pollutant (arith-
metic mean in micrograms per cubic meter) input in the
order: S02, and particulate matter. If omitted, this
variable assumed to be zero, zero.
ONI NSEL5 - Flag to indicate if the five (5) receptors on the
Source Contribution table are input (NSEL5 = 1) or are the
five receptors of maximum concentration and therefore
selected by the program (NSEL5 =0). If omitted, NSEL5 =
0.
ONI IC0NS* - Five (5) S02 receptor location numbers for source
contribution table output. If NSEL5 = 1, all 5 values must
be input.
See Footnote on following page.
-------
TABLE 7.3-1
PUNCHED CARD INPUT FOR THE AIR POLLUTANT
CONCENTRATION PROGRAM (Continued)
Data. Type Description
ONI IC0NP* - Five (5) particulate matter receptor location
numbers for source contribution table output. If NSEL5 =
1, all 5 values must be input.
ONI NSEL12 - Flag to indicate whether statistical output is
desired: zero (0) for no, one (1) for yes. If statistical
output is requested, the following variables must also be
present: Up to twelve (12) receptor numbers per pollutant
for statistical output (ISTATS and/or ISTATP); standard
geometric deviations corresponding to each receptor number
specified (SGDS and/or SGDP); five (5) averaging times for
each pollutant (S02AVG and/or PARAVG); and three (3) per-
centile values (PERCNT). If omitted, NSEL12=0.
ONI ISTATS* - Twelve (12) S02 receptor location numbers for
statistical output.
ONI ISTATP* - Twelve (12) particulate matter receptor location
numbers for statistical output.
ONP S02AVG - Five averaging times for S02 expressed in hours.
ONP PARAVG - Five averaging times for particulate matter ex-
pressed in hours.
ONP SGDS - Standard geometric deviation (24-hour period) for
S02 corresponding to the ISTATS receptor numbers. These
values must be input in the same order as the receptor
location numbers to which they refer.
ONP SGDP - Standard geometric deviations (24-hour period) for
particulate matter corresponding to the ISTATP receptor
numbers. The values must be input in the same order as the
receptor location numbers to which they refer.
Receptor location numbers are selected from the basic set of input recep-
tors. The numbering system of the basic set is defined as follows: first
number the grid receptor locations consecutively, increasing from bottom to
top within each column and by column from left to right; then number the
non-grid receptors, continuing from the last grid receptor number in the
order they are input. The basic set will then contain INCRX*INCRY + IADD
receptor numbers.
-------
TABLE 7.3-1
PUNCHED CARD INPUT FOR THE AIR POLLUTANT
CONCENTRATION PROGRAM (Continued)
Data Type Description
ONP S02PER - Three (3) percentile levels (percent) for the
S02 statistical output.
ONP PARPER - Three (3) percentile levels (percent) for the
particulate matter statistical output.
MN &END - This variable signifies the end of a list of
NAMELIST variables. No values are associated with this
variable.
-------
I
to
DAT!
NAM
MOI
NO. (
1
o
T
p
R
f
fl
S
f
I
K
H
I
S
f
<
t
I,
H*
P
A
ft
t,
4
N
B
A
4
S
4
i
4
4
fr
a
3
A
d
/l/l / 1170
,AU PQUI4T/t
LIM NO. CC - «*
» CAMDIA10-
r
«
«
I
j
c
A
g
f
t
t
r
t
s
7-
T
1
i>
B
t
R
p
.
F
K
\
$
a-
*
^
T
t
A
/)
A
4
ft
»
?
P
f
M
1
/
£
fr
X
E
V
B
I
T
/I
T
r
v
v
t
e
F
4
X
r
0
S
<
ft
«
a
I/
t
S
f
&
.
.
/
0
0
t
I
I
p
5
/
3
3
,
/
1
I
1
*J.C'N<" 80 COLUMN FREE KEYPUNCH FORM MMMir
IW* 8SVFW3
viMimi
n
0
i
0
.
\
.
V
7
,
.
,
f
t
(
/
f
t
>
1
fr
p
f
9
0
9
p
12
O
1
0
1
p
1
7
z
f
f
.
,
0
A
0
,
M
a
O
I
I
A
0
0
0
9
1
w
O
H
9
*
i
V
f
p
t
1
J
/
V
i
t
M
»
»
i
.
i
4
p
r
2
0
.
(
.
^
,.
t
r
i
.
I
£
)
^-
3
^
J
1
.
i
t
?
0
I
I
^
.
.
^
17
0
y
1
.
.
.
.
S
a
I
Ml
|
S
>
2.
f
0
9
,
3
V
1
2
J
/
/
6
0
9
1
.
v
0
0
to
3
,
^
,
,
2
|
.
0
9
o
9
0
0
21
1
3
1
I
/
2
»
.
t
i
g
^
0
0
0
22
7
0
f
/
0
T
S
o
f
0
e
i
^
L*
21
P
,
v
t
T
7
v
<
7
9
24
e
0
0
«
0
0
!
4
t
7
5
-
M
L
.
1
.
*
21
r
1
V
/
/
u«
21
fil
t
7
f
p
)
f
f
.
.
.
l^
It
2
y
0
0
0
o
0
U-
M
/
0
0
<>
0
2
3
V
^
O
0
0
0
?.
31
r
t
/
J
p
o
«/
K
IS*~
12
.
.
2
/
1
f
1
i
>
13
)
f
|
7
(
,
?
2
2
I
34
^
7
/
2
<»
J
y
i
7
.
.
.
jf
t**"
3b
,
.
.
7
*
51
?
L*1
M
J
/
1
1
f
ft
0
0
0,
37
1
)
j
t
.
P
31
1
1
2
/
0
0
M
3
f
2
/
f
,
i
^«
w
/
/
f
7
Q
f
f
l^
41
t
,
,
2
7
^
42
O
0
0
0
o
,7
t
k*
43
1
.
t
^
44
.
i
f
u*
46
t
g
9
j
.
41
J
2
9
f
v
7
LX
47
.
.
0
1
41
1
1
f
1
.
,/*
4*
1
.
(
H
/
IX
51
7
f
7
f
X
62
/
v
V
?
S3
,
X
^"
M
0
f
*
f
|x
H
^
M
^
§7
7
/
J
/
M
/
0
o
f
^
M
.
.
.
M
O
0
0
0
^
n
^*
u
^
11
-------
REGION: C:.NT*AL CITY
OATf: OFCEMfle-P 7, 1970
S 1JS.CS
U)
oo
4953
4943
9999
9999
9999
9999
9999
9999
9999
9999
9999
9999
9999
9999
9999
9999
* NORMALIZED PLUM? HISE VALUE (SauAKE METbRS PER SECOND)
-------
PEGION-. CSNTBAL CITY
D4Tfc: DECEMBER 7, 1970
STABILITY wINC ROS: CATS
STABILITY CLASS 3
U>
VO
KINO SPEfcD CLASS
3 4
DIRtCTICN
N
NNE
NE
ENE
F
ESE
SC
SSE
S
SSM
SH
NSh
W
HNrt
NW
NNH
O.OC046
0.0
0.0
C.OC092
G.':C135
C.O
O.OC138
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
O.OC046
o.c
O.CCC46
0.0
0.0
o.c
0.03046
0.0
0.00092
&.CC277
O.CC369
O.P0323
O.C0277
0.30092
0.00185
O.OC185
0.00138
O.C0138
C. 00346
0.00092
O.C0138
O.C3323
O.OC092
C.CCC92
0.00461
0.00415
0.00461
O.CC277
0.00092
G.C0092
O.OC092
C. 00^92
0.00092
O.OCC92
C.C0092
C.CCC46
0.00138
C.C
C.O
C.O
C.O
O.OC046
C.O .
C.C
C.O
0.0
C.O
C.O
C.O
C.O
C.O
O.D
0.0
0.0
C.O
0.0
C.C
C.O
C.O
o.c
C.O
o.c
o.c
C.O
C.O
C.C
C.C
C.O
0.0
C.C
C.C
C .0
C.O
C.O
C.O
0.0
0.0
0.0
C.O
0.0
C .0
0 .0
C.O
C.C
0.0
-------
moderately unstable, slightly unstable, neutral, and stable conditions,
respectively. For each stability class (i.e., on any given page), the
frequency of occurrence of each of the 6 wind speed classes (0-3, 4-6,
7-10, 11-16, 17-21 and over 21 knots) is listed for each of the 16 wind
directions. The sum of these frequency values for all stability classes
(480 values) equals unity.
Regional Data (Figure 7.3-7)
This data consists of the input temperature, pressure, mixing height,
pollutant half-life values and pollutant background values. The "INFINITE"
notation for half-life indicates the input data was less than .5 hours.
Correlation Data (Figure 7.3-8)
A separate Correlation Data table is printed for each pollutant,
giving the station number, location, and annual arithmetic average con-
centration at ground level. The table lists the observed (input minus
background) concentration and estimated concentration as computed by the
program at each of the input monitoring stations. The data in these two
columns is used by the program to compute the regression parameters used
for calibration. Only the last column contains values computed by the
program. Data in the other columns is input and displayed here to allow
comparison of observed and computed concentrations at each location, as in
the development of the calibration curves. If input regression line
constants are used, these tables will not appear.
Regression Parameters (Figure 7.3-9)
This output is a summary of the results of the calibration of the
model for the specific region. Two parameters for each pollutant (y-in-
tercept and slope) are shown. These values define the best (least-squares
fit) linear equation describing the relationship between calculated and
observed concentrations. In addition to these parameters, a computed
regression coefficient shown. When the value of the computed co-
efficient is greater than that of the 5% confidence level, calibration is
considered to be satisfactory. Each equation is then used by the computer
program to adjust the air quality values as dictated by the calibration.
-------
RE3ION: CENTRAL CITY t4TE: CECEM8F= 7, 1970
REGIONAL JAT1
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE (DEGREES KELVINI
AMBIENT PRESSURE (MILLIBARSI = ICC'i.O
vj
I MIXING HEIGHT (METERS) = 1CCO.O
M
LIFE (HOUPSI FOK:
SU2 = 3.0
PARTICUL«TES = INFINITE
OUNC1 CONCENTRATION ( "I ClOGi* 4KS / C Jri I C viTtt) FTP:
S02 = ! .3
PARTICULiTKS = "?.C
-------
: CfNTS&L CITY
DECEMBER 7, 197?
-J
I
CQPREL4TIUN DATA FOR SCV
WMITO" I'Ai
STtTI n
NU^B1^
1
£
3
L,
5
6
7
d
5
._ \
ST^TIJN I
I KJL'JM
Hjf li
79.2
c.5.0
83.9
38.6
9C.3
dl.9
126.8
75.0
82.1
L J
XAT UN
TFKS)
VF-*T
63. b
56.3
71. C
68.9
72.6
96.5
t)5.2
17. 1
5<..9
L J
ARITHMETIC wfA"
I 'MCntCu- A^S/v
OHS^RV^L -
36. C
3C.C
3C.C
5C.C
27. C
IB.:
19. C
5C.-
79. C
L
* CDSCENTSATION
;ubic MFT;-»
COMPUTED
<.
-------
PFOIONi CFMTKAL CITY
rX 7, 1977
*-
OJ
"EGRESSION PARAHcTEPS
POLLJTANT
PiSTICULAT^s
J
Y-INmCEPT
-2.32
L, _
SLOPE
C.6t>50
1.3200
L J
B^GSESSION
C3MPUTEO
C. 993*1
L
COEFFICIENTS
5* CCNF. LEVFL
1
| 0.666CC
1
1 C.7f7CC
.L
COMMENT
STATISTICALLY
STATISTICALLY
L
SIGNIF ICAMT
SIGMF ICA\T
IF "N3T STATISTICALLY SIGNIFICANT" THE COMPJTt? SLOPE SND Y-INTE KC EPT A«F NOT iJStD C0(< i »L I BPATI ON
-------
When the computed value of the regression coefficient is less than
that corresponding to the 5% confidence level, the following note will be
printed in the Table: NOT STATISTICALLY SIGNIFICANT. When this occurs,
the air quality values at receptors will be printed without the use of
these regression constants. It should also be noted that in this case the
regression parameters should not be used in subsequent runs. Instead,
the reason for the poor correlation should be determined and the necessary
corrections made. If input regression line parameters are used, no con-
fidence level values are obtained. If the run is "Calibrate Only" the
run will terminate with this table.
Receptor Concentration Data (Figure 7.3-10)
The primary output of the Air Pollutant Concentration Program is
contained in this output. Each grid and non-grid receptor is listed on a
separate line, by receptor number, together with the location and ground-
level concentration for each pollutant as computed by the program. The
term "expected" in the heading over the last three columns is not used in
the strict statistical sense, but merely indicates that the values are
predictions or estimates made by the program.
If calibration was requested and was successful (i.e., the calculated
regression coefficient exceeded the 5% confidence level), the values printed
in this table will have been adjusted using the regression-line parameters.
Pollutant Concentration Above Standard (Figure 7.3-11)
This table repeated for each pollutant, lists those receptors at
which the ground level concentration exceeds the input ambient air quality
standard. Each line of data in this table applies only to the Receptor
Number indicated for that line. For example, the "Necessary Reduction for
Point Sources" values in the first line is the required percent reduction
of all point source emissions to reduce the mean concentration of receptor
number 39 to the input ambient air quality standard of 35.0 micrograms per
cubic meter.
Statistical Data for Selected Receptors (Figure 7.3-12)
A statistical data table is printed for each pollutant and averaging-
time combination. In each table, data for the specified receptors consists
-------
r =GiCN: f FNTR4L CITY
OATF: DECEMBER 7, 1970
KECEPTOh C1NC5NTRATIQN
- -:C'. PTU«
NJ^"rh
1
2
3
ft
5
6
7
a
9
1C
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
1 rt
19
2C
21
11
23
24
25
2(>
27
2d
24
(0
31
3?
33
)4
35
If)
17
3H
39
40
KE-tEPTO** LOCATION
( KILGMrTtfiSI
HORIZ V:KT
--
ic.c
10. C
ic.c
25. C
25. r
25. C
40.:
<.o.c
«c.o
55. C
55. C
55. C
7C.C
70.:
70."
85. r
s5.:
B5.C
1CC.C
ice.:
1 C C . C
115."
115. C
115. C
13C.
130.
1 30.
1<.5.
!*>.
!<.5
j (, . 3
/I . C
oti.9
72.6
J3.5
d5.2
17.1
5<..9
71.1
EX"KCTEC AflTHVfTK ^EAM
(MIO.^OGCtMS/CJBIC :'rTES)
SC2 P4BT
15.8
15.5
15.2
16. d
16.2
15.7
13.3
1 7.T
16.5
20.7
18.3
18.1
2
-------
: CENTRAL cm
DATE: JECfBE* 7, 1970
S02 P3LLUTANT CONCENTRATIONS AbQVE STANDARD OP 35.2: MIC*OG*A>«S PK-» CUdi:
RECEPTOR
rf-HBfR
39
45
34
46
38
31
41
33
POLLUTANT CC^CfNTPATI JN (MICROGRVMS P?P CUBIC «FTfP)
AS |TH<1cTie H5AN
C1Nl.cNTRATI?N
7<..9389
5r.<.0l6
5*. ^545
i'l. 1853
il .76i2
*0.20S3
36. 751<>
J5.n97d
5XC = SS AHiJVr AIR
DUALITY STANDARD
39.9389
22.<»C16
lV.2i><.5
1S(.1853
16. 7o52
i.2C53
1.7519
0.0978
CJNT&I3JTI3N FRO«I
POINT SOURCtS
.
65.7918
5
-------
N: :-.-.T«AL CITY
f, 7,
AVfRAGIMO TIM_ *
1.0 HfLRS
.0
fAUTICULATf STATISTICAL DATA AT SEL^CTFT RECEPTORS I M IC«Of-- »*S PER Ca^IC MET^RI
SFLECTtD
PECEPT3R
NUMB£H
31
40
'.I
<.<>
*j
4<<
5
7.C9
J
0.1C
PEPCSNTILE
C1NCENT"ATI3N
114. b7
J7.1 1
175.95
93.31
176.39
1C1.C4
125.34
99.25
L J
1.0?
P-ERCENTILt
:CNCEflTRATION
64. 7d
5C .11
108.22
49.79
105. y
55.83
73. 75
51.7:
L
i c . c :
PEPCTMT ur
C 1NCFMTS ATI3N
29.59
2C.26
55.65
21. C rt
52.21
24.79
35. t9
21. Id
L
rXPECTEO -
MAXIMUM
CT»C=NTRAmN
. _
197.57
181. 71
278. 77
lt.9.11
286.96
177. 13
2 C 7 . 1 0
184.04
L
STANDAPT
r.FOHETFIC
DEVIATION
2.12
2.36
1.89
2.28
1.96
2.17
2.0C
2.35
L
-------
of: the expected arithmetic mean (used here in the sense of predicted or
estimated arithmetic mean) from the program; the standard geometric devi-
ation, which is the input value converted to the desired averaging time;
and the expected geometric mean and expected maximum concentration values,
which are calculated from the expected arithmetic mean and standard geo-
metric deviation values. Again, if calibration of the model was requested
and was successful, the arithmetic mean values used in this calculation
will have been adjusted using the regression line parameters. In addition,
this output lists the expected ground-level concentrations at three input
percentile values (other than the maximum value).
Source Contribution to Five Selected (or Maximum) Receptors (Figure
7.3-13)
The contributions of each point and area source in the region to the
five selected or five maximum receptors (as requested by the user) are
output for each pollutant. The source numbers correspond to those used in
the Source Data Table (Figure 7.3-5).
The contribution of a given source to each receptor is indicated
both as a percentage of the total concentration at the receptor and as an
absolute value (microgram/cubic meter). The contribution of the background
concentration, which is constant throughout the region, is shown in the
second line from the bottom. The last line contains the total contribution
from all sources for each receptor. Since all source contributions and
background values are summed, the percentage figure will total 100% and
the absolute value will equal the total concentration at each receptor
(i.e., the last figure in each receptor column will be the same as that
in the Receptor Concentration Data Table (Figure 7.3-10).
Punched Card Output (Table 7.3-2)
The data printed in the Receptor Concentration Data Table (Figure
7.3-4) is also punched on cards for use with surface contour programs.
The Air Pollutant Concentration Program provides only the punched cards; a
separate computer program is required to generate contour (isopleth) maps.
Since many of the surface contour programs utilize input data in integer
form, the emission rate values are scaled by a factor of 100.
-------
BE'3ION: CENTRAL CITY
DATE: DECEMBER 8( 117C
VO
ST'.HCE CONTRIBUTIONS T0 FIVE SFLECTEO PARTICJLATE "ECEPTCFS t M I
CUblC MFTEP)
SDUP-CE
I
2
3
92i '^.2**
0.0034 ?.C2*
r.:>133 O.C*«
C.2*69 C.65*
5.3200 14. Cd*
C.2353 0.62*
c.coob o.co*
0.1«.97 0.i>^
0.00^.3^^^^
c.og>*^^
c^^
\s^
JECEPTOS » 35
0.0113 0 . C* *
0.0906 0.3U
O.C086 O.C3*
C.0131 0.0**
C.2*2* 0.82*
5.223* 17.7**
0.2311 0.78?
O.OOCt. O.OC*
0.1*7C 0.50*
0.0322 0.11*
0.7*65 2.53*
O.OC 81 0.03*
C.005* 0.02*
O.OC** 0.02*
C.0031 0.01*
0.0031 D.CU
0.0*37 0.15*
0.037S 0.13*
O.OC 90 O.C3j^>
0.01W6 _>>***"^
C . 01^^"*^
l^^
**^
RECEPT3K » <,3
0.0113 C.O**
C.C9C1 0.33-";
C.C086' 0.73*
C.C13C 0.?5*
0.2*10 C.37*
5. 19*7 18. 80*
0.2298 0.83*
O.OCC6 0.00%
0.1*62 C.53*
C.C320 . C.12*
0.7*2* 2.69*
C.CC80 0.03*
C.CC53 0.02*
O.CC** O.C2*
O.CC31 C.01*
0.0031 0.01*
C .0*35 \\ 1 ( r -
L^*---"^
vf*^^
,
"FCFPTDO » 33
0.0111 C.05*
0.0886 0.38*
0^008* C.O**
0.0123 0.05*
0.2370 1.02*
1.1076 21.96t
0.2259 C.97*
0.0006 O.CG*
0.1*37 C.62*
C.0315 r.l**
C.7300 3.1**
O.OP79 0.03*
C.0053 0.02«
0.00*3 0.02*
0.0030 C.01*
0.0030 O.C1*
II.J8*
^^^*--»
-------
TABLE 7.3-2
PUNCHED CARD FORMAT FOR OUTPUT
CONCENTRATION DATA DECK
Column Description
1-8 Location X (km)
9-16 Location Y (km)
2
17-23 ' S0« Concentration (10 micrograms/
cuoic meter
24-29 Particulate Concentration (102
micrograms/cubic meter)
-------
7.4 SOURCE CONTRIBUTION
-------
7.4 SOURCE CONTRIBUTION FILE MERGE PROGRAM
7.A.1 Description
The function of this program is to merge the Source Contribution
Files (Sub-region Files), produced by multiple Air Pollutant Concentration
Program runs, into a single file for use by the Regional Strategies Program.
No printed output is associated with this program. The contents of the
Source Contribution File are shown in Table 7.4-1.
7.4.2 JCL and Deck Setup
Figure 7.4-1 illustrates the JCL inputs for the following situa-
tion:
(a) Four Source Contribution Files to be merged.
(b) All files are on magnetic tape.
(c) Source Contribution File Merge Program is stored on
magnetic tape.
The file, as defined by the specifications in Figure 7.4-1, has a 52 byte
record size which is variable blocked and a block size of 1044 bytes with
20 records/block. The user should note that a file may utilize several
magnetic tapes; thus the merged file may not be on a single tape. For
regions with less than 150,000 source receptor combinations, however, the
merged file, if blocked properly, may be contained on a single tape.
7.4.3 Input
The program merges two files at a time; therefore, for more than two
Source Contribution files, multiple job steps must be run. Figure 7.4-2
illustrates the merge flow for four input files going from tape to tape.
As the files are merged, the receptor numbers of the second, third,,etc.,
files will be changed to produce a continuous receptor numbering system on
the output file. Since the receptor numbering system may be required by
the user (for statistical output selection in the Regional Strategies
Program), the file merge order should be noted for future reference. Then,
if needed, the numbering system on the merged file can be determined by
the user.
-------
TABLE 7.4-1
SOURCE CONTRIBUTION FILE
First Record Words
Number of Receptors 1
Number of Sources 1
Date of Run 5
Background Concentration, SO 1
Background Concentration Particulate 1
Y-intercept, SO Calibration 1
Y-intercept, .Particulate Calibration 1
Slope, SO Calibration 1
Slope, Particulate Calibration 1
13
Receptor Records
X Coordinate 1
Y Coordinate 1
Receptor Number 1
Source Records
SIC Number 1
Site and Process Number 1
Political Jurisdiction 1
Source Contribution SO- 1
Source Contribution Particulate 1
-------
FIRST MERGE STEP:
// EXEC PGM=TRWTAPE1
//STEPLIB DD DSN=USER.LINKLIB,DISP=SHR
//GO.FT06F001 DD SYSOUT=A
FIRST INPUT TAPE(S) (11) DATA SET:
//GO.FT11FC01 DD UNIT=2400,DSN=CINCYl,DISP=(OLD,PASS),
// DCB=(BLKSIZE=524,LRECL=52,RECFM=VBS,BUFNO=1),LABEL=(.NL.,IN),
// VOL=SER=(0005)
SECOND INPUT TAPE(S) (12) DATA SET:
//GO.FT12F001 DD UNIT=2400,DSN=CINCY2, DISP=(OLD,PASS>,
// DCB=(BLKSIZE=524,LRECL=52,RECFM=VBS,BUFNO=1),LABEL=(.NL.,IN),
// VOL=SER=(0674)
FIRST OUTPUT TAPE(S) (01) DATA SET:
//GO,FT13F001 DD UNIT=2400,DSN=TRWMC-01,DISP=(NEW,PASS),
// DCB=(BLKSIZE=524,LRECL=52,RECFM=VBS,BUFNO=1),
// LABEL=(,SL,,OUT)
SECOND MERGE STEP:
// EXEC PGM=TRWTAPE1
//STEPLIB DD DSN=USER.LINKLIB,DISP=SHR
//GO.FT06F001 DD SYSOUT=A
FIRST OUTPUT TAPE(S) (01) AS INPUT DATA SET:
//GO.FT11F001 DD UNIT=2400,DSN-TRWMC-01,DISP=(OLD,PASS),
// LABEL=(,SL,,IN)
THIRD INPUT TAPE(S) (13) DATA SET:
//GO.FT12FC01 DD UNIT=2400,DSN=CINCY3,DISP=(OLD,PASS),
// DCB=(BLKSIZE=1924,LRECL=192,RECFM=VBS,BUFNO=1),LABEL=(.NL.,
// VOL=SER=(0936)
SECOND OUTPUT TAPE(S) (02) DATA SET:
//GO.FT13F001 DD UNIT=2400,DSN=TRWMC-02,DISP=(NEW,PASS),
// DCB=(BLKSIZE=524,LRECL=52,RECFM=VBS,BUFNO=1),
// LABEL=(J1SL,,OUT)
Figure 7.4-1. Example JCL Card Setup for the Source Contribution
File Merge Program.
-------
FINAL MERGE STEP:
// EXEC PGM=TRWTAPE1
//STEPLIB DD DSN=USER.LINKLIB,DISP=SHR
//GO.FT06F001 DD SYSOUT=A
SECOND OUTPUT TAPE(S) (02) AS INPUT DATA SET:
//GO.FT11F001 DD UNIT=2400,DSN=TRWMC-02,DISP=(OLD,PASS),
// LABEL=(,SL,,IN)
FOURTH INPUT TAPE(S) (14) DATA SET:
//GO.FT12F001 DD UNIT=2400,.DSN=CINCY4,DISP=(OLD,PASS) ,
// DCB=(BLKSIZE=524,LRECL=52,RECFM=VBS,BUFNO=1),LABEL=(,NL,,
// VOL=SER=(1556)
FINAL OUTPUT TAPE(S) DATA SET:
//GO.FT13F001 DD UNIT=2400,DSN=TRWSCCIN,DISP=(NEW,KEEP),
// DCB=(RECFM=VBS,BLKSIZE=524,LRECL=52,BUFNO=1),
// LABEL=(,SL,,OUT)
Figure 7.4-1. Example JCL Card Setup for the Source Contribution
File Merge Program. (Continued)
-------
JOB STEP 3
Figure 7.4-2.
SOURCE^
CONTRI-
BUTION
FILE
^-
Example Job Step Sequence for the Source Contribu-
tion File Merge Program.
-------
7.4.4 Output
A single Source Contribution File comprises the output from this
program. There are no file list or error message function available.
However, if a given input file is unreadable, a systems error will be
produced.
-------
-------
7.5 CONTROL COST PROGRAM
The Control Cost Program utilizes point source data from the Source
File and user created punched card input. The Source File data elements
are listed in Table 7.2-2. The punched card input is described in this
section.
7.5.1 Description
The function of the program is to produce cost data and new source
characteristics resulting ftom application of various control devices to
each point source defined in the region. Figure 7.5-1 illustrates the
fundamental sequence of operations. For each point source, the program
will determine the applicability of each control device defined within
the program,, The applicable devices are applied, producing new source
characteristics and device related cost data. In this way a file (Control
Cost File) and printed o.utput are created, containing the desired data.
Detailed descriptions of the data manipulations for this program are given
in Chapter 5.
7.5.2 JCL and Deck Setup
An example deck setup configuration is illustrated in Figure 7.5-2.
Figure 7.5-3 contains the specific JCL cards, corresponding to Figure 7.5-2,
which were used for the installation test case setup. The test setup
assumed the following:
(a) Control Cost program in object deck form
(b) Program Overlay Structure is Used (see Volume II,
Section 3.4)
(c) Source Data File is on disk.
Deviations from this configuration require appropriate JCL card changes.
7.5.3 Input
The punched card input variables used to construct the Data Set are
given in Table 7.5-1. An example data form is shown in Figure 7.5-4.
Three types of inputs must be considered: Regional Data, Control Device
Data, and Device Applicability Data.
(a) Regional Data - must be input for each run
(b) Control Device Data - pre-set in the program but may
be changed by input. There are 50 device numbers
defined in the program. The particular devices for
which data has been pre-set are shown in Table 7.5-2.
-------
REGION DATA
REVISED DEVICE DATA
ADDITIONAL DEVICE
APPLICATION DATA
PRINT
INPUT
DATA
READ
IN
SOURCE
DATA
SOURCE
FILE
APPLY APPLICABLE
DEVICE TO
SOURCE
PRINT
CALCULATED
DATA
CONTROL
COST
FILE
ALL
DEVICES
APPLIED?
ALL
SOURCES
APPLIED?
Figure 7.5-1. Control Cost Program Flow.
-------
END CARD
INPUT DATA SET
JCL CARDS FOR DATA
SET DEFINITION
END CARD
o PROGRAM OBJECT DECK
o OVERLAY CARDS
JCL CARDS FOR
v Y"LOAD & EXECUTE
Figure 7.5-2.
Example Deck Configuration for
the Control Cost Program.
-------
COST MODEL EXECUTION
I
(^
o
LOAD AND
EXECUTE
PROGRAM
OBJECT DECK
AND OVERLAY <
CARDS.
END CARD.
DATA SET
DEFINITION
DATA SET
ENL CARD
//COST EXEC FO*TGLG. P AP M. LKcC* < OVLY , LET, XRtF, LIST )
//LKEO.SYS IN DO *
C'HJcCT OECK
1VERLAY A
INSERT MSOUR
OVERLAY A
INSERT OEVAPL ,«C:;VAK
OVERLAY A
INSERT HOEVP
3VERLAY A
INSERT WEGR
OVERLAY A
INSERT EXDEVC
/*
//GO.FT12FC01 DO DSN=NEwSORCE i UNI T=2 3 1* , VOL =SF 5=
// OISP=(OLD,KEEPI ,
//GO.FTl'.FOOl 00 DSN
-------
TABLE 7.5-1
PUNCHED CARD INPUT FOR CONTROL COST PROGRAM
Data Type Description
MF Date Card, completed as follows:
Column Card Data Format
1-20 Run Date Left Justified
21 Device flag; set to 1 if
NAMELIST device data is
present
22 Device applicability flag;
set to 1 if NAMELIST device
applicability data is present
MN ®REC - a NAMELIST variable indicating
start of NAMELIST inputs for the regional
cost and fuel data. No equal sign or
values are associated with this variable.
MNA RNAM - descriptive name of the region. Up
to 20 characters may be used (preceded by
an apostrophe and followed by an apostrophe
and comma).
MNI IREGR - number of the region for which this
set of data is being input (must correspond
with the Region Number used in the Source
File).
MNP RATE - interest rate applicable to the
region (percent).
MNP XLHR - labor cost for the region ($/hour).
MNP ELCS - electricity costs ($/kw hour). Input
in the order of: cost to industrial plants,
cost to power plants, and cost to commercial
plants.
MNP FLIQS - water cost ($/gallon).
MNP AFC0ST(1.1.1) - regional cost for coal
($/ton). Input in the order: cost of grade
1 to industrial plants, cost of grade 1 to
power plants, cost of grade 1 to commercial
plants, cost of grade 2 to industrial plants,
, cost of grade 5 to commercial plants.
-------
TABLE 7.5-1
PUNCHED CARD INPUT FOR CONTROL COST PROGRAM (Continued)
Data Type Description
MNP AFC0ST(1,1,2) - regional cost for residual
oil ($/gallon). Input in the order: cost
of grade 1 to industrial plants, cost of
grade 1 to power plants, cost of grade 1 to
commercial plants, cost of grade 2 to
industrial plants, , cost of grade 5
to commercial plants.
MNP . AFC0ST(1,1,3) - regional cost for distil-
late oil ($/gallon). Input in the order:
cost of grade 1 to industrial plants, cost
of grade 1 to power plants, cost of grade 1
to commercial plants, cost of grade 2 to
industrial plants, , cost of grade 3
to commercial plants.
MNP AFC0ST(1.1,4) - regional cost for gas
($/cubic foot). Input in the order: cost
to industrial plants, cost to power plants,
cost to commercial plants.
MNP AFSCC - lower and upper limits (percent) of
sulfur content for each grade of coal. Input
in the order: grade 1 lower limit, grade 1
upper limit, grade 2 lower limit, grade 2
upper limit, , grade 5 upper limit.*
MNP AFSCR - lower and upper limits (percent) of
sulfur content for each grade of residual
oil. Input in the order: grade 1 lower
limit, grade 1 upper limit, grade 2 lower
limit, grade 2 upper limit, , grade 5
upper limit.
MNP AFSCD - lower and upper limits (percent)
of sulfur content for each grade of distil-
late oil. Input in the order: grade 1 lower
limit, grade 1 upper limit, grade 2 lower
limit, grade 2 upper limit, grade 3 lower
limit, grade 3 upper limit.
* For each fuel grade, the sulfur content range includes all values greater
than the lower limit and less than or equal to the upper limit.
-------
TABLE 7.5-1
PUNCHED CARD INPUT FOR CONTROL COST PROGRAM (Continued)
Data Type Description
MNP AFSCG - gas sulfur content (percent).
MNP AFHC(1,1) - Heat content for fuel grade 1.
Input in the order: coal (BTU/ton) residual
. oil (BTU/gal), distillate oil (BTU/gal), gas
(BTU/cubic foot).
MNP AFHC(1.2) - Heat content,for fuel grade 2.
Input in the order: coal, residual oil,
distillate oil.
MNP AFHC(1,3) - Heat input for fuel grade 3.
Input in the order: coal, residual oil,
distillate oil.
MNP AFHC(1,4) - Heat input for fuel grade 4.
Input in the order: coal, residual oil.
MNP AFHC(1,5) - Heat input for fuel grade 5.
Input in the order: coal, residual oil.
MNP SLIM - maximum allowable sulfur content
(percent) for devices 030, 031 and 032.
Input in the order: device 030 coal sulfur
limit, device 030 residual oil sulfur limit,
device 030 distillate oil sulfur content,
device 031 coal sulfur limit, device 031
residual oil sulfur content, , device
032 distillate oil sulfur content.
MNP AFAC - Coal ash content (percent) for each
grade. Input in the order: grade 1, grade
2, grade 3, grade 4, and grade 5.
MNP &END - this variable indicates the end of a
list of NAMELIST inputs.
ON* &DEVREC - a NAMELIST input variable indicat-
ing the start of NAMELIST inputs for the
device inputs.
*If device data is input (Device Flag =1) this card and the &END card
are mandatory.
-------
TABLE 7.5-1
PUNCHED CARD INPUT FOR CONTROL COST PROGRAM (Continued)
Data Type Description
For the following device data variables (up to the next &END card), I
must be set equal to the device number (1 through 50) for which the
input applies. Each such variable may be repeated as input for as
many different device numbers as desired.
ONI DEVNAM (1,1) - descriptive name for device
I. Up to 24 characters may be used (pre-
ceded by an apostrophe and followed by an
apostrophe and comma). All 24 characters
must be contained on one card.
ONP XMP1(I) - manufacturers price coefficient
number 1 for device I.
ONP XMP2(I) - manufacturers price coefficient
number 2 for device I.
ONP XMP3(I) - manufacturers price coefficient
number 3 for device I.
ONP CINCST(I) - installation cost factor
(percent), for device I.
ONP FLF(I) - device life (years) for device I.
ONP PRDR0 - pressure drop (inches HO) for
device I.
ONP QLAB(l.I) - labor quantity (hours),
associated with device I, for various
plant sizes. Input is in the order: labor
quantity for small plant, labor quantity
for medium plant, labor quantity for large
plant, labor quantity for extra large plant.
ONP CATS(I) - chemical cost ($/ton) for device
I.
ONP DC0C(1.1) - disposal cost or credit ($/ton),
associated with device I, for each pollutant.
Input in the order: S0_ cost or credit, par-
ticulate matter cost or credit.
ONP DFUELF(I) - device fuel factor for device I.
ONP REFFS0(I) - rated efficiency (percent) for
S0~ removal, device I.
ONP REFFPT(I) - rated efficiency (percent) for
particulate removal, device I.
-------
TABLE 7.5-1
PUNCHED CARD INPUT FOR CONTROL COST PROGRAM (Continued)
Data Type Description
ON &END - a NAMELIST variable indicating the
end of the NAMELIST data.
ON &DEVAPP - a NAMELIST variable indicating
the start of NAMELIST inputs for additions
to the device applicability list. No equal
sign or values are associated with this
variable.
The following' three device applicability variables must be input
for each additional SIC-Process code input. In each case I must
equal the number of the input (i.e., 1=1 for first additional
code, 1=2 for second additional, , 1=5 for fifth additional
code). A maximum of five additional codes may be input. The
input data must be ordered such that the I value used in each set
is in ascending order.
ONI ISIN(I) - SIC number for addition I.
ONI IPRN(I) - Process code for addition I.
ONI I0RN(1,I) - array indicating device appli-
cation for addition I. An applicability
indicator must be input for each of the
50 possible control devices. Input 1 if
device applies, 0 if device does not apply.
ON &END - this NAMELIST variable indicates
the end of the NAMELIST data.
-------
DATE
NAM
II /it/70
t c(ftT wiMtr
fc
R<
':&
J
PROBLEM NO. ^°7
NO. OF CARD* 2-<
H
mm
7
»
x
A
A
A
A
A
4>
^
C
C
C
M
C
P
y
fy
N
D
5
R
*
S
s
s
s
C
D
fr
v
m
.
A
f
f
E
=
T
r
r
r
j
«
1
/
^
R
C
3
'
r
X
2.
2.
I
r
7
7
p
j
.
^
i
3
0
0
0
o
1
7
7
7
if
t
9
I
^
I
0
1
1
t
1
,
.
t
0
Q
}
^
3
R
0
1
1
l
1
3
J
1
O
o
0
0
0
0
\
t
m
m*
)
,
1
1
a
k
/
1
1
E
£
^
e
E
1
7
I
f
0
0
*
1
M
^
)
^
0
0
O
t
6
(,
t
1
^«
?N
1
»
A
s
e
^"
0
«-
4(
r
7
7
|
0
0
L-
5
t
t
1
I
.
S
C
5
.
0
0
I
9
5"
f
f
f
5-
f
7
f
p*
E
>
f
y
a
0
0
o
2
1
1
j.
2.
,
A
1
p
i/
p
t
f
0
>
.
.
,
o
0
M
,
.
T
.
-x
7
7
<
o
o
0
o
o
-
(
u<
1
R
s
1
1
P
o
A
,
1
E
E
e
£
£
7
}
1
-»1
p^
L
P
1
1
0
3
3
3
^
3
s
u*
e
o
7
t,
o
P
o
o
C
L
1
7
O
3
7
,
£
.#
*
I
C
J-
I
1
1
1
$
l»*
T
i
1
3
3
,7
f
7
o
Q
0
1
*
3
0
I
0
^
1
1
,
1
tf*
pp^
0
.
,
(7
O
0
0
u
80 COLUMN
i
0
7
6
3
3
7
O
0
O
.
0
y
^
T
i
^
g
E
E
0
O
0
0
0
R
6
t
|
I
2
3
3
3
.
,
^
1^*
E
,
-
,
.
i
i
^~
l^
&.
*
7
.
»^
,
.
0
0
0
^
o
1
S"
2
u*
1
T
9
1
3
J
X
i
1
0
(0
^
U^
F
O
4
6
1
^
L
1
7
1
I
1
L-J
a
6
S
*
I
S
\t^
J
o
f
o
0
9
,
^
O
.
o
J"
!**
0
»*
s
1
[**
1
1
0
.
^
PMIORIT
KEYPUN'
VCMIFIEf
o
^
J
B
6
6
O
M
i-
*
O
mm
1
mmi
PAGE J_OF_L
tf
CHED
> BV
4
,
y
O
^
(
B
S
v
*-
-------
TABLE 7.5-2
CONTROL DEVICE PRESET DATA
Rated
Efficiency
ID
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
27
28
29
30
31
32
39
41
42
43
44
45
Device Name
WET SCRUBBER HI EFFIC
WET SCRUBBER MED EFFIC
WET SCRUBBER LOW EFFIC
GRAV COLLECTOR HI EFFIC
GRAV COLLECTOR MED EFFIC
GRAV COLLECTOR LOW EFFIC
CYCLONE HI EFFIC
CYCLONE MED EFFIC
CYCLONE LOW EFFIC
ELECT PRECIP HI EFFIC
ELECT PRECIP MED EFFIC
ELECT PRECIP LOW EFFIC
GAS SCRUBBER
MIST ELIMINATOR HI VEL
MIST ELIMINATOR LOW VEL
FABRIC FILTER HI TEMP
FABRIC FILTER MED TEMP
FABRIC FILTER LOW TEMP
CATALYTIC AFTERBURNER
CATALYTIC AB WITH HE
DIRECT FLAME AFTERBURNER
DIRECT FLAME AB WITH HE
ELIMINATE COAL
ELIMINATE COAL AND R OIL
SWITCH TO GAS
SULFUR LIMITATION 1
SULFUR LIMITATION 2
SULFUR LIMITATION 3
CATALYTIC OXIDATION
DRY LIMESTONE INJECTION
WET LIMESTONE INJECTION
H2504 PLANT-CONTACT
H2504 PLANT-2 CONTACT
SULFUR PLANT
SO,
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
80.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
90.0
50.0
80.0
97.5
99.5
95.0
Part
98.0
90.0
80.0
60.0
40.0
30.0
85.0
75.0
60.0
99.0
95.0
90.0
80.0
99.0
85.0
99.0
99.0
99.0
95.0
95.0
95.0
95.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
98.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
Manufacturers Price Coefficient
1
0.289E 01
0.289E 01
0.126F 01
-0.445E 00
-0.420E-01
0.300E-02
0.241E 01
0.151E 01
0.244E 00
0.424E 02
0.312E 02
0.197E 02
0.317E 01
0.266E 01
0.177E 01
0.145E 01
0.348E 01
0.266E 01
0.755E 01
0.755E 01
0.571E 01
0.571E 01
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
-0.124E 02
0.0
0.111E-05
0.0
0.0
0.0
2
0.228E 00
0.228E 00
0.145E 00
0.326E 00
0.155E 00
0.560E-01
0.197E 00
0.157E 00
0.990E-01
0.623E 00
0.441E 00
0.318E 00
0.251E 00
0.325E 00
0.217E 00
0.831E 00
0.448E 00
0.325E 00
0.151E 01
0.151E 01
0.117E 01
0.117E 01
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.167E 01
0.995E-06
0.481E-16
0.800E 00
0.800E 00
0.810E 00
3
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
-0.603E-16
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
.-1
-4 M
n) 0
4J *J
CO U
c a
M b
2.00
2.00
2.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
2.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
2.00
1.00
2.00
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
a
u
6 *-
Q) CO
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0,0
0.0
0.0
10.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
2.0
2.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
Disposal
Cost
SO
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
-27.6
0.0
0.0
-27.6
-27.6
-15.0
Part
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
0.0
0.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0 .
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
Labor Quantity
SML
0.50
0.38
0.38
0.25
0.25
0.25
0.25
0.25
0.25
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.38
0.25
0.25
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.25
0.25
0.13
0.13
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
MED
1.00
0.75
0.75
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.50
0-. 50
1.50
1.50
1.50
0.75
0.50
0.50
1.25
1.25
1.25
0.50
0.50
0.25
0.25
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
LGE
2.00
1.50
1.50
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
3.00
3.00
3.00
1.50
1.00
1.00
2.50
2.50
2.50
1.00
1.00
0.50
0.50
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
X-LG
4.00
3.00
3.00
2.00
2.00
2.00
2.00
2.00
2.00
6.00
6.00
6.00
3.00
2.00
2.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
2.00
2.00
1.00
1.00
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
01
CJ
H a
>>M
S3
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
0
0
0
0
0
0
15
15
15
20
20
20
sure
a a.
-------
Only the devices shown in this table may be changed.
The remaining device numbers are for program expan-
sion and require a program modification.
(c) Device Applicability Data - up to 5 new SIC-process
codes may be added to the program to account for
those new SIC-process codes in the Source File but
not shown in Tables 5-2 and 5-3. For each new code
input, the applicability (i.e., yes or no) of each
of the numbered devices (all 50) must be input. Note,
however, that only those device numbers included in
Table 7.5-2 may be indicated as applicable.
The procedure required for application of the devices not shown in
Table 7.5-2 is as follows:
(a) Add control device data through NAMELIST inputs
described in this section.
(b) Make program change to device applicability table
'(represented by Table 5-2) and the program assign-
ment procedure to allow new devices to be assigned
to appropriate SIC-process codes.
7.5.4 Output
Output from the Control Cost Program consists of printed and stored
(magnetic tape) data. The stored data is defined as the Control Cost File
and is used by the Emission Standards Program. The contents of this file
are described in Section 7.6.
The printed data consists of the following items:
Header Data (Figure 7.5-5)
The header data contains the program name, the input region number
and description. The input run date, and the update from the Source File
(or create data if no file update was performed).
Regional Data (Figure 7.5-5)
This output displays the input regional cost data, alternate fuel
data, and maximum allowable sulfur content to be applied as devices 030,
031 and 032. The percent sulfur content range for each grade of fuel
includes all values greater than the minimum value and less than or equal
to the maximum value. The Heat Content and Fuel Content units are tons
of coal, gallons of oil and cubic feet of gas.
-------
CCNTROL COST PROGRAM REGION: 907 CENTRAL CITY
RUN DATE NOVEMBER 13, 1970 SOURCE DATE NDVEMBEP 12, 1970
REGION: CENTKAL cm REGIONAL DATA
DATE: NOVEMBER 13, 1970
LABOR COST IS/HR) = 3.00 taATER COST (S/GAL) = 0.2E-03 INTEREST *AT (») = 8.5
ELEC COST P* PLNT («/KrfH) = r.!60E-01 ELEC COST INDUST J«/K«H) = C.160E-C1 ELEC C?ST C3MM l*/KWHI
C.180E-01
«j
vo
EULL
COAL
RESID OIL
DIST OIL
GAS
fSULF CONT
FUEL DATA TABLE
HEAT CONT XASH
FUEL COST (S/U«4IT)
EHB.CLUI -lliCUSI- ._CQaa._
1
2
3
A
5
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
0.7
1.3
1.7
2.3
5.0
0.7
1 .3
1.7
2.3
5.0
0.4
0.7
2.0
0.3
0.7
1.3
1.7
2.3
0.3
0.7
1.3
1.7
2.3
0. 1
0.4
0.7
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
c.
290E
270E
270E
27CE
260E
152E
152E
152E
152E
152E
13-9E
139E
13-»E
08
08
08
C8
C8
06
C6
06
06
06
06
06
06
7.0
7.0
7.0
7.0
7.0
0.
0.
C.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
c.
0.
c.
c.
0.
acE ci
64 E 01
62E Cl
60E Cl
45E 01
61E-01
57E-C1
56E-C1
55E-CI
54E-01
12E CO
10E 00
94E-01
0.12E 02
0.10E 02
0.95E 01
0.9CE 01
C.80E 01
0.746-01
0.69E-01
D.68E-01
0.67E-C1
0.65E-01
0.12E CO
0.10E CO
0.95E-01
0
0
C
0
0
0
c
0
0
0
0
0
c
.13E 02
.HE 02
.10E 02'
.95E Cl
.85E 01
.76E-01
.71E-01
.70E-C1
.69E-01
.67E-01
.18E 00
.16E CO
.16E 00
0.0
0.100E 04
0.44E-C3 0.55E-03 0.66E-03
MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE SULFUR CONTENT (X)
DEVICE NO
-ja_ _il_ -3.2-
COAL
RESID OIL
DIST OIL
2.C 1.0 C.5
1.5 1.0 C.5
l.C 0.5 0.3
-------
Device Data (Figure 7.5-6)
This data consists of the pre-set device data (Table 7.5-2) as
altered by the input device data.
Device Application Criteria for New Source Types (Figure 7.5-7)
This output displays the user input SIC-Process codes and their
device application criteria.
Control Cost Data (Figure 7.5-8)
This output contains the program generated data and the data being
passed from the Source File to Emission Standards Program. The "Source
ID" line contains the following data, as obtained from the Source File:
Source Identification - SIC, Site, and Process codes.
Source Type - B (fuel combustion), P (industrial process),
or S (solid waste).
Political Jurisdiction
Existing SO- Emission Rate (ton/day)
Existing Particulate Emission Rate (ton/day)
Existing Device Efficiency for SO- (percent)
Existing Device Efficiency for Particulates (percent)
Boiler Rated Capacity (BTU/hour)
Maximum Process Rate (pounds/hour)
Shifts
Heat Content of Existing Coal (BTU/ton)
Heat Content of Existing Residual Oil (BTU/gallon)
Heat Content of Existing Distillate Oil (BTU/gallon)
Heat Content of Existing Gas (BTU/cubic foot)
Use Factor
Normalized Plume Rise (square feet/second)
The "DEV" line is repeated for each device applied to the source
described on the Source ID line. A device identification (DEV column) of
"0" indicates that no new device was applied; therefore, the DEV = 0 line
contains the existing conditions: Stack Temperature, Exhaust Gas Volume,
and Fuel Utilized. The last column in the DEV line indicates the use of
gas cooling (1 = yes, 0 = no).
-------
REGION: CENTRAL CITY
DEVICE DATA
DATE: NOVEMBER 13, 1970
-1C
1 MET SCRUBBER HI EFF 1C
2 MET SCRUBBER MED EFFIC
3 MET SCRUBBER LO EFFIC
4 GRAV COLLECTOR HI EFFIC
5 GRAV COLLECTOR MED EFFIC
6 GRAV COLLECTOR LO EFFIC
T CYCLONE t+t EFFIC
8 CYCLONE MED EFFIC
9 CYCLONE LO EFFIC
1C ELECT PRECIP HI EFFIC
11 ELECT PRECIP MED EFFIC
12 ELECT PRECIP L3 EFFIC
13 GAS SCRUBBER
14 MIST ELIMINATOR HI VEL
15 MIST ELMINATOP LO VEL
16 FABRIC FILTER HI TEMP
17 FABRIC FILTER MEO TEMP
18 FABRIC FILTER LO TEMP
19 CATALYTIC AFTERBURNER
20 CATALYTIC AS hITH HE
21 DIRECT FLAME AFTERBURNER
22 DIRECT FLAME AS WITH HE
27 ELIMINATE COAL
28 ELIMINATE COAL AND R OIL
29 ShITCH TO GAS
30 SULFUR LIMITATION 1
31 SULFUR LIMITATION 2
32 SULFUR LIMITATION 3
39 CATALYTIC OXYDATION
40 ALKALIZED ALUMINA
41 DRY LIMESTONE INJECTION
42 MET LIMESTONE INJECTION
43 H25JC4 PLANT-CONTACT
44 H2f04 PLANT-2 CONTACT
45 SULFUR PLANT
RATED EFF
SQ2 P ART
0.0 98.0
0.0 90. C
O.C 80. 0
0.0 60. C
0.0 40.0
C.O 30.0
C.O 85. C
C.O 75.0
O.C 60. C
C.O 99.0
C.O 95.0
0.0 90. C
80. C 80.0
C.C 99.0
C.O 85.0
O.C 99. C
C.C 99. C
C.O 99. C
C.O 95. C
C.C 95.0
C.O 95. C
O.C 95. C
C.C 0.0
C.O 0.0
C.O 0.0
C.O 0.0
C.O 0.0
O.C 0.0
9C.C 0.0
80.0 0.0
5C.O 0.0
8C.O 98.0
97.5 O.C
99.5 0.0
95.0 O.C
MANUFACTURERS PRICE
1
0.289E 01
0.289E 01
C.126E 01
-C.445= 00
-0.420t-01
0.300E-02
C.241E 01
0. 151E Cl
0.244E 00
0.424E 02
0.3125 02
0.197E 02
C.317E 01
0.266E 01
C. 177E 01
C. 145E Cl
0.348E 01
0.266E 01
0.755E 01
0. 755E 01
0.571>E 01
C.571E 01
C.O
C.C
o.r
0.0
C.C
C.C
-0.124E 02
0.0
0.0
C. H1E-05
0.0
C.O
O.C
i
C.228E 00
C.228E 00
0.145E 00
C.326E 00
C.155E CO
C.560E-01
C.197E 00
C.157E 00
C.990E-01
0.623E 00
C.441E 00
C. 318E 00
C.251E 00
0.325E 00
0.217E 00
0.83BE 00
0.448E 00
0.325E 00
C.151E 01
C.151E 01
0.117E 01
C.117E 01
C.O
O.C
0.0
C.O
C.O
C.O
0.167E 01
C.216E-35
0.995E-06
0.481E-16
C.800E 00
0.800E CO
C.810E 00
COEFF
3
0.0
O.C
O.C
O.C
O.C
C.C
O.C
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
O.C
0.0
O.C
0.0
O.C
O.C
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
O.C
0.0
0.260E-16
-0.603E-16
O.C
O.C
O.C
O.C
INST CHEM DISP COST LABOR OUANT I TY DEV PRS FUEl
E&C.I CQ&I __M2 _e*ai sat. BEQ- USE_ i=ufi LEE Q&E EACI
2.CC O.C 0.0 .0 C.50 1.00 2.00 4.0C 15 2C 3.0
2. CO C.C O.C .C C.38 0.75 .50 3.0C 15 4 O.C
2.CC O.C C.O .C 0.38 0.75 .50 3.0C 15 3 C.O
l.CC O.C C.O .0 0.25 0.50 .OC 2.CC 15 0 C.C
l.CC O.C 0.0 .0 C.25 0.50 .00 2.00 15 0 C.O
l.CO O.C C.C .0 C.25 C.50 .00 2.0C 15 0 3.0
l.CO C.C O.C .0 0.25 0.50 .00 2.CC 15 4 C.O
l.CO C.C O.C .C 0.25 0.50 .CO 2.00 15 3 C.C
l.CO O.C O.C .0 C.25 0.50 .00 2.00 15 2 C.?
1.00 O.C 0.0 .0 C.50 1.50 .OC 6. CO 15 0 3.C
l.CC O.C 0.0 .0 C.50 U50 .00 6.00 15 0 3.0
l.CO O.C C.O .0 0.50 1.50 .OC 6. OP 15 0 C.O
2. CO IC.C C.O .0 C.38 0.75 .50 3.0C 15 5 3.0
l.CO O.C C.O .0 0.25 0.53 .CC 2.00 15 1C 3.0
l.CO C.O 0.0 .0 C.25 0.50 .00 2.CC 15 5 C.O
1.00 O.C 0.0 .0 0.50 1.25 2.50 5. CO 15 5 0.0
l.CC C.C O.C .0 0.50 1.25 2.50 5.00 15 5 0.0
1.00 O.C 0.0 .0 0.50 1.25 2.50 5.00 15 5 3.0
l.CC O.C 0.0 0.0 C.25 0.50 l.OC 2.0C 15 I 3.49
2. CO O.C 0.0 0.0 0.25 0.50 1.00 2.00 15 I 3.24
l.CC C.C 0.0 C.O 0.13 0.25 0.5C 1.00 15 1 1.00
2. CO C.C 0.0 O.C 0.13 0.25 C.50 1.00 15 1 C.40
O.C O.C 0.0 0.0 C.O 0.0 0.0 C.C 0 0 0.0
C.C C.C 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 C.O 0 0 0.0
o.r c.c o.o o.o o.o o.o o.c c.o o o c.o
C.O 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0 0 0.0
C.C O.C 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0 0 P.O
0.0 C.C O.C C.C 0.0 0.0 0.0 C.O 0 C C.C
C.C 0.0 -27.6 C.C 0.0 0.0 C.O C.O 15 41 3.0
C.C C.C C.C 0.0 C.O 0.0 0.0 C.O 15 0 3.0
C.C 2.C O.C O.C C.O 0.0 0.0 0.0 15 0 0.0
O.C 2.C 0.0 C.C. 0.0 0.0 C.O C.O 15 0 C.O
O.C O.C -27.6 0.0 0.3 0.0 0.0 0.0 20 0 C.O
C.O 0.0 -27.6 C.C 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 20 0 C.O
C.C 0.0 -15.0 O.C C.O 0.0 C.C O.C 20 C 0.0
-------
DEVICE APPLICATION CRITERIA FOR NEW SOURCE TYPES
REGION: CENTRAL CITY DATE: NOVEMBER U, 1970
DEVICE IDENTIFICATION NUMBERS
1 2 3 it 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 l
-------
REGION: CEMTKAL c ITY
CONTROL COST DATA
DATE: NOVEMBER 13, 1970
SQUBCE-IQ HE El SQ2.ESSI_ EEIE.3EI- 5flZ££ £EIE£ -_l
211900125 P I 0.0 0.100 O.C C.O &.0
__ MS.EBiJC_£AIE SdEI
0.30E 03 3.0 C.O
0.0
$02 PRT
QEY EEEiJl EEEiiL
C 0.0 0.0
1 C.O 9S.O
2 0.0 90.0
3 0.0 80.0
STK
EXHAuST
KQLiiC.£Hl IA_CfliIiSi QU_C.aiIiSl
2000 C 0
1762 15*29 1*222
1762 11368 10161
1762 10668 10109
SG2
PRT
E-lQ HE EJ
280004110 8 2
336
298
298
248
I- EEIEBBI.
25.000 *.OCO O.C 62.5 0.57E 09
0
*3l
3*6
365
0.0
R OIL
UILiG/Ql
C
0
C
C
0.0
D OIL
uiuuzei
0
c
c
c
0.0
3.C
0.28E C8
O.C
0_flIL_UEAI
0.0
O.C
^J
U)
QESf
0
7
10
11
12
16
27
28
29
3C
31
32
S02
E5Ei.ll
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
19.*
*8.6
99.9
2C.5
55.1
77.5
PRT
EEEili ]
0.0
52.0
98.*
92.0
8*.0
99.0
96.2
97.3
99.5
-3.7
-3.7
3.*
STK
L3Ei&.
*83
483
483
*83
483
483
*83
*83
483
483
*83
483
EXHAUST SQ2
Laem ^OUACECII n.tQiiiii aa-taaiiii LLLLHU
19*000
193999
193999
193999
193999
193999
193999
193S99
193999
1S3999
0 OIL
0
4*9*8
92082
78620
68071
100377
577965
1596251
11718*0
187366
333095
*97167
0
35162
52759
50*90
*8*70
6087*
577965
1596251
11718*0
187366
3 J3C95
*97167
SQUBCE.1D HE EJ SD2E!JBI_ EB.IEflEI_ iD2E£ ££J££ -_
281903302 P 2 19.100 0.260 O.C 93.7 0.0
QEV.
0
13
1*
S02 PPT STK
EEEili EEEili I3£i&l
0.0 0.0 361
80.C 20.0 3CO
0.0 99.0 361
0.0 85.0 36
_ UECI PLH
i.oo o
GAS
o o
o o
0 0
0 C
U£C_t ELS
1.00 0
GAS
-------
7.6 CONTROL COST
-------
7.6 CONTROL COST FILE UPDATE PROGRAM
7.6.1 Description
The Control Cost File Update Program is a FORTRAN program designed
to alter existing records on the Control Cost File. The program will not
add or delete records from this file.
Input to the program consists of the file to be altered (magnetic
tape or disk) and punched cards describing the data elements within each
record, to be changed.
7.6.2 JCL and Deck Setup
The deck configuration and JCL cards used for the installation test
case are illustrated in Figures 7.6-1 and 7.6-2. This setup assumes use
of the program object deck and a Control Cost File on magnetic tape. If
other configurations are used, modifications to the JCL cards are required.
7.6.3 Input
The construction of the input data set is accomplished through input
of the appropriate NAMELIST punched card data shown in Table 7.6-1. The
variables listed in this table define a complete source-device record.
For each Control Cost File record to be changed, the user must input
data for the following variables:
(a) The first six NAMELIST variables must be input to define
the record being changed.
(b) The new values of the variables to be changed (PRTYPE thru
PLUME) must be input (no special order of the input
variables is required).
(c) The &END variable must be input last to indicate the end
of the NAMELIST data for that record.
This data (items a, b, and c) must be contained on no move than three
punched cards ( a restriction of the program update procedure). The
collection of record changes defines the data set in ascending order by
source identification (ISIC, ISIT, IPR0C), and for each source in ascending
order by device number (IDDEV). The user should note that if extensive
changes (i.e., more data than can be contained on three cards) to a given
record are desired, several update runs will be required. An example data
form with prepared inputs is shown in Figure 7.6-3
-------
END CARD
INPUT DATA SET
(User Ordered)
JCL CARDS FOR DATA
SET DEFINITION
END CARD
o PROGRAM OBJECT DECK
o OVERLAY CARDS
JCL CARDS FOR
<*" LOAD & EXECUTE
Figure 7.6-1.
Example Deck Configuration for the
Control Cost File Update Program.
-------
CJST MODEL UPDATE
LOAD AMI
EXECUTE
PROGRAM DECK
END CARD
DATA SET
DEFINITION
DATA SET
END -CARD
//COST EXEC FOSTGLG
//LKEO.SYSIN DO *
OBJECT DECK
/*
//GO.FT13F001 DO DSN=COSTO,UNIT=2«00,01SP=(OLU.KEEP),
// VOL=SER=C00123,
//
//GO.FTl'.FOCl
II
II
II
//SO.FT^fOCl DO UNIT=SYSOA,SPACE =
-------
TABLE 7.6-1
PUNCHED CARD INPUT FOR THE CONTROL COST
FILE UPDATE PROGRAM
Card Type
NM
Picture*
MNI
MNI
MNI
MNI
MMI
XXX
XXXX
XXX
XX
XX
Description
&STRATM - A NAMELIST variable
indicating the start of NAMELIST
inputs for a given record in the
Control Cost File. No equals sign
or values are associated with this
variable.
IREGR - Region identification code.
ISIC - SIC code.
ISIT - Site number.
IPRC - Process code.
IDDEV - Device number.
The above variables, and &END, are required for each record change. Of
the following variables, only those being changed need be input.
PRTYPE - Process type (B, P, or S).
P0LJUR - Political Jurisdiction.
ONA
ONI
ONP
A
XX
X.XXX
ONP
ONP
ONP
ONP
ONP
X.XXXX
XXXXX.XXX
XXXXX.XXX
XX.X
xxxxxxxx.
DEVEFS - Existing device efficiency for
SO removal (decimal fraction).
DEVEFP - Existing device efficiency
for Particulate removal (decimal
fraction).
EMRATS - Existing SO- emission rate
(tons/day).
EMRATP - Existing Particulate
emission rate (tons/day).
SHIFTS - Number of shifts per day.
PRCRTM - Maximum process rate (Ib/hr).
Indicates the maximum dimension allowed,
-------
Card Type
ONP
ONP
ONP
ONP
ONP
ONP
ONP
ONP
ONP
ONP
ONP
ONP
ONP
ONP
ONP
ONP
TABLE 7.6-1
PUNCHED CARD INPUT FOR THE CONTROL COST
FILE UPDATE PROGRAM (Continued)
Picture* Description
XXXXX.XXX STKHTN - Stack height (meters).
XXX.XXXXX STKDIA - Stack diameter,
(meters).
XXXX.XXXX EXVELN - Stack exit velocity (meters/
second).
XXXXX.XXX TEXN - Stack exit temperature, after
control (degrees Kelvin).
XXXXXXX.XXXXX RATCAP - Rated capacity (BTU/hr).
X.XXX
X.XXXX
XXXXXXXX.
xxxxxxxxxx.
xxxxxxx.xxx
xxxxxxx.xxxx
xxxxxxx.xxx
xxxxxxxxxx.
xxxxxx.
xxxxxxx.
xxxxxxx.
CftNEFS - New device efficiency for
SO (decimal fraction).
C0NEJFP - New device efficiency for
Particulates (decimal fraction).
ACFMN - Exhaust gas vplume after
control (ACFM).
TAG - Total annual cost ($/year).
HEC - Coal heat output, after control
(BTU/year).
HER - Residual oil heat output, after
control (BTU/year).
HEP - Distillate oil heat output,
after control (BTU/year).
HEG - Gas heat output, after control
(BTU/year).
AMC - Coal Burned, after control
(tons/day).
AMR - Residual oil burned, after
control (gal/day).
AMD - Distillate oil burned, after
control (gal/day).
Indicates the maximum dimension allowed.
-------
Card Type
ONP
ONP
ONP
ONI
ONP
MN
TABLE 7.6-1
PUNCHED CARD INPUT FOR THE CONTROL COST
FILE UPDATE PROGRAM (Continued)
Picture* Description
XXXXXXXXX. AMG - Gas burned, after control
"(ft3/day).
XX.XX 0USE - Use factor (decimal fraction).
XXXXXX.XXX AEMIS - Allowable emission rate
(tons/day).
X IGAS - Gas coolirtg flag (l=yes,
0=no).
XXXXX.X PLUME - Normalized plume rise (square
meters/second).
&END - This variable signifies the end
of the list of NAMELIST cards defining
a given record.
Indicates the maximum dimension allowed.
-------
P»T» II/IM//170
,««c0ar PILE
PROBLEM MO. 1°7
NO. OF CARD* _3 .
1
2
£
X
4
I
s
0
£
1
4
T
N
4
*
>
1
*
y
1
T
ft
p.*-1
I
1
BVB1
I
3
p»
>
&
<|t>0*T 80 COLUMN FREE KEYPUNCH FORM PHIORIT
KEY PUNK
VERIFIEI
n
I
»
n
^
p»
u
:
p»
»
V
T
«
n
t
A
IP*
M
a
^
IP»
w
«
1
p*
a
0
I
20
7
y
21
,
O
22
0
f>
11
i
O
U*
24
$
24
I
*
2t
C
U"
2;
e
M
»J
2t
£
JP*"
M
J
P^
11
1
It*
U
1
11
k
*
J4
IP*
Ib
^
p^
II
S
\l*
II
I
1^^
M
t
L^
3)
3
41
P*
IP^
41
O
LP"
42
5
»«
41
^
u*
44
44
P*<
41
r
u»
41
P
41
»,
P*
W
c
H
:
*
tl
U"
SI
1
SI
0
^
M
,
p><
ss
H
-_«
p*^
17
**"
M
P^P*
M
M
P*
11
LP*
12
PP-
M
«P
M
PP1
H
*>
M
w
17
a
M
PP
M
»»
7t
p*
71
PAGE -f_OF _L
BHEO
> BV
7t
pa
71
M
74
V
7f
Lpp
BBBMi
71
BHM
77
LBBM
n
LM
TIN
-«i&M
do
O
-------
7.6.4 Output
After the cost file update operation is completed, the program pro-
duces a NAMELIST dump of the updated file contents as illustrated in
Figure 7.6-4. If the source identification is incorrect or the record
change sets are out of order, the update operation will terminate with
an error message indicating the problem.
-------
NpyEM.BEh 13, 1970..
ESTRATM
IHEGR=907, ISIC=2819,ISIT=C34,IPRC=20,IDDEV*30.T4C=25COO.,
CENO
ro
CSTRATM
t*EGR'
OEVEFS' 0.0
3.0000000
C3NEFS' 0.0
HEO« C.O
1.0000000
CENO
CSTRATM
IREGR'
OEVEFS= 3.0
3.0000300
CONEFS' 0.0
HEO» 0.0
1.0000000
CENO
CSTRATM
IREGR'
OEVEFS' 0.0
3.0000000
CONEFS' 0.0
HEO- C.C
1.0000000
CENO
CSTRATM
IREiR-
DEVEFS- 0.0
3.0000000
CUNEFS' 3.0
HEO' 0.0
l.OCOOOOO
CEND
CSTRATM
IREGR-
DEVEFS- 0.0
3.0000000
CONEFS' 0.0
HED' 0.0
1.0000000
CEND
CSTRATM
IREGR'
DEVEFS' 0.0
3.03000CO
CONEFS- 0.0
HED' 0.0
1.0000000
CENO
907,ISIC= 2119, ISIT' 1,IPRC= 25,IDOEV= 0,PRTYPF=-
.OEVF.FP* O.C ,EMit4TS = C.C ,EM4ATf<= C ,999999645-C 1 , PRC
,ST603199 .EXV^*^
,C3NEFP= 0.82499931 .ACFMN' 194000.QX'^
,HEG' C.O ,AMC= 385.COOOC ^>^
, AEMIS' 0.0 ,IGAS= Qtpr
.^
.^
907.ISIC' 28CO.ISIT' ^^
,JFV£F^= 0.5i99992JxX^
,ST^
.32617 , g'lITi "' '
n *
1 ,
-------
7.7 EMISSION STANDARDS
-------
7.7 EMISSION STANDARDS PROGRAM
7.7.1 Description
The Emission Standards Program utilizes input data from the Control
Cost File and from punched card input. The Control Cost File data is
listed in Table 7.6-1. The punched card input is described in this section.
The function of this program is to create an output file (Emission
Standards File) containing those controlled sources which conform to speci-
fied emission standards. The file may then be used by the Regional Strate-
gies Program. The fundamental sequence of events for operation of the
Emission Standards Program is as follows:
(a) Call sort routine to order contents of the Control
Cost File by;
Political jurisdiction - source category - source
identification - device number.
(b) Input punched card data in the order; all data for
political jurisdiction 1, all data for political
jurisdiction 2, etc.
(c) The program reads in all punched card data for
political jurisdiction 1, then;
(1) Read in all device application records for
first source on sorted Control Cost File.
(2) For each input standard which corresponds
to the source category number, select the
least expensive control device which satis-
fies the standard.
(3) Repeat 1 and 2 for the second, third, etc.,
sources until all sources in the political
jurisdiction have been considered.
(d) Output results to print routine and the Emission
Standards File.
(e) The program then reads in the data for political
jurisdiction 2, 3, ..., etc, repeating step (c)
each time.
7.7.2 JCL and Deck Setup
Figure 7.7-1 illustrates an example deck setup for the execution of
the Emission Standards Program. Figure 7.7-2 illustrates the specific
JCL cards used for the execution of the test case. The general categories
illustrated in these figures are as follows:
-------
END CARD
INPUT DATA SET
JCL CARDS FOR DATA
SET DEFINITION
END CARD
o PROGRAM OBJECT DECK
o OVERLAY CARDS
JCL CARDS FOR
LOAD & EXECUTE
END CARD
JCL CARDS
FOR SORT
Figure 7.7-1.
Example Deck Configuration for
the Emission Standards Program.
-------
ESTAND DECK SETUP
00
Ln
SORT
END CARD
LOAD AND
EXECUTE
PROGRAM DECK
AND OVERLAY
CARDS
END CARD
DATA SET
DEFINITION
DATA SET
END CARD
//CCFS3RT EXEC SORTD
//SORTIN 00 DSN = COSTO,UNIT = 2
//SDRT.S'iRTO'JT DO OSN=CCCF RE , UNI T= SYSDA, DI SP = ( NE M, PASS ) ,
// SPACE = I CYL, (5,1) ) ,OC8=(RECcM=VBS,LOECL = r3b,BL.KS 115=136^1
//S3RT.SYSIN 00 »
SORT FieLOS = (2'».0,
-------
(a) JCL cards for sort - these cards specify that the
Control Cost File is sorted as follows: order
sources by political jurisdiction number (1, 2,
....10); within each political jurisdiction set,
order sources by source category number (1,2,3);
within each category, order sources by identifica-
tion number (SIC, Site, process number); within
each source group order by device.
(b) JCL cards for load and execution of the Emission
Standards Program - the cards illustrated in Figure
7.7-2 are for utilization of the program object
deck. If the program is on disk or in source deck
form, these JCL cards must be modified.
(c) Program object deck.
(d) JCL cards for Data Set definition.
(e) Card Input data set.
7.7.3
The card input Data Set (Figure 7.7-3) consists of a region card fol-
lowed by data groups for each of the political jurisdictions defined for the
region. Each data group consists of an &ESTAND card which contains the
political jurisdiction number and name (for which the data is to be applied),
data cards specifying the emission standard information to be applied, and
an &END card which indicates the end of the data group. The data groups
must be input by order of ascending political jurisdiction numbers (1, 2,
3, ..., etc.). Further, all political jurisdictions must be represented
by an &ESTAND and &END set of cards (containing the political jurisdiction
number and name). Thus, for example, if no emission standards data are
to be applied to political jurisdiction 2, no cards would be included be-
tween the &ESTAND NPJ = 2, NAMEPJ = JURISDICTION 2 and &END cards.
A detailed description of the input data cards is given in Table
7.7-1. There are 26 emission standard types which may be included in the
different political jurisdiction data groups. Within each political juris-
diction, data for each emission standard may be specified for any or all of
the pollutant - source category combinations indicated.
To construct a data group from the input variables listed in Table
7.7-1, the following items must be considered.
The first card must be the region card.
-------
&ESTAND NPJ= 3,
V&END
TAB03(1,1,1)-- 2.,
TAB02(1,1,!)-!.,
:)ATA SET FOR POLITICAL
JURISDICTION 2
r&ESTAND NPJ= 2,
/"SEND
'&ESTANDNPJ= 1,
r905 TEST CITY
DATA SET FOR POLITICAL
JURISDICTION 1
~. REGION AND DATE
4f INFORMATION
Figure 7.7-3.
Example Input Data Set Configuration
for the Emission Standards Program.
-------
TABLE 7.7-1
PUNCHED CARD INPUT FOR THE EMISSION STANDARDS PROGRAM
Data Type Description
MF Region Card
Column Card Data Format
1-3 Region number, obtained Right Adjusted
from list in Appendix B.
4-23 Region name and/or run
description.
24-43 Date.
MN &ESTAND - a NAMELIST variable indicating
start of a list of NAMELIST inputs for a
particular political jurisdiction. No
equals sign or values are associated with
this variable.
MNI NPJ - number of the political jurisdiction
for which this set of data is being input.
ONA NAMEPJ - up to 72 characters (preceded by
an apostrophe and followed by an apostrophe1
and comma) identifying the political juris-
diction for which this set of data is being
input.
ONP TABOIU^C) - flag for application of the
Null Standard. Set to 1. if standard is to
be applied. TAB01(1,P,C) flag must be set
for each desired combination of P = 1 or
2 and C = 1 or 2 or 3.
ONP TABQ2(1>P,C) - flag for application of the
Maximum Technology Standard. Set to 1. if
standard is to be applied. TAB02(1,P,C)
flags must be set for each desired combina-
tion of P = 1 or 2 and C = 1 or 2 or 3.
ONI N0BN02 - set to 1 to eliminate open burning
during application of TAB02(1,2,3).
ONP TAB03(1,P,C) - data for Maximum Technology
(with Devices Excluded) Standard; Flag plus
one to ten device numbers. If no devices
are to be excluded, set flag to 1.. If from
one to ten devices are to be excluded, set
flag to 2. and input device identification
-------
TABLE 7.7-1
PUNCHED CARD INPUT FOR THE EMISSION STANDARDS PROGRAM (Continued)
Data Type Description
of excluded devices. TAB03(1,P,C) data must
be input for each desired combination of
P = 1 or 2 and C = 1 or 2 or 3.
ONI ' N0BNQ3 - set to 1 to eliminate open burning
during application of TAB03(1,2,3).
ONP TAB04(1,P,C) - same operation as TAB03(1,P,
C) data.
ONI N0BNQ4 - set to 1 to eliminate open burning
during application of TAB04(1,2,3).
ONP TAB05(1,P,C) - data for Potential Emission
Standard; flag plus 5 pairs of curve coordi-
nates. If pre-set curve is desired, set
flag to 1. and omit curve data. If new data
is desired, set flag to 2. and input 5 pairs
of Potential Emission (Ib/hr) vs Allowable
Emission (Ib/hr) points. TAB05(1,P,C) data
must be input for each desired combination
of P = 1 or 2 and C = 2 or 3.
ONI N0BN05 - set to 1 to eliminate open burning
during application of TAB05(1,2,3).
ONP TAB06(1,P,C) - same operation as TAB05(1,
P,C).
ONI N0BN06 - set to 1 to eliminate open burning
during application of TAB06(1,2,3).
ONP TAB07(1,P.C) - same operation as TAB05(1,
P,C).
ONI N0BN07 - set to 1 to eliminate open burning
during application of TAB07(1,2,3).
ONP TAB08(1,P,C) - data for Heat Input Standard:
flag plus four pairs of curve coordinates.
If pre-set curve is desired, input flag
value as 1. and omit curve coordinates. If
input curve is desired, input flag value as
2. and four pairs of Heat Input (10^ BTU)
vs Allowable Emission (lb/106 BTU/hr) points.
TAB08(1,P,C) data must be input for each
desired combination of P = 1 or 2 and C = 1.
-------
TABLE 7.7-1
PUNCHED CARD INPUT FOR THE EMISSION STANDARDS PROGRAM (Continued)
Data Type Description
ONP TAB09(1,P,C) - same operation as TAB08.
ONP TAB10(1,P,C) - same operation as TAB08.
ONP ' TAB11(1,P,C) - data for Heat Input (with
physical stack height parameters) standard;
flag plus seven sets of curve data. If pre-
set curves are desired, input flag value
as 1. and no curve data. If input curves
are desired, input flag as 2. and seven
sets of curve data. Each set of curve data
consists of the physical stack height (ft)
for which the curve applies and three
pairs of Heat Input (106 BTU) vs Allowable
Emission (lb/106 BTU/hr) points. TABU
(1,P,C) data must be input for each desired
combination of P = 1 or 2 and C = 1.
ONP TAB12(1,P>C) - data for Effective Standard;
flag plus Ambient Temperature (deg F),
Ambient Pressure (mb), Average Wind Speed
(ft/sec) plus 12 pairs of curve coordinates.
If pre-set data is desired, input flag
value as 1. and omit pressure, wind speed
and curve data. If input data is desired,
input flag value as 2. and input ambient
conditions and twelve pairs of Effective
Stack Height (ft) vs Allowable Emission
(Ib/hr) points. TAB12(1,P,C) data must be
input for each desired combination of P = 1
or 2 and C = 1 or 2 or 3.
ONI N0BN12 - set to 1 to eliminate open burning
during application of TAB12(1,2,3).
ONP TAB13(1,P,C) - data for Exhaust Concentra-
tion (ppm) Standard; flag plus Exhaust
Concentration (ppm) value. If pre-set value
is desired, input flag value as 1. and omit
exhaust concentration value. If new input
is desired, input flag as 2. and new exhaust
concentration value. TAB13(1,P,C) data must
be input for each desired combination of
P = 1 and C = 1 or 2 or 3.
ONP TAB14(1,P,C) - same operation as TAB13.
-------
TABLE 7.7-1
PUNCHED CARD INPUT FOR THE EMISSION STANDARDS PROGRAM (Continued)
Data Type Description
ONP TAB15(1,P,C) - data for Exhaust Concentra-
tion Standard (double value gr/SCF); flag
plus curve values. If pre-set values are
desired input flag value as 1. and no curve
data. If new data is desired input flag as
2. and grain loading limit 1 (gr/SCF),
switch value of process weight (Ib/hr) ,
grain loading limit 2 (gr/SCF). TAB15(1,P,
C) data must be input for each desired com-
bination of P = 2 and C = 2 or 3.
ONI N0BN15 - set to 1 to eliminate open burning
during application of TAB15(1,2,3).
ONP TAB16(1,P,C) - data for Exhaust Concentra-
tion Standard (gr/SCF); flag plus grain
loading limit. If pre-set value is desired
set flag to 1. and omit grain loading value.
If new value is desired, set flag to 2. and
input grain loading value (gr/SCF). TAB16
(1,P,C) data must be input for each desired
combination of P = 2 and C = 1 or 2 or 3.
ONI N0BN16 - set to 1 to eliminate open burning
during application of TAB16(1,2,3).
ONP TAB17(1,P,C) - data for Exhaust Concentra-
tion Standard (Ib/lOOOlb); flag plus exhaust
concentration limit. If pre-set value is
desired input flag value as 1. and omit con-
centration value. If new value is desired,
input flag as 2. and input exhaust concen-
tration value (lb/1000 Ib). TAB17(1,P,C)
data must be input for each desired combina-
tion of P = 2, C = 1 or 2 or 3.
ONI N0BN17 - set to 1 to eliminate open burning
during application of TAB17(1,2,3).
ONP TAB18(1,P.C) - data for Process Weight
Standard; flag plus eleven pairs of curve
coordinates. If pre-set curve is desired
input flag value of 1. and omit curve data.
If new curve data is desired input flag as
2. and eleven pairs of Process Weight (Ib/hr)
vs Allowable Emission (Ib/hr) points.
-------
TABLE 7.7-1
PUNCHED CARD INPUT FOR THE EMISSION STANDARDS PROGRAM (Continued)
Data Type Description
TAB18(1,P,C) data must be input for each
desired combination of P = 1 or 2 and C =
2 or 3.
ONI N0BN18 - set to 1 to eliminate open burning
during application of TAB18(1,2,3).
ONP TAB19(1,P,C) - same operation as TAB18.
ONI N0BN19 - set to 1 to eliminate open burning
during application of TAB19(1,2,3).
ONP TAB20(1,:P,C) - same operation as TAB18.
ONI N0BN2Q - set to 1 to eliminate open burning
during application of TAB20(1,2,3).
ONP TAB21(1,2>1) - data for Fuel Switch Standard;
flag value. Set flag to; 1. to eliminate coal,
2. to eliminate coal and residual oil, 3. to
eliminate coal, residual oil and distillate
oil.
ONP TAB22(1,2,1) - same operation as TAB21.
ONP TAB23(1,1>1) - data for Sulfur Limitation
Standard; flag. Set flag to 1. for applica-
tion of Control Device 30.
ONP TAB24(1,1,1) - data for Sulfur Limitation
Standard; flag. Set flag to 1. for applica-
tion of Control Device 31.
ONP TAB25(1,1,1) - data for Sulfur Limitation
Standard; flag. Set flag to 1. for applica-
tion of Control Device 32.
ONP TAB26(1,1,1) - Flue Gas Desulfurization
Standard; flag, plus number. Number indicates
Fuel Sulfur limits as follows; 1. use limits
specified for Control Device 30, 2. use
limits specified for Control Device 31, 3.
use limits specified for Control Device 32.
MN &END - this variable indicates the end of
a list of NAMELIST inputs.
-------
A data group for each political jurisdiction, in the
order NPJ = 1, NPJ = 2, ..., etc., must follow the
first card. All political jurisdictions must be rep-
resented.
Within each data group defined by the beginning card
&ESTAND NPJ = XX.NAMEPJ = XXXXX... and final card
&END, data for each of the desired emission standard
types must be specified.
Data for each emission standard type is input through
use of the NAMELIST variable;
TABXXU.P.C) = Flag, X1, X£,
where
XX = Emission Standard Type, EST01 through
EST26 as described in Chapter 6.
P = pollutant type: 1 = SO , 2 = particulates.
C = Source Category: 1 = fuel combustion, 2 =
industrial process, 3 = solid waste.
Flag = Floating point indicator for pre-set or
input data; set to 1. to indicate pre-set
data is used (therefore, no data: X,,
X«. . . will be input), 2. indicates input
data is to be used, therefore the input
data: X , X ... must be included. The
pre-set data for each standard is given
in Table 7.7-2 (SC>2) and Table 7.7-3
(particulates).
If no TABXX(1,P,C) = Flag, entry is made, the associated
standard will not be applied, i.e., only those standards
specified as either input or pre-set will be applied.
The pollutant and source category ranges for which the
standard is applicable are specified in its description
(see also Table 7.7-2).
If the standard is applied to solid waste-particulate
control and open burning is to be eliminated, the flag
N0BNXX = 1 must be input.
An example data form is shown in Figure 7.7-4.
All emission standard curves are log - log (base 10). All
curve data must be input in pairs (independent variable,
allowable emission) in ascending order by independent
variable.
-------
TABLE 7.7-2
PRESET PARAMETERS IN EACH EMISSION STANDARD
(SULFUR OXIDE CONTROL STANDARDS)
i
vo
Variable
TAB01(1,1,C)=1.,
Fuel Combustion(C=l)
Industrial Process(C=2)
Solid Waste(C=3)
TAB02(1,1,C)=1.,
Fuel Combustion(C=l)
Industrial Process(C=2)
Solid Waste(C=3)
TAB03(1,1,C)=1.,
Fuel Combustion(C=l)
Industrial Process(C=2)
Solid Waste(C=3)
TAB04(1,1,C)=1.,
Fuel Combustion(C=l)
Industrial Process(C=2)
Solid Waste(C=3)
TAB05(1,1,C)=1.,
Fuel Combustion(C=l)
Industrial Process(C=2)
Solid Waste(C=3)
TAB06(1,1,C)=1.,
Fuel Combustion(C=l)
Industrial Process(C=2)
Solid Waste(C=3)
TAB07(1,1,C)=1.,
Fuel Combustion(C=l)
Industrial Process(C=2)
Solid Waste(C=3)
TAB08(1,1,C)=1.,
Fuel Combustion(C=l)
Industrial Process(C=2)
Solid Waste(C=3)
Preset Parameters
No variables required
No variables required
No variables required
No variables required
No variables required
No variables required
No devices excluded
No devices excluded
No devices excluded
No devices excluded
No devices excluded
No devices excluded
1...198, 100000.,100., 200000.,100., 500000.,100., 1000000000.,100.
1...198, 100000.,100., 200000.,100., 500000.,100., 1000000000.,100.
1...198, 100000.,100., 200000.,100., 500000.,100., 1000000000.,100.
1.,.198, 100000.,100., 200000.,100., 500000.,100., 1000000000.,100.
1...198, 100000.,100., 200000.,100., 50000Q.,100., 1000000000.,100.
1...198, 100000.,100., 200000.,100., 500000.,100., 1000000000.,100.
1...198, 100000.,100., 200000.,100., 500000.,100., 1000000000.,100.
1...198, 100000.,100., 200000.,100., 500000.,100., 1000000000.,100.
1.,.198, 100000.,100., 200000.,100., 500000.,100., 1000000000.,100.
.001.,6., 25.,6.,
N/A
N/A
5000.,!.,
-------
1
VO
Ui
PRESET PARAMETERS
Variable
TAB09(1,1,C)=1.,
Fuel Combust ion (C=l)
Industrial Process (C=2)
Solid Waste (C=3)
TAB10(1.1,C)=1.,
Fuel Combustion(C=l)
Industrial Process (C=2)
Solid Waste (C=3)
TABLE 7.7-2
IN EACH EMISSION STANDARD (SULFUR OXIDE CONTROL STANDARDS) (Continued)
Preset Parameters
Fuel Combustion (C=l)
Industrial Process(C=2)
Solid Waste(C=3)
TAB12(1,1,C)=1.,
Fuel Combustion(C=l)
Industrial Process(C=2)
Solid Waste(C=3)
TAB13(1,1,C)=1.,
Fuel Combustion(C=l)
Industrial Process(C=2)
Solid Waste(C=3)
TAB14(1,1,C)=1.,
Fuel Combustion(C=l)
Industrial Process(C=2)
Solid Waste(C=3)
.001.,1.5,
N/A
N/A
.001.,1.5,
N/A
N/A
40.,1.5, 1000.,.6, 100000.,.6
40.,1.5, 1000.,.6, 100000.,.6
50., l.,6., 28.,6., 7800.,0.1, 100., l.,6., 41.,6., 9400.,.!.
15.0.,!.,6., 74.,6., 17000.,.1, 225., 1.6., 125.,6., 28000.,.1, 300.,
l.,6., 180.,6., 100000.,.16, 600.,!.,6., 430.,6., 1000000.,.22,
800., l.,6., 640.,6., 100000.,.28
N/A
N/A
68. 1000. 16.4, 1.,.001926, 32.8,2., 49.1,4.5, 65.5,8.,
98.4,17.5, 131.,32., 164.,50., 230.,100., 328.,200., 491.,450.,
656.,800., 10000, 183900.
68. 1000. 16.4, 1.,.001926., 32.8,2., 49.1,4.5, 65.5,8., 98.4,17.5,
131.,32., 164.,50., 230.,100., 328.,200., 491.,450., 656.,800.,
10000.,183900.
68. 1000. 16.4, 1.,.001926, 32.8,2., 49.1,4.5, 65.5,8., 98,4,17.5,
131.,32., 164.,50., 230.,100., 328.,200., 491.,450., 656.,800., 10000,
183900.
500.
500.
500.
2000.
2000.
-------
\o
TABLE 7.7-2
PRESET PARAMETERS IN EACH EMISSION STANDARD (SULFUR OXIDE CONTROL STANDARDS) (Continued)
Variables Preset Parameters
TAB15.(1,1,C)=1.,
Fuel Combustion(c=l)
Industrial Process (C=2)
Solid Waste (C=3)
Fuel Combust ion (C=l)
Industrial Process (C=2)
Solid Waste (C=3)
TAB17(1,1,C)=1.,
Fuel Combustion (C=l)
Industrial Process (C=2)
Solid Waste(C=3)
TAB18(1,1,C)=1.,
Fuel Combustion (C=l)
Industrial Process (C=2)
Solid Waste(C=3)
TAB19(1,1,C)=1.,
Fuel Combustion(C=l)
Industrial Process(C=2)
Solid Waste(C=3)
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
736.,10., 1000.,12.2, 2000.,19.5, 10000.,57.4, 20000.,91.2,
100000.,268., 200000.,428., 1000000.,1250., 2000000.,2010.,
10000000.,5850., 20000000.,9000.
736.,10., 1000.,12.2, 2000.,19.5, 10000.,57.4, 20000.,91.2,
100000.,268., 200000.,428., 1000000.,1250., 2000000.,2010.,
10000000.,5850., 20000000.,9000.
N/A
736.,10., 1000.,12.2, 2000.,19.5, 10000.,57.4, 20000.,91.2,
100000.,268., 200000.,428., 1000000.,1250., 2000000,,2010.,
10000000.,5850., 20000000.,9000.
736.,10., 1000.,12.2, 2000.,19.5, 10000.,57.4, 20000.,91.2,
100000.,268., 200000.,428., 1000000.,1250., 2000000.,2010.,
-------
TABLE 7.7-2
PRESET PARAMETERS IN EACH EMISSION STANDARD (SULFUR OXIDE CONTROL STANDARDS) (Continued)
Variables Preset Parameters
TAB20(1,1,C)=1.,
Fuel Combustion(C=l)
Industrial Process(C=2)
Solid Waste(C=3)
TAB21(1,1,C)=1.,
Fuel Combustion(C=l)
Industrial Process(C=2)
Solid Waste(C=3)
TAB22(1,1,C)=1.,
Fuel Combustion(C=l)
Industrial Process(C=2)
Solid Waste(C=3)
TAB23(1,1,C) = 1. ,
Fuel Combustion(C=l)
Industrial Process(C=2)
Solid Waste(C=3)
TAB24(1,1,C)=1.,
Fuel Combustion(C=l)
Industrial Process(C=2)
Solid Waste(C=3)
TAB25(1,1,C)=1.,
Fuel Combustion(C=l)
Industrial Process(C=2)
Solid Waste(C=3)
TAB26(1,1,C)=1.,
Fuel Combustion(C=l)
Industrial Process(C=2)
Solid Waste(C=3)
N/A
736.,10., 1000.,12.2, 2000.,19.5, 10000.,57.4, 20000.,91.2,
100000.,268., 200000.,428., 1000000.,1250., 2000000.,2010.,
10000000.,5850., 20000000.,9000.
736.,10., 1000.,12.2, 2000.,19.5, . 10000.,57.4, 20000.,91.2,
100000.,268., 200000.,428., 1000000.,1250., 2000000.,2010.,
10000000.,5850., 20000000.,9000.
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
No variables required
N/A
N/A
No variables required
N/A
N/A
No variables required
N/A
N/A
No value preset; must be input
N/A
-------
TABLE 7.7-3
PRESET PARAMETERS IN EACH EMISSION STANDARD (PARTICULATE CONTROL STANDARDS)
I
<£>
CO
Variable
TAB01(1,2,C)= 1.,
Fuel Combustion(C=l)
Industrial Process(C=2)
Solid Waste(C=3)
TAB02(1,2,C)=1.,
Fuel Combustion(C=l)
Industrial Process(C=2)
Solid Waste(C=3)
TAB03(1,2,C)=1.,
Fuel Combustion(C=l)
Industrial Process(C=2)
Solid Waste(C=3)
TAB04(1,2,C)=1.,
Fuel Combustion(C=l)
Industrial Process(C=2)
Solid Waste(C=3)
TAB05(1,2,C)=1.,
Fuel Combistion(C=l)
Industrial Process(C=2)
Solid Waste(C=3)
TAB06(1,2,C)=1.,
Fuel Combustion(C=l)
Industrial Process(C=2)
Solid Waste(C=3)
TAB07(1,2,C)=1.,
Fuel Combustion(C=l)
Industrial Process(C=2)
Solid Waste(C=3)
TAB08(1,2,C)=1.,
Fuel Combustion(C=l)
Industrial Process(C=2)
Solid Waste(C=3)
Preset Parameters
No variables required
No variables required
No variables required
No variables required
No variables required
No variables required
No devices excluded
No devices excluded
No devices excluded
No devices excluded
No devices excluded
No devices excluded
N/A
20.,4., 1000.,60., 6000.,60., 30000.,300., 1000000000.,300.
20.,4., 1000.,60., 6000.,60., 30000.,300., 1000000000.,300.
N/A
.01,.2, 3.,.2, 20.,.2, 100.,!., 1000000.,10000.
.01,.2, 3.,.2, 20.,.2, 100.,!., 1000000.,10000.
N/A
10.,1.8, 100.,10., 10000.,300., 100000.,300., 1000000.,300.
10.,1.8, 100.,10., 10000.,300., 100000.,300., 1000000.,300.
.001,.6, 10.,.6, 10000.,.2, 100000.,.2
N/A
-------
TABLE 7.7-3
PRESET PARAMETERS IN EACH EMISSION STANDARD (PARTICULATE CONTROL STANDARDS) (Continued)
i
vo
VO
Variable
TAB09U,2,C)-1.,
Fuel Combustion(C=l)
Industrial Process(C=2)
Solid Waste(C=3)
TAB10(1,2,C)=1.,
Fuel Combustion(C=l)
Industrial Process(C=2)
Solid Waste(C=3)
TAB11(1,2,C)=1.,
Fuel Combustion(C=l)
Industrial Process(C=2)
Solid Waste(C=3)
TAB12(1,2,C)=1.,
Fuel Combustion(C=l)
Industrial Process(C=2)
Solid Waste(C=3)
TAB13(1,2,C)=1.,
Fuel Combustion(C=l)
Industrial Process(C=2)
Solid Waste(C=3)
Preset Parameters
.001,.5, 10.,.5, 5000.,.18, 100000.,.18
N/A
N/A
.001,.6, 10.,.6, 10000.,.11, 100000.,.H
N/A
N/A
50., 1.,.6, 150.,.6, 1500.,.!, 100., 1...6, 300".,.6,
3000.,.108, 150., 1.,.6, 500.,.6, 3000.,.17, 225., 1...6,
1100.,.6, 9000.,.12, 300., 1...6, 1600.,.6, 20000.,.12, 600.,
1...6, 7000.,.6, 50000.,.12, 800., 1...6, 10000.,.6, 80000.,.12
N/A
N/A
68., 1000., 16.4, 1.,.001926, 32.8,2., 49.1,4.5, 65.5,8., 98.4,17.5,
131.,32., 164.,50., 230.,100., 328.,200., 491.,450., 656.,800.,
10000.,183900.
68., 1000., 16.4, 1.,.001926, 32.8,2., 49.1,4.5, 65.5,8., 98.4,17.5,
131.,32., 164.,50., 230.,100., 328.,200., 491.,450., 656.,800.,
10000.,183900.
68., 1000., 16.4, 1.,.001926, 32.8,2., 49.1,4.5, 65.5,8., 98.4,17.5,
131.,32., 164.,50., 230.,100., 328.,200., 491.,450., 656.,800.,
10000.,183900.
N/A
N/A
-------
TABLE 7.7-3
PRESET PARAMETERS IN EACH EMISSION STANDARD (PARTICULATE CONTROL STANDARDS) (Continued)
o
o
Variable
TAB14(1,2,C)=1.,
Fuel Combustion(C=l)
Industrial Process(C=2)
Solid Waste(C=3)
TAB15(1,2,C)=1.,
Fuel Combustion(C=l)
Industrial Process(C=2)
Solid Waste(C=3)
TAB16(1,2,C)=1.,
Fuel Combustion(C=l)
Industrial Process(C=2)
Solid Waste(C=3)
TAB17(1,2,C)=1.,
Fuel Combustion(C=l)
Industrial Process(C=2)
Solid Waste(C=3)
TAB18(1,2,C)=1.,
Fuel Combustion(C=l)
Industrial Process(C=2)
Solid Waste(C=3)
TAB19(1,2,C)=1.,
Fuel Combustion(C=l)
Industrial Process(C=2)
Solid Waste(C=3)
Preset Parameters
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
.1, 400000., .05
.3, 200., .2
.05
.15
.2
.1
.05
.4
N/A
100.,.551, 400.,1.4, 1000.,2.58, 4000.,6.52, 10000.,12., 40000.,30.5,
60000.,40., 100000.,44.6, 400000.,58.5, 1000000.,69. , 6000000.,92.7
10.,.3, 15.,.3, 20.,.3, 25.,.3, 30.,.3, 35.,.3, 40.,.3, 50.,.3,
100.,.5, 70000.,50., 1000000.,350.
*
N/A
50.,.24, 300.,1.2, 500.,1.77, 900.,2.62, 1500.,3.54, 4100.,6.01,
11000.,10.63, 30000.,22.22, 40000.,28.3, 60000.,40., 1000000.,40.
10.,.3, 100.,.3, 300.,.87, 320.,!., 680.,2., 1000.,2.9, 4000.,10.,
-------
TABLE 7.7-3
PRESET PARAMETERS IN EACH EMISSION STANDARD (PARTICULATE CONTROL STANDARDS) (Continued)
Variables
TAB20(1,2,C)=1.,
Fuel Combustion(C=l)
Industrial Process(C=2)
Solid Waste(C=3)
TAB21(1,2,C)=1.,
Fuel Combustion(C=l)
Industrial Process(C=2)
Solid Waste(C=3)
TAB22(1,2,C)=1.,
Fuel Combustion(C=l)
V Industrial Process(C=2)
£ Solid Waste(C=3)
M TAB23(1,2,C)=1.,
Fuel Combustion(C=l)
Industrial Process(C=2)
Solid Waste(C=3)
TAB24(1,2,C)=1.,
Fuel Combustion(C=l)
Industrial Process(C=2)
Solid Waste(C=3)
TAB25(1,2,C)=1.,
Fuel Combustion(C=l)
Industrial Process(C=2)
Solid Waste(C=3)
TAB26(1,2,C)=1.,
Fuel Combustion(C=l)
Industrial Process(c=2)
Solid Waste(C=3)
Preset Parameters
N/A
1.,.0126, 400. ,.7, 1000. ,1.29, 4000. ,3. 26, 10000. ,6., 40000. ,15.25 ,
60000., 20., 100000., 22. 3, 400000. ,29.2 , 6000000. ,46. 35, 10000000. ,50.
50. ..1, 100.,.!, 200. ,.1, 300.,.!, 400.,.!, 500.,.!, 1000. ,2.,
2828., 5., 5000., 8., 10000., 14.1, 50000., 57.
No value preset; must be input
N/A
N/A
No value preset; must be input
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
-------
I»AT» II//T//17O
107
MO. OF CA«D»JH
PMOBLEM NO.
80 COLUMN FREE KEYPUNCH FORM
PRIORITY
KIYPUNCHID I
Vf RIFMD «V_
12 11 34 31 31
MUM 41
434441
MM
MUM
MUM
MM
N 71
»!
l4-t
*5»
AC
NA
TA
I
UI^4»
r AJB₯
MO
TA
I*.
rt
i
re.
i
M
o
TA
-------
7.7.4 Output
The Emission Standards Program produces both printed output (under
two formats) and a magnetic tape record. The content of these outputs is
described in the following paragraphs and example outputs are shown in
Figures 7.7-5 and 7.7-6.
Emission Standard Input (Figure 7.7-5)
The input variables prepared by the user to define the Emission
Standards Program run are incorporated as a part of the printed output as
shown in this figure. The regional identification, code number and name,
begins each output section. The emission standards selected by the user
are then printed on a political jurisdiction basis. For each emission
standard, the preset values (if any) are printed. If the user has elected
to modify these preset values for a particular emission standard, the modi-
fication will be shown in this output. This table provides a complete
listing of the emission standards which are available for control strategy
development and simulation in the Regional Strategy Program.
Emission Standards (Figure 7.7-6)
The major output produced by the Emission Standards Program is
shown in this figure. The major column headings in this output are as
follows:
Source. Each source is identified by its nine digit
identification number.
Emission Standard. The emission standard applied to
each source is identified by four parameter values.
The source's political jurisdiction defines which set
of emission standards are applied and also indicates,
in conjunction with the other parameters, which set of
preset or user input data were used in computing the
allowable emissions. "Num" identifies the emission
standard being applied, the number refers to the coded
description in Chapter 6 defining the emission standards.
"Pol" is the coded identification of the pollutant being
controlled; one refers to sulfur dioxide, two refers to
particulates. "Cat" identifies the source category with
one for fuel combustion, two for industrial process and
three for solid waste disposal. Together, these values
completely define the specific emission standard being
applied.
-------
I'JPUT
^J
H
o
PEGIUN 907 CE-NTOiL rITY
POLITICAL JURISDICTION 1 STATE .«.
TA80H 1.1,11= 1.
TABO II1,1,2)= 1.
TABO 111,It 31= 1.
T4802I 1,2. 11= 1.,
TAB02I1,2,21= 1.,
TAH32I 1 ,2. 31= 1.,
TAB05I 1,2,2)= 1.,
TABO1)! 1 ,2, 31 = 1.,
N3BNC5= 0,
2r .
2C.
4.COC,
U'CC. bC.OCC
KCC. 6C. OCC
TAB03<1,2,11=2., 1.CCO,
TAB13I1,1,2)= 2..1CCO.CO,
TAB13(1,1,31= 1.,
TA92K 1, 1
-------
REGION
CNTK«L
CITY
"UN 3ATF OECEMBEP 3. 197C
I SJJRCE I
-J
I
I-1
O
Cn
34201
34201
34201
51CI
51CI
5101
51C|
1251
12bl
1251
34021
34021
34021
34021
12819
12819
12819
12819
I 4911
(4911
I 491 1
14911
12119
12119
12119
12819
12819
12819
12819
12819160031
12819160031
12819160031
1295115001
1295115001
1295115001
I32411C001
1324110001
1324110001
11295 5101
13295 5101
13295 5101
1333227001
(333227001
IJ332270C1
I333227C01
13332270031
13332270031
13332270031
13332270031
(4953130011
(4953130011
(4953130011
(495313001 I
14953131021
(4953131021
14953131021
14953131021
I28CO 411CI
FUEL JUAMTITr
. QILlOIS. DILI G«S I
il-itU-f-UUX
'I I
3AS lE^RQRI
.i_ELaiii
1.901
3. -n i
192.Cdl
192.C3I
-------
Emission. The source's existing emission rate for the
pollutant identified in the standard is shown in this
column. The calculated allowable emission is also pre-
sented in this column.
Required Efficiency. The total pollutant removal
efficiency required to bring each source into compli-
ance with the emission standard is displayed in this
column. This efficiency is that required of a completely
uncontrolled source. If any control equipment is already
installed, the pollutant removal efficiency needed from
an additional control device will be less than the
"Required Efficiency."
Device. The control device selected by the Emission
Standards Program is identified and described by the
four variables under this column heading. "ID" gives
the device identification number (see Table 5-2). "Cost"
is the total annualized cost of applying this device to
the source. The makeup and calculation of this cost
were described in Chapter 5. "Efficiency" presents the
decimal pollutant removal efficiency for both pollutants.
Fuel Quantity. The fuel usage pattern for each source
as modified to meet the specified emission standard is
displayed under this heading. These values are non-zero
only for fuel combustion type sources. Usage rates are
displayed for coal, residual fuel oil, distillate fuel
oil and natural gas.
Cooled Gas Flag. This column indicates whether or not
exhaust gas cooling was required before application of
the control device. A complete discussion of the con-
cept of gas cooling was given in Chapter 5.
Error Flag. A value other than zero in this column
indicates that an error was encountered in the applica-
tion of this standard or in the selection of an approp-
riate control device. A numeral one indicates that some
error was encountered in applying the standard. The
user will also receive a printed diagnostic error mess-
age specifically identifying the type of error (see
Chapter 8). A numeral two indicates that the most
efficient control device has been applied but that the
allowable emission rate was not attained. No other
error messages are generated by this type of error.
Magnetic Tape Output
This output provides the basic data required for the execution of the
Regional Strategies Program. It contains the data included in the Emission
Standards printed output as well as certain other variables that are merely
transmitted from the Control Cost Program to the Strategies section. A more
detailed description of the makeup and uses of this file is presented in
Sections 7.8 and 7.9.
-------
7.8 EMISSION STANDARDS
-------
7.8 EMISSION STANDARDS FILE UPDATE PROGRAM
7.8.1 Description
The Emission Standards File Update Program is a COBOL program de-
signed to change, delete or add records to the Emission Standards File.
In addition, the program will produce a formatted listing of the new file
after each update run is completed.
Input to the program consists of the Emission Standards File, on
magnetic tape or disk, and punched cards describing the data which is to
be added, changed, or deleted. The overall system flow of the Update
Program is shown in Figure 7.8-1.
7.8.2 JCL Cards and Deck Setup
An example deck setup configuration is illustrated in Figure 7.8-2.
Figure 7.8-3 contains the specific JCL cards, corresponding to the deck
setup, which were used for the installation test case. The test case
setup was based on the following configuration:
(a) Update program in object deck form
(b) Control Cost File on magnetic tape
Deviations from this configuration require appropriate JCL card changes.
7.8.3 Program Input
The update of the Emission Standards File is accomplished by means
of fixed format punched cards. The description of the data fields for
each record is given in Table 7.8-1. An example data form with prepared
inputs is illustrated in Figure 7.8-4. The input requirements for each
of the program operations is as follows:
(a) Record addition (Transaction Code = A) - All of
the data shown in Table 7.8-1 must be completed.
If the Standard Number (01 through 26) being
simulated by the addition is on the existing File
(for the same pollutant-source category-political
jurisdiction), a new number (27 and on) must be
used. If this is not done, the Regional Strategies
program cannot utilize the addition.
(b) Record change (Transaction Code = C) - The first
19 columns must be completed; followed by only
those data elements to be changed.
-------
SORT
UPDATE
RECORDS
SORTED
UPDATED
CARD
RECORDS]
UPDATE
CARDS
READ
UPDATE
RECORD / /
READ RECORD
FROM EMISSION
STANDARDS
FILE (OLD)
EMISSION
[STANDARDS!
.FILE (OLD),
o
oo
SET NEW
RECORD =
CARD INPUT
RECORD
EMISSION
STANDARDS
FILE LISTING
(NEW)
'EMISSION^
[STANDARDSl
.FILE (NEW))
15 ^v NO
THIS RECORD
UPDATED
SET NEW
RECORD^
OLD RECORD
DELETE,
CHANGE,
ADD
EMISSION
STANDARDS
FILE (NEW)
SET NEW
RECORD=
OLD RECORD+
UPDATE FIELDS
EMISSION
STANDARDS
FILE LISTING
(NEW)
EMISSION
STANDARDS
FILE (NEW)
EMISSION
STANDARDS
FILE LISTING
(NEW)
-------
END CARD
JCL CARDS FOR DATA
CARD
PROGRAM OBJECT .DECK
JCL CARDS FOR
;LOAD & EXECUTE
x-SORT FORMAT CARDS
J JCL CARDS FOR DATA
^ C SET DEFINITION
END CARD
\S
r
INPUT DATA SET
JCL CARDS
FOR SORT
Figure 7.8-2.
Example Deck Configuration for the
Emission Standards File Update Program.
-------
ESTAND UPDATE DECK SETUP
SORT
DATA SET
END CARD
DATA SET
DEFINITION
SORT FORMAT
LOAD AND
EXECUTE
PROGRAM DECK
END CARD
DATA SET
DEFINITION
END CARD
f/STEP2 EXEC PROC = SORT
//SORT1N DD *
**«**«**«
/*
DD
TRANSACTION CARDS HERE
= CUPOUT,OISP=
-------
TABLE 7.8-1
PUNCHED CARD INPUT FOR EMISSION STANDARD FILE UPDATE PROGRAM
Columns
Picture*
2-4
5-8
9-11
12-13
14-15
16
17
18-19
20-22
23-31
32-34
35-37
38-40
41-47
48-54
55
56-60
XXX
XXXX
XXX
XX
XX
X
X
XX
XXX
xxxxxxxx
.XXX
.XXX
.XXX
XXXX.XX
XXXX.XX
X
xxxxx
Description
Transaction Code - Enter A if an entire
record is to be added, D if an entire
record is to be deleted, C if a record
is to be changed.
Region Number - (001 through 999)
SIC Code - (four digits)
Site Number - (001 through 999)
Process Code - (00 through 99)
Political Jurisdiction - (01 through 10)
Source Type - Enter 1 for fuel combustion,
2 for industrial process, 3 for solid
waste disposal.
Pollutant Type - Enter 1 for SO or 2 for
particulates.
Emission Standard Number - (01 through 26,
see text for exclusions)
Device Number - (001 through 999)
Cost - Total annual cost, dollars
SO^ Control Device Efficiency - Decimal
equivalent
Particulate Device Efficiency - Decimal
equivalent
Total Required Efficiency - Defined as:
[potential emission minus allowable
emission]/potential emission
Allowed Emissions - tons/day
Existing Emissions - tons/day
Gas Cooling Flag - Set flag = 0 for no gas
cooling, set flag = 1 if gas cooling
was used.
Quantity of Coal Used - tons/day
* See footnote on following page.
-------
TABLE 7.8-1
PUNCHED CARD INPUT FOR EMISSION STANDARD FILE UPDATE PROGRAM (Continued)
Columns
61-66
67-72
73-80
Picture*
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXXXX
Description
Quantity of Residual Oil Used - tons/day
Quantity of Distillate Oil Used - tons/day
3
Quantity of Gas Used - ft /day
* NOTE: 1. All decimal points are implied.
2. All numeric values are right justified.
3. Since only those fields to be changed are input, blank
fields are acceptable.
4. Within each field there can be no right justified blanks,
i.e., all field entries must end with appropriate alpha-
numeric values.
-------
PAT* ll/
-------
(c) Record deletion (Transaction Code = D) - Only the
first 19 columns need be completed.
Since the program automatically sorts the input cards, the user is not
required to maintain any special card input order to the program.
7.8.4 Program Outputs
The principal output of the program is the updated Emission Standards
File. A printed listing of the Emission Standards File contents is auto-
matically obtained after each update run. The format of the printed list-
ing from this program is identical to the Emission Standards Application
Data Output (Figure 7.7-6).
-------
-------
7.9 REGIONAL STRATEGIES PROGRAM
7.9.1 Description
The Regional Strategies Program is designed to select and summarize
particular emission standards application results. The program requires
inputs from the following:
(a) Emission Standards File (Section 7.7) - provides the
source and device characteristics which satisfy each
emission standard applied in the Emission Standards Pro-
gram.
(b) Source File (Section 7.2) - provides area source data for
air quality calculations.
(c) Source Contribution File (Section 7.4) - provides the pol-
lutant contribution from each source, defined in the source
file, to each receptor, defined by the Air Pollution Con-
centration Program.
(d) Punched Card Input (Section 7.9.3) - provides information
on the emission standards set (strategy) to be applied,
scale factors for area sources and projection factors for
all sources.
A control strategy is defined by specifying the following types of
data:
(a) Pollutant to be controlled
(b) Emission standard number which is to be applied to:
Fuel combustion sources in political jurisdiction 1
Industrial process sources in political jurisdiction 1
Solid waste sources in political jurisdiction 1
Fuel combustion sources in political jurisdiction 2
Solid waste sources in political jurisdiction N (where
N is the total number of political jurisdictions de-
fined for the region).
-------
(c) Statistical parameters for statistical data output asso-
ciated with the air quality calculations.
(d) Scale factors for area source emission alterations.
(e) Projection factors to be applied to both point source and
area source emissions.
If the Source Contribution File is unavailable, new air quality
values cannot be computed. Summaries of new emission rate data and control
costs will however, be output. For such cases, items (c) and (e) are not
required inputs.
7.9.2 JCL and Deck Setup
The input deck setup is illustrated in Figure 7.9-1. Figure 7.9-2
contains the specific JCL cards, corresponding to Figure 7.9-1, which were
used for the installation test case setup. The test setup assumes the
following:
(a) Regional Strategies Program in object deck form.
(b) Emission Standards File and Source Contribution File on
magnetic tape.
(c) Source File on disk.
Deviations from this configuration require appropriate JCL card changes.
7.9.3 Input
The Data Set is composed of from 1 to n strategy definition sets.
Each strategy is composed of the punched card input data described in
Table 7.9-1. An example data form with prepared inputs is illustrated in
Figure 7.9-3.
7.9.4 Output
The following paragraphs display and describe the printed output
produced by the Regional Strategies Program.
Input Control Strategy (Figure 7.9-4)
This figure displays the set of emission control standards selected
by the user to make up a control strategy. The table header indicates
the regional descriptive name, the control strategy identification number
-------
END CARD
INPUT DATA SET
JCL CARDS FOR DATA
DEFINITION
END CARD
o PROGRAM OBJECT DECK
o OVERLAY CARDS
JCL CARDS FOR
C LOAD & EXECUTE
Figure 7.9-1.
Example Deck Configuration for
the Regional Strategies Program
-------
I
(-
M
CO
LOAD AND
EXECUTE
PROGRAM OBJECT
DECK AKD <
OVERLAY CARDS
DATA SET
DEFINITION
DATA SET
END CARD
RSTRAT DECK SETUP
// EXEC PROC=FORTGLG,PAR*.LKED='LET,LIST,XREF.OVLY'
//LKED.SYSIN DD *
««*»*»«*
OBJECT DECK HERE
**********
OVERLAY A
INSERT SPCT4B, JURSU"
OVERLAY A
INSERT SUMMRY.RFCOUT.PROJEC
OVERLAY »
INSERT STATS^VALU2
/*
//GO.FT08FCC1 DL DSM = EPROJAS ,UNIT = SYSDA ,
< NEW, DELETE I ,
//GO.FT09FC01 DD OSN=ESFILE ,VOL=SER=000552, JNIT»2400,DISP=OLO,
// LABEL=( ,SLt,IN>
//GO.FTIOFCC1 3D DSN«SCF9C7,UNIT=2*00,L*BEL = ( , SL , , I Nl , VOL =SER*OOC**3 ,
// OISP=OLD
//GO. FT I IF CO 1 DD OSN = NEkSORC E , VOL*SER = C00078 , UNI T = 23 14, DI SP = OLO
//GO.FT12FCC1 m r»SN = CE^SAVE ,UNIT = SYSDA,DISP = (NErt,P»SSI,
// DCB«(RECFM = VSB,LRECL = 28,BLKSIZE = S6', I , SPACE = ( TRK , ( 5, 11 »
//GO.SYSIN DO *
**********
/*
NAHELIST AND FIXED FOK1AT DATA HERE
**********
-------
TABLE 7.9-1
PUNCHED CARD INPUTS FOR THE REGIONAL
STRATEGIES PROGRAM
Data Type Description
MN &RSTRT - A NAMELIST variable indicating start of a list
of namelist inputs to the Emission Standards Model. No
equal sign or values are associated with this variable.
MNI NREG0N - Three digit code number for the region to be
controlled (see Appendix B for correlation between re-
gion numbers and names).
ONA REGI0N - Up to 72 characters (preceded by an apostrophe
and followed by an apostrophe and comma) for the iden-
tification of both the region to be controlled (see
Appendix B for correlation between region numbers and
names) and the strategy being used.
ONA DATE - Up to 20 characters (preceded by an apostrophe
and followed by an apostrophe and comma) for the date of
run.
MNI IJUR - Total number of political jurisdictions in the
region.
ONP S02CAL - Regression line constants (y-intercept and
slope) for sulfur dioxide. If omitted, the values used
in the Air Pollutant Concentration Program (and con-
tained on the Source Contribution File) will be used.
ONP PARCAL - Regression line constants (y-intercept and
slope) for particulate matter. If omitted, the values
used in the Air Pollutant Concentration Program (and
contained on the Source Contribution File) will be used.
ONP AQSTAN - Air quality standard for each pollutant (arith-
metic mean in micrograms per cubic meter) input in the
order: S02 and particulate matter. If omitted, a value
of 0.0 is used for each pollutant.
ONP UTM - x and y coordinates of the UTM origin, for trans-
lation of the output receptor coordinates. If omitted,
a value of 0.0 is used for each coordinate.
ONP BACKGR - Background concentrations (arithmetic mean,
micrograms per cubic meter) for each pollutant in the
order: S02, particulate matter. If omitted background
values are assumed to be zero.
-------
TABLE 7.9-1
PUNCHED CARD INPUTS FOR THE REGIONAL
STRATEGIES PROGRAM (Continued)
Data Type Description
ONI IPUNCH - Flag to indicate whether receptor ground level
concentration output is to be punched on cards for use
in plotting concentration isopleths. Set to one (1) if
punched card output is desired. If omitted, punched
card output will not be produced.
ONI NSEL12 - Flag to indicate whether statistical output is
desired. Set to one (1) if output is desired. If out-
put is requested, the following variables must also be
input: If S02 strategy, input ISTATS, S02AUG, S02PER
and SGDS. If particulate strategy, input ISTATP,
PARAVG, PARPER and SGDP. If omitted, statistical out-
put will not be produced.
ONI ISTATS* - Twelve (12) receptor numbers for S02 statisti-
cal output.
ONI ISTATP - Twelve (12) receptor numbers for particulate
matter statistical output.
ONP S02AVG - Three (3) averaging times (hours) for the S02
statistical output.
ONP PARAVG - Three (3) averaging times (hours) for the
particulate matter statistical output
ONP S02PER - Three (3) percentile levels (percent) for S02
statistical output.
ONP PARPER - Three (3) percentile levels (percent) for par-
ticulate matter statistical output.
ONP SGDS - Standard geometric deviation (24-hour period) for
S02 corresponding to the ISTATS receptor numbers. These
values must be input in the same order as the receptor
location numbers to which they refer.
*
Receptor location numbers must be consistent with the system defined for
the associated Air Pollutant Concentration Program run (or Source Contribu-
tion File Merge Program run, if applicable).
-------
TABLE 7.9-1
PUNCHED CARD INPUTS FOR THE REGIONAL
STRATEGIES PROGRAM (Continued)
Data Type Description
ONP SGDP - Standard geometric deviation (24-hour period)
for particulate matter corresponding to the ISTATP re-
ceptor numbers. These values must be input in the same
order, as the receptor location numbers to which they
refer.
ONI IFAC - Flag to indicate whether individual area source
scaling factors are input. Set to one' (1) if individual
scaling factors are input. If omitted, individual
scaling factors will not be considered.
ONP ASFAG - Area source scale factors to be applied on a
political jurisdiction basis. A scale factor in the
form +n.nn must be input for each pollutant - political
jurisdiction combination. The order of input must be:
S02-PJ#1, S02-PJ//2, , S02PJ//UUR, Part-PJ#l, ,
Part-PJ#IJUR. If this card is input, all scale factors
must be specified. If omitted, all scale factors assume
the value 1.0.
ONI IPR0J - Projection flag for projecting ground level
concentration to some future date. Set to one (1) for
point source and individual area source projections, set
to two (2) for point source and political jurisdiction
wide area source projections. If omitted, or set to
zero (0), projections will not be considered.
ONP ASPRJ - Area source projection factors to be applied
(to the scaled area sources) on a political jurisdic-
tion basis. A scale factor in the form +nnnnnnn.nn
must be input for each pollutant - political jurisdic-
tion combination. The order of input is the same as
in ASFAC. If omitted, all area source projection fac-
tors assume the value 1.0.
MN
&END - This variable signifies the end of NAMELIST inputs
-------
TABLE 7.9-1
PUNCHED CARD INPUTS FOR THE REGIONAL
STRATEGIES PROGRAM (Continued)
Data Type Description
MF Strategy cards - one card is input for each political
jurisdiction, in the order: PJ//1, PJ#2, , PJ//IJUR.
Each card contains the following data:
Format
(Right
Columns Description Justified)
1-3 Pollutant number; 1 for S02,
2 for particulates nnn
4-6 Political jurisdiction number nnn
7-9 Fuel combustion standard number nnn
10-12 Industrial process standard
number nnn
13-15 Solid waste standard number nnn
20-40 Political jurisdiction name alphanumeric-
not right
justified
MF Strategy end card. Following the last strategy card,
a card with END punched anywhere between columns 41
and 80 must be input.
OF Area source scale factor cards - one card is input for
each area source to be scaled. The factor input will
be applied in place of the value given by ASFAC. If any
scale factor cards are input, scale factor end card de-
scribed next must also be input. Each scale factor card
contains the following data:
Format
(Right
Justified)
nnn
nnnn
nnn
7-122
Columns
1-3
4-7
8-11
Description
Region number
SIC number
-------
TABLE 7.9-1
PUNCHED CARD INPUTS FOR THE REGIONAL
STRATEGIES PROGRAM (Continued)
Data Type Description
Format
(Right
Columns Description Justified)
12 'Process number nn
13-17 S02 scale factor +n.nn
18-22 Particulate scale factor +n*nn
OF Area source scale factor end card. Following the last
scale factor card, a card with END punched anywhere
between columns 41 and 80 must be input.
OF Projection factor cards - one card is input for each
source (point and area) for which a projection is de-
sired. Point source projections are applied to allow-
able emission values and area source projections are
applied to the scaled area source emission values. If
any projection cards are input, the projection end card,
described next, must be input after the projection cards.
Each projection card contains the following data:
Format
(Right
Columns Description Justified)
1-3 Region number nnri
4-7 SIC number nnnn
8-10 Site number* nnn
11-12 Process number* nn
13-23 S02 projection factor +nnnnnnn.nn
24-34 Particulate projection factor -Hmnnnnn.nn
OF Projection end card - following the last projection card,
a card with END punched anywhere between columns 41 and
80 must be input.
For area sources, Site number is nnnn and Process number is n.
-------
DATE.
/70
PROUI EM NO. 107
NO. OF CARD* 2.1
80 COLUMN FREE KEYPUNCH FORM
PRIORITY
KEYPUNCHED BY.
VERIFIED BY
3|«
41 44 46 41 47
SI M SB M
MSIM
12 1} M li M 17 H
777374717*77717*
sur
AR
ettft
I 7
r«
£&
UE
_A+tElA
ii£l*
giVlD
^^
2. 0 O
yo
COL
^.S'O
r/i
jvp
R]i
a
V i.M8
A*
I
M
NJ
AOL
-------
CENTRAL CITY STRATEGY II PAPTICULATE H.I./P.E.
INP-UT CONTROL STRATEGY
POLLUTANT: PARTICIPATES
18, 197f
I
I-1
to
POLITICAL
J11R1SD1CI1JN
I STATt A
1
1 2 STATE 8
i
1
FUEL INDUSTRIAL SOLIO
A > >
8 > 5
1
-------
and the descriptive title of the strategy. The later two items are
assigned by the user when developing and specifying the strategy. The
pollutant being controlled and the date of the run are also presented in
the table header. For each political jurisdiction the emission control
standard applied to each source type is shown. The numeric identifica-
tions (from 1 to 26) refer to the emission standards described in Chapter 6.
Emission Standard Effects on Source Emissions (Figure 7.9-5)
The second type of printed output generated by the Control Strategies
Program is shown in this figure. This tabulation is presented for each
source type/political jurisdiction combination. A header indicating the
regional identification, control strategy number and descriptive name, and
date precedes each table. The source type, emission standard number and
jurisdiction identification also are printed before the main tabular list-
ing. The following items make up the column headings in this tabulation:
Source Identification..; Each source is identified by
its SIC code, site and process numbers.
Control Device. The device selected by the Emission
Standards Program for this standard is identified by
its numeric code (see Table 5-2). The computed annual
cost and device efficiency are also shown.
Required Efficiency. This decimal efficiency represents
the degree of pollutant reduction required by the source
to bring its potential emissions into compliance with
the allowable emission defined by the control standard.
If the source already has an existing control device
then the required efficiency will be larger than that
needed to bring the existing (partially controlled)
emissions into compliance with the standard.
Emissions. Three emission rates are displayed for each
source: the existing emissions, the emissions allowable
under the emission control standard, and the controlled
emissions resulting from the application of the listed
control device. The allowable emissions are utilized
in the computation of air quality resulting from the
application of the control strategy.
Jurisdictional Summary (Figure 7.9-6)
Following the presentation of the Emission Standard Effects on Source
Emissions for each of the three source types within a political jurisdiction,
a Jurisdictional summary is printed. Again a table header is provided which
identifies the control region and the emission control strategy under
-------
CENTRAL CITY STRATEGY II PARTICJLAT5 H.I./P.E.
NOVEMBER IS, 1973
EMISSION STANDARD EFFECTS C
SOURCE EMISSIONS
INOUSTfdAL PROCESS STANDARD 5 FOR P4*THfUL»TE C?\TcnL
STATE A JURI SDICTIGN
NJ
-J
SIC
CODE
i_ .
2119
2819
2819
2951
32*1
3295
SITE
NO .
L
3*
160
150
100
51
3332 12/0
J
1 3.3.J.2. 12.2Q
1
PROCI DEVICE
\
NO . I 1C
L .1
25 .
2
3
1
1
1
1
L 3 .
*» C
** C
!<.
1
G 1C
ie
0
C J
ANNUAL
DEVICE COST
L _
t C.C
* 0.0
t 52496.33
* 7846. 25
t 235<.26. 4 INDICATES "GST EFFICIENT DEVICE *AS USED BUT ALLOWABLE «AS N~T »TTAIN±D.
(««l INDICATES NO DEVICE AVAILABLE TO CONTROL THE SOURCE
-------
10
oo
CENTRAL CITY STRATEGY II PARTICULATE H.I./P.E.
JURISDICTION SUMMARY
STATE A JURISDICTION
NOVEMBER 18, 1970
REGULATION TYPE
AND NUMBER
I
FUEL COMBUSTION
8
INDUSTRIAL PROCESS
5
SOLID WASTE DISPOSAL
5
_ _ |
JUKI SDICTION TOTAL
TOTAL
APPLICABLE
1
1
1
1 1
TOTAL (EXISTING EMISSIONS! EMISSION
CONTROLLED 1 FOR
POINT SOUf CESIPOINT SOURCES! POINT SOURCES
2
8
2
.
12
1
I
1
1
1
1
1
IG
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
(TONS/DAY!
L
2
*
4
»*
I
*«
7
5.70
'
45.48
2.88
.
54.06
"EDUCTION
(TONS/DAY)
ULLChEQ iCONIBOLLED
C.CC
3.67
0.29
L .
3.96
5.68
44.26
2.50
52.44
ANNUAL
CONTROL COST
(MILLI')NS OF s)
L
8. 386
0.338
0.129
L _
8.853
1
1
1
1
1
|
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
|
1
CONTROL COST
PER TON
REMOVED IS/TON)
4045.63
20.89
141.59
462.53
i i_ i .
(*) S3ME SOURCES COULD NOT ATTAIN THF ALLOWABLE EMISSION
(*») NO DEVICE AVAILABLE TO CONTROL SOME SOURCES.
(Gl GAS C10LING APPLIED TO SOME SOURCE(S).
EXISTING EMISSIONS (TONS/DAY)
POINT SOURCES.... 54.1
AREA SOURCES 16.1
TOTAL EMISSIONS.. 70.1
CONTROLLED REDUCTION.. 53.7
CONTROLLED EMISSIONS (TONS/DAY)
PCINT SOURCES.... 1.6
AREA SOURCES 14.8
TOTAL EMISSIONS.. 16.4
PERCENTAGE REDUCTION... 76.6 *
COAL (TONS/DAY)
RESID. OIL (GAL/OAYI.
CIST. 3IL (GAL/OAYI..
0.0
C.C
O.C
GAS (1000 CJ. FT./DAY)... 91216336.000
JURISDICTION CONTROL COST-EFFECTIVENESS
REOUCTION IN T?TAL POINT SOURCE EMISSION fATt 462.53 DOLLARS/TON
-------
consideration, The run date and political jurisdiction are also displayed,
The following data elements are included in the tabular presentation.
Regulation Type and Number. The emission standard
applied to each source type is identified by number.
Total Applicable Point Sources. The number of point
sources is listed both by source category and as a
total for the jurisdiction.
Total Controlled Point Sources. The number of sources
required to reduce their pollutant emissions are tabu-
lated in this column. Indicators are provided when
certain of the sources cannot be properly controlled by
the devices considered in the Control Co^t Program.
Existing Emissions for Point Sources. This column
summarizes the existing pollutant emissions by source
category.
Emission Reduction. Two measures of emission reduction
are included under this heading. Allowed emissions
refer to the emission levels specified by the emission
standards making up the control strategy. Controlled
emissions indicate the amount of reduction produced by
the control devices selected by the program to bring
each source into compliance with the allowable emission
levels. It must be noted that the two sets of figures
in this column are.not strictly comparable since the
control device selected may produce a greater reduction
than is required by the standard. Also, in some cases,
there may be no control device available which allows
a source to meet the emission level specified by the
standard.
Annual Control Cost. This column presents the accumu-
lated control costs of the control devices assigned
to each point source under the control strategy.
Control Cost per Ton Removed. The figures presented
in this column represent the product of the annual
control cost divided by the number of tons of pollutant
removed annually by the control device. These figures
give an estimate of the cost effectiveness of control
by source categories and overall effectiveness.
In addition to the main tabulation, described above, the Jurisdic-
tional Summary also contains a summary of the emission pattern prior to
and following the application of the control strategy. Both point and
area source emissions are included in this summary. The reduction in
area source emissions shown indicates the effect of the area source
scale factors input by the user. The jurisdictional fuel use patterns
following application of the control strategy are also displayed.
-------
Control Strategy Summary (Figure 7.9-8)
This figure provides an overall summary of the pollutant reductions
required under the control strategy. The header information and column
headings are the same as for the jurisdictional summaries described above.
This tabulation represents the summation of control information over the
entire air quality control region. One additional piece of informa-
tion is included in this output which was not in the previous summaries.
The reduction in ground level concentration indicates the number of
dollars required to produce an average one microgram/cubic meter reduction
in the regional pollutant levels. This value will vary- between control
strategies and thus provides another measure of effectiveness of each
strategy.
Control Strategy Effects on Ground Level Concentrations (Figure
7.9-7) '
The result of the pollutant emission reductions on ambient air
quality throughout the region is displayed in this figure. The table
header identifies the control region, control standard and the run date.
The air quality standard for the pollutant being controlled is also
shown. Each receptor location is identified with a unique number and by
its X and Y coordinates^ The expected pollutant concentration following
the application of the control strategy is indicated in micrograms/cubic
meter. The amount of reduction from the existing ambient,conditions is
also displayed in a separate column. The amount by which the concentra-
tion at each receptor point is in excess of the ambient air quality
standard is also shown.
Projected Emission Inventory (Figure 7.9-9)
If the user inputs projection factors.which relate existing emis-
sions to those expected some time in the future, three additional outputs
are generated by the Regional Strategies Program. This figure displays
the adjusted pollutant emission rates for each point and area source
identified in the region. Each source is identified by its nine digit
identification and its political jurisdiction. Both the existing emission
level and the emission level specified by the control strategy are adjusted
by the input projection factor and are output.
-------
CENTRAL CITY STRATEGY II PARTICULATE H.I./P.E.
NOVEMBER 18. 197C
AIR QUALITY STANDARD 65.0
OTM ORIGIN(KILOM-:TEKSI: X =
CONTROL STRATEGY EFFECTS ON GROUND LEVEL CONCENTRATIONS
MIC»OG»AMS/CUBIC METER
c.o Y= o.o
I
M
U>
RECEPTOR
LOCATIONS
UTM,KILOMETERS
i i X
6C.GO
60.OC
65.00
65.00
65.OC
90.30
60.00
90.00
AO.CC
<.5.CC
56.3C
72.60
71.10
65.3C
NEW CONCENTRATION VALUE)
AMOUNT PEOUCED
MlC8.OGB.aBS/CiJBIC METER I MI CPCGR AMS/CUB1 C METERI MICBOGRAMS/CUBIC METERI
01
C.570159E Cl
0.8'.633dE 01
0.62723CE Cl
0.8<.1251E 01
0.2P2217E C2
0.695873E Cl
0.191558E
.508694E
5C7166F
55746CE
CO
CO
CO
519894E CO
.910*1396
IN EXCESS
0.0
0.0
c.o
c.o
-------
CENTRAL CITY STRATEGY II PARTICIPATE H.I./P.E.
CONTROL STRATEGY SUMMARY
NOVEMBER 18, 197C
JURISDICTION
AND NUMBER
STATE A
1
STATE B
2
STRATEGY TOTAL
1
1 TOTAL
1 APPLICABLE
(POINT SOURCES
__i- _ _ J
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
12
_J
26
_ J
1
TOTAL (EXISTIN
CONTROLLED I
POINT SOURCES! POINT
L__ __ 1 ilQ
7
*
3
15
L _ _
1
1
1
1
I
1
1
_1
i EMISSIONS
FOR
SOURCES
54.06
28. 2C
_ '_
82.26
J
EMISSION
REDUCTION
(TONS/DAY)
3.96 52.44
6.16 25.37
L
10.12
L_
77.81
ANNUAL
CJNTROL COST
(MILLIONS OF s|
L _ J
8.353
16. 364
L J
25.217
L J
CONTROL COST
PER TON
REMOVED I S/TONI
L
462.53
1767.31
887.95
L__ _
<*l SOME SOURCES COULD NCT ATTAIN THE ALLOWABLE EMISSION
(**l NO DEVICE AVAILABLE TO CONTROL SOME SOURCES.
(Gl GAS COOLING APPLIED TO SOME SOURCEISI.
_a_E_G._I_Q_6|_A._L
B_E_G_i_a_N._A._lf,.u_E.L__U_5_£
S3
EXISTING EMISSIONS (TONS/DAY)
POINT SOURCES.. .. 82. 3
AREA SOURCES 20.1
TOTAL EMISSIONS.. 1C2.3
COMTPOLLED REDUCTION.. 79.5
CONTROLLED EMISSIONS (TONS/DAY)
POINT SOURCES.... 4.5
AREA SOURCES 18.4
TOTAL EMISSIONS.. 22.8
PERCENTAGE REDUCTION... 77.7 *
COAL (TONS/DAYt
RESID. OIL (G4L/DAY).
DIST. OIL (GAL/DAYI..
C.O
C.C
C.C
GAS (1000 CU. FT. /DAY! .. .276613120. COO
REGIONAL CONTROL COST-EFFECTIVENESS
REDUCTION IV TOTAL POINT SOURCE EMISSION RATE 887.95 DOLLARS/TON
REDUCTION IN GROUND LEVEL CONCENTRATION . . . 25C8J84G. COLLARS/MIC&OGRAM/CU3IC METfR
-------
u>
BEGION:
SOURCE
1
2
3
5
6
7
8
9
1°
11
12
13
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
CITY STPATtGY il PARTICOCATE H.I./P.E.
OaTE^QvE^FS 16, 197C
PROJECTS:) EMISSION INVENTORY
PkCJECT_ED ALLOWABLE
PR.GJECTEO EXISTING
2819 3420
4911 510
2119 125
2819 3402
281916003
295115001
324110001
3295 5101
333227C01
333227003
495313001
495313102
280C 4110
3323 7130
3323 7140
4911 620
4911 730
2819 3302
287126001
2911 6101
331211101
331211102
331211103
3323 72C1
495313104
4953132C2
9999 100
9999
9999
9999
99"»9
9999
9999
200
300
400
500
700
900
9999 10CO
9999 1100
9999 1200
9999 1300
9999 140C
9999 1500
9999 1800
9999 2000
9999 2200
9999 2500
9999
9999
c.cc
C.CO
C .10
c.c
0.72
C.07
1.39
0.24
C.72
0.21
0.25
0.04
0.00
0.00
0.00
C.CO
C.CO
0.^2
0.58
0.43
3.33
1.C6
0.18
0.13
o.oa
-O.C3
0.01
0.02
0.10
0.12
0.01
C.14
1.70
3.9C
I. 6C
C . i C
0.0 .
21.90
0.97
2.79
1 -V . I 8
0.31
0.02
2.55
0.33
4.CC
0.10
C.IC
4.2C
8.10
0.3S
B.CC
0.12
1.00
0.74
0.27
1.01
O.oa
0.2?
0.01
O.C2
0.1C
0.12
-------
Projected Emissions Summary (Figure 7.9-10)
This figure summarizes the result of the emission projection by
political jurisdiction. Again both the existing emissions and allowable
emissions are projected.
Projections for Emission Standard Effects on Ground Level Concen-
trations (Figure 7.9-11)
The ground level pollutant concentrations based on the projected
allowable emissions are presented as shown in this figure. The tabulated
quantities are identical to those described for ^ standard, non-projected,
control strategy run (see Figure 7.9-8).
-------
I
t->
tn
REGION:
POLITICAL
CENTRAL CITV STRATEGY II PA»TICULATE H.I. /?.=..
D4TE: MOVEM8ER 18, 197C
PROJECTEJ E>1JSSION SUMMARY
TOTAL PRDJECTEJ ALLOxA^LE TOTAL PROJECT-EO cXISTING
18.56
9.. 89
-------
CENTRAL CITY STRATEGY II PARTICULATE H.I./P.E.
NOVEMBER 18, 1970
PROJECTION FOR
CONTROL STRATEGY EFFECTS ON GROUND LEVEL Ct NCENTO t. TIUNS
AIR OLIAL1TY STAN04K3 65.C
JTM ORIGINCKILOMETERSI: X=
MICROGRAMS/CU3IC METER
C.C Y= 0.0
RECEPTOR
l-JUHflEa.
1
2
3
LOCATIONS
UTM,KILOMETERS
_i i I_
60.00
6C.OO
65.00
65.00
65.00
90. JO
60.00
90.01
<.G.CC
«.OC
40. OC
<.5.0C
56. 3C
72.60
71.10
65. iC
NEW CONCENTRATION VALUE I
I
._3IC.aUG.£A.aS.££J.filC._
C.7283C9E 01
0.569985E 01
3.8*6199= 01
0.627051E 01
O.a<,091d£ 01
0.20214JE 02
0.695377E 01
C.191401E C2
t MOUNT FEOUCcO
C.5042C7E CO
C.500709E CO
0.55267CE CO
C.512144E 00
C.883983E XJO
AMOUNT IN EXCESS
0.0
c.o
0.0
0.0
._CEIL3i
-------
-------
8.0 PROGRAM MESSAGES
8.1 PURPOSE
Under certain circumstances, the Implementation Planning Program
prints special messages to the user which provide error diagnostics,
advisory warnings or general information. The message contents, the cir-
cumstances for their occurrence and the accompanying program actions have
previously been described in Chapters 3 through 7 of this volume. However,
for the convenience of the user, all the information is summarized here.
In addition to special program messages printed by the Implementation
Planning Program, the operating system employed at the user's computing
facility may, under certain conditions, also print coded diagnostic messages.
For an explanation of these, the user is referred to the standard FORTRAN
and COBOL manuals available at the facility; or he may seek the advice of
the resident systems programmers.
8.2 SOURCE DATA MANAGEMENT PROGRAM - ERROR MESSAGES
There are a number of possible format errors that the user can fall
victim to when providing punched card inputs to the Source Data Management
Program. The actual edit error list printed by the program may contain any
number of errors, depending on the number of input cards that failed to
pass the editing sequence. The message formats are all of the form:
FMXX SOURCE X(12) FIELDXX Field Content, Message Content
The manual reference number is printed first, then the word "SOURCE"
followed by the 12 digit source identification, then the word "FIELD"
followed by a two digit identification of the particular field of the re-
cord found in error, then the actual field content as input by the user, and
last, the error message content. Table 8-1 lists each message code, along
with the message and an explanation.
There are three basic transactions conducted by the Source Data
Management Program: create or add, delete, and change. Some of the error
messages listed in Table 8-1 pertain to all three of these transactions,
whereas some pertain to only one transaction type. The transactions to
which these messages apply are evident from the explanation provided in
the table.
-------
TABLE 8-1
SOURCE FILE MAINTENANCE DIAGNOSTICS
Manual Reference
Number
FM01
FM02
FM03
FM04
FM05
FM06
FM07
FM08
FM09
FM10
FM11
FM12
FM13
Message Content
"BLANK FIELD"
"NOT NUMERIC"
"BOTH FIELDS BLANK"
"BAD I.D. FIELD"
"TRANS OUT OF SORT"
"DUPLICATE SOURCE
TRANSACTION"
"INVALID SOURCE
TYPE"
"INVALID OWNERSHIP"
"NO NAME"
"NO CARD NUMBER"
"NO TRANSACTIONS"
"NO ACTION CARD"
"NO DATE RECORD"
Message Significance
A mandatory nonblank field
is blank.
A numeric field has been input
with non-numeric character(s).
(Possibly an illegal character
or embedded blanks.)
One field may be blank, but
not both.
The identification field of a
source transaction is non-
numeric.
The source transaction file
has not been sorted at all, or
has been sorted improperly.
A duplicate source transaction
has been encountered. Pro-
gram will skip this transac-
tion and continue with the
next.
The Source Type must be either
B, P, or S.
Ownership must be either P, L,
S, F, or U.
The descriptive name can never
be blank.
The card number is missing on
a point source input. This
field is blank for area sources
only.
No transaction records can be
found on the input deck (User
has failed to provide update
cards to program.)
The action card is not the
first card input. Either the
deck is not sorted properly or
the card is not present at all.
The date record is not the
first record on the old Source
File.
-------
TABLE 8-1
SOURCE FILE MAINTENANCE DIAGNOSTICS (Continued)
Manual Reference
Number
FM14
FM15
FM16
FM17
Message Content
"RECORD NOT ON FILE"
"NO SOURCE INPUT"
"NO SOURCE TRANS-
ACTIONS"
"NO DUMMY RECORD"
Message Significance
The record requested for up-
dating is not present on the
old Source File.
The old Source File does not
contain any source records,
only the data record is
present.
The Source Transaction File
contains only the action re-
cord and no data.
This error occurs if an
update is attempted for an
incomplete file. The file
must be recreated.
FM18
FM19
FM20
FM21
FM22
"AREA SOURCE AL-
READY EXISTS"
"NO TRANSACTION
CODE"
"NO CARD 1"
"NO CARD 3"
"WRONG REGION
NUMBER ON ACTION
CARD"
Transaction seeks to add source
that already exists on file.
Must request a change or
delete.
Either a D, C, or A must be
present in card column 79 of
the transaction.
On a create or add transaction,
cards 1 and 3 must be present
or the source will not be
entered on the file.
On a create or add transaction,
cards 1 and 3 must be present
or the source will not be
entered on the file.
During an update transaction,
if a region number is found on
an action card that does not
correspond to the region
number on the file, then the
program terminates.
-------
An error encountered during the editing sequence of any transaction
will prevent the entry (or deletion) of the entire record for that
source. If more than one input card is involved in creation of the record,
and if an error is encountered on the first card, the program will edit
the other cards for that source before going on to the next record. All
the point and area source input cards to the Source File are numbered
according to the scheme described in Section 7.2.3.
8.3 AIR POLLUTANT CONCENTRATION PROGRAM - DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES
The calibration procedure in the Air Pollutant Concentration Program
can give rise to one of the first two diagnostic messages (Al, A2 in
Table 8-2. These messages merely explain the calibration action taken by
the program. The message is printed as shown under the Message Content
column; the Manual Reference Number is not output.
In addition, the program may print one of three (AC01, AC02, AC03)
error messages prior to an abnormal termination. These messages indicate
errors detected in the inputs (Source File or card inputs) that will cause
the program to fail sooner or later. These diagnostic messages all have
the following format:
ACXX-Message Content,
where ACXX is the manual reference number.
8.4 SOURCE CONTRIBUTION FILE MERGE PROGRAM
The Source Contribution File Merge Program does not print any special
messages. However, if a bad input tape is encountered, a system diagnostic
will be obtained.
8.5 THE CONTROL COST PROGRAM - DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES
A variety of diagnostic messages are produced in the Control Cost
Program. These may originate with source file data or user supplied card
inputs. The program does not perform an edit sequence as such and all
special messages result from the failure of consistency checks undertaken
in the course of the calculation. Unless otherwise noted in Table 8-3,
these errors do not result in an abnormal termination. The program
continues to process a given device until an error Is encountered, at which
point no further processing is done for the device and the program
-------
TABLE 8-2
AIR POLLUTANT CONCENTRATION PROGRAM MESSAGES
Manual Reference
Number
Al
Message Content
NOT STATISTICALLY
SIGNIFICANT
A2
AC01
AC02
AC03
STATISTICALLY
SIGNIFICANT
DPTMX, WNDFREQ, TA,
PA MUST BE ALL
NON-ZERORUN
TERMINATED
IREG NOT EQUAL TO
0, 1, OR 2--RUN
TERMINATED
IMPROPER RECEPTOR
INPUTRUN
TERMINATED
Message Significance
The theoretical value (5 per-
cent confidence level) expect-
ed for the correlation coeffi-
cient is shown. If the
calculated correlation coeffi-
cient is less than or equal
to the 5 percent value, the
following note is printed
in the output table; "NOT
STATISTICALLY SIGNIFICANT."
When this occurs, the air
quality values at receptors
will be printed without the
use of these regression con-
stants. It should also be
noted that in this case the
constants should not be input
using the S02CAL= and PARCAL=
cards (Section 7.3.3);
instead, the reason for the
poor correlation should be
determined and the necessary
corrections made.
This is the opposite circum-
stance to Al above. In this
case, the calculated coeffi-
cient is greater than the 5
percent confidence level.
The user must input non-zero
values for the mixing height,
wind frequency, ambient tem-
perature and ambient pressure.
IREG contains an invalid input
that will cause the program to
dump.
Both the grid system and the
non-grid receptors were not
included in the card inputs
to the program.
-------
TABLE 8-3
CONTROL COST PROGRAM DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES
Manual
Reference
Number
CM01
00
i
CM02
Message Content
ERROR IN S02 OR PART-EMISSION RATE
SOURCE ID XXXXXXXXXXXX
EMISSION FACTOR
so2
PART
XXXX.XXX
XXXX.XXX
INPUT EMISSION
XXXX.XXX
XXXX.XXX
NO FUEL SUBSTITUTES AVAILABLE FOR
SOURCE ID XXXXXXXXXXXX
Message Explanation
The emission factors (i.e., calculated emission rates)
are calculated by the following equations:
S02:
PART:
(E +E
sc sr
J
sd
)(I-D )
sg s
(E + E +E.+E )(1-D )
pc pr pd pg p
The diagnostic message occurs when either or both of
the inequalities shown below are not satisfied:
0.8 e < E < 1.2 e ; 0.8 e < E < 1.2 e ,
s s s p - p - p
where e is the input SO emission rate and e is the
input particulate emission rate.
The error must be corrected by changing the appropriate
source file data.
This message indicates that for a fuel elimination
measure there were no fuels that had a sulfur content
less than or equal to the sulfur content of the fuel al-
ready burned by the source, or the cost of the fuel to
be substituted was input as zero. This error occurs on
fuel elimination (measures 27, 28, and 29) only. Pro-
cessing continues with the next device (30) that is not
a fuel elimination. The problems may have orignated
with sulfur content values in the Source File or regional
NAMELIST data, or the cost data in the regional NAME-
-------
TABLE 8-3
CONTROL COST PROGRAM DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES (Continued)
00
Manual
Reference
Number
CM03
CM04
CMOS
CM06
CM07
CMOS
CM09
Message Content
CONTROL EFFICIENCY OF SO SHOULD
NOT BE 1 FOR SOURCE ID XXXXXXXXXXXX
CONTROL EFF. = X.XX
CONTROL EFFICIENCY OF PART. SHOULD
NOT BE 1 FOR SOURCE ID XXXXXXXXXXXX
CONTROL EFF. = X.XX
SO- AND PART. EMISSION ARE BOTH
ZERO FOR SOURCE ID XXXXXXXXXXXX
EXIT TEMPERATURE SHOULD NOT BE ZERO
FOR SOURCE ID XXXXXXXXXXXX
EXHAUST VOLUME SHOULD NOT BE
ZERO FOR SOURCE ID XXXXXXXXXXXX
RATED CAPACITY SHOULD NOT BE ZERO
FOR SOURCE ID XXXXXXXXXXXX
THE SIC AND PROCESS CODE XXXX XX
ARE NOT IN THE DEVICE APPLICA-
BILITY TABLE
Message Explanation
This error indicates that the control efficiency for
SO was input as 1.00 for the source shown. This error
can be corrected by updating the source file.
Same as CM03 except the control efficiency is for
particulate.
This message indicates both SO- and particulate
emissions were input as zero. This error can be corrected
by changing the Source File.
This message indicates that value input for the tempera-
ture (°F) resulted in a value of zero, after internal
conversion. The problem must be corrected by updating
the Source File.
The exhaust volume was input as zero in the source file
and must be corrected by updating the Source File.
The rated capacity for a combustion source was input as
zero. This error can be corrected by updating the source
file.
This message indicates that the current source has a
SIC and process code that is not in the device applica-
bility table. The error could be caused by an incorrect
SIC or process code in the source file, the device
applicability table, or the NAMELIST inputs to the device
-------
continues to the next device. The diagnostic messages in Table 8-3 are
all of the following format:
CMXX - Message content,
where the first expression is the manual reference number. The message
content identifies the source by the region number, the SIC code, site
number and process code:
SOURCE ID XXX XXXX XXX XX*
Region SIC Site Process
8.6 THE CONTROL COST FILE UPDATE PROGRAM - ERROR MESSAGES
The Control Cost File Update Program provides the following three
line error messages:
****** ERROR ****** RECORD FOR SOURCE.
XXXXXXXXX DEVICE XXX COULD NOT BE UPDATED. llne °ne
EITHER RECORD IS NOT ON FILE I , J
line two
OR UPDATE CARD WAS OUT OF ORDER.
SUCCEEDING UPDATES WERE ALSO IGNORED.
line three
The message provides the source and device identification. The device
identification is according to Table 5-1 and the source is identified
according to SIC code, site number and process code:
SOURCE XXXX XXX XX
SIC Site Process
The message is self-explanatory.
8.7 THE EMISSION STANDARDS PROGRAM - DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGE
The diagnostic messages produced by the Emission Standards Program
are all listed in Table 8-4. Each message is in the form of a printed
text that supplies the manual reference number, identifies the data element
producing the difficulty, describes the nature of the difficulty and the
program action (if any).
The first two messages listed in Table 8-4 are edit error messages
for the input cards. The remaining messages relate to data difficulties
(Control Cost File or card inputs) encountered during the program execution.
*The data field of the printed diagnostic contains no blanks.
-------
TABLE 8-4
EMISSION STANDARDS PROGRAM ERROR MESSAGES
MESSAGE TEXT
INP01 - POLITICAL JURISDICTION NO. XX NOT IN ORDER - RUN TERMINATED
AT COMPLETION OF POLITICAL JURISDICTION NO. XX.
INP02 - SOURCE XXXXXXXXX EXISTING DEVICE EFFICIENCY FOR POLLUTANT X
IS 100% OR GREATER.
**EST05A - SOURCE XXXXXXXXX PE VALUE OF XXXXX.XX. EXCEEDS TABLE LIMIT,
STANDARD CANNOT BE APPLIED.
**EST05B - SOURCE XXXXXXXXX PE VALUE OF XXXXX.XX. LESS THAN MINIMUM
TABLE VALUE, ALLOWABLE SET EQUAL TO EXISTING EMISSIONS.
**EST06A - SOURCE XXXXXXXXX PE VALUE OF XXXXXXX. EXCEEDS TABLE LIMIT,
STANDARD CANNOT BE APPLIED.
**EST06B - SOURCE XXXXXXXXX PE VALUE OF XXXXX.XX. LESS THAN MINIMUM
TABLE VALUE, ALLOWABLE SET EQUAL TO EXISTING EMISSIONS.
**EST07A - SOURCE XXXXXXXXX PE VALUE OF XXXXXX. EXCEEDS TABLE LIMIT,
STANDARD CANNOT BE APPLIED.
**EST07B - SOURCE XXXXXXXXX PE VALUE OF XXXXX.XX. LESS THAN MINIMUM
TABLE VALUE, ALLOWABLE SET EQUAL TO EXISTING EMISSIONS.
**EST08A - SOURCE XXXXXXXXX HI VALUE OF XXXXXXX. EXCEEDS TABLE LIMIT,
STANDARD CANNOT BE APPLIED.
**EST08B - SOURCE XXXXXXXXX HI VALUE OF XXXXX.XX. LESS THAN MINIMUM
TABLE VALUE, ALLOWABLE SET EQUAL TO EXISTING EMISSIONS.
**EST09A - SOURCE XXXXXXXXX HI VALUE OF XXXXXXX. EXCEEDS TABLE LIMIT,
STANDARD CANNOT BE APPLIED.
**EST09B - SOURCE XXXXXXXXX HI VALUE OF XXXXX.XX. LESS THAN MINIMUM
TABLE VALUE, ALLOWABLE SET EQUAL TO EXISTING EMISSIONS.
**EST10A - SOURCE XXXXXXXXX HI VALUE OF XXXXXXXXX. EXCEEDS TABLE LIMIT,
STANDARD CANNOT BE APPLIED.
**EST10B - SOURCE XXXXXXXXX HI VALUE OF XXXXX.XX. LESS THAN MINIMUM
TABLE VALUE, ALLOWABLE SET EQUAL TO EXISTING EMISSIONS.
**EST11A - SOURCE XXXXXXXXX PHYSICAL STACK HEIGHT IS LESS THAN MINIMUM
CURVE VALUE - STANDARD CANNOT BE APPLIED.
**EST11B - SOURCE XXXXXXXXX PHYSICAL STACK HEIGHT EXCEEDS MAXIMUM CURVE
VALUE - STANDARD CANNOT BE APPLIED.
-------
TABLE 8-4
EMISSION STANDARDS PROGRAM ERROR MESSAGES (Continued)
MESSAGE TEXT
**EST11C - SOURCE XXXXXXXXX HI VALUE OF XXXXXXXXX. EXCEEDS TABLE LIMIT,
STANDARD CANNOT BE APPLIED.
**EST11D - SOURCE XXXXXXXXX HI VALUE OF XXXXX.XX. LESS THAN MINIMUM
TABLE VALUE, ALLOWABLE SET EQUAL TO EXISTING EMISSIONS.
**EST12A - SOURCE XXXXXXXXX EFF. STACK HEIGHT OF XXXXXXX. EXCEEDS TABLE
LIMIT - STANDARD CANNOT BE APPLIED.
**EST12B - SOURCE XXXXXXXXX EFF. STACK HEIGHT OF XXX.XX LESS THAN
MINIMUM TABLE VALUE, ALLOWABLE SET = EXISTING EMISSION.
**EST18A - SOURCE XXXXXXXXX PROCESS WEIGHT XXXXXXXXX. EXCEEDS TABLE
LIMIT - STANDARD CANNOT BE APPLIED.
**EST18B - SOURCE XXXXXXXXX PROCESS WEIGHT XXX.XX LESS THAN MINIMUM
TABLE VALUE - ALLOWABLE SET = EXISTING EMISSION.
**EST19A - SOURCE XXXXXXXXX PROCESS WEIGHT XXXXXXXXX. EXCEEDS TABLE
LIMIT - STANDARD CANNOT BE APPLIED.
**EST19B - SOURCE XXXXXX PROCESS WEIGHT XXX.XX LESS THAN MINIMUM TABLE
VALUE - ALLOWABLE SET - EXISTING EMISSION.
**EST20A - SOURCE XXXXXXXXX PROCESS WEIGHT XXXXXXXXX. EXCEEDS TABLE
LIMIT - STANDARD CANNOT BE APPLIED.
**EST20B - SOURCE XXXXXXXXX PROCESS WEIGHT XXX.XX LESS THAN MINIMUM
TABLE VALUE - ALLOWABLE SET = EXISTING EMISSION.
-------
The source is identified by SIC code, site number and process code as
follows:
SOURCE XXXX XXX XX
SIC Site Process
In the case of message INP02, the program bypasses the source entirely
and goes on to the next source. To correct this difficulty the Cost
File must be modified or recreated. All the error messages following
INP02 in the table arise during the application of emission standards to
the sources. In these cases, the program sets the error flag (0, 1 or 2
as explained in Section 7.7.4) and goes on to the next emission standard.
Any additional program actions are noted in the diagnostic message.
8.8 EMISSION STANDARDS FILE UPDATE PROGRAM - ERROR MESSAGES
The Emission Standards File Update Program has the capability of
changing, deleting or adding records to the Emission Standards File. In
the course of the editing sequence, the program may print any of the
following five message types:
ESFU01 13(X) ATTEMPTING ILLEGAL UPDATE
- This message indicates that the user has called
for an update (change or delete) or a record that
is not present on the file. If the update calls for
the addition of a new record, however, then the trans-
action is legal and the message is not printed.
ESFU02 13(X) NON-NUMERIC FIELD IN UPDATE CARD
- This message indicates that the user has attempted
to add a record to the file that contains non-numeric
data.
ESFU03 13(X) ATTEMPTING ILLEGAL UPDATE
- This message indicates that the user has attempted
to update (change or delete) an existing record on
the file with a code that is not a 'D' or 'C'.
ESFUOA 13(X) NO UPDATE ACTION TAKEN - CARD HAS NON-NUMERIC
FIELD
- This message is caused by an attempt to change an
existing data field with a non-numeric input card.
ESFU05 13(X) UNCORRECTED ERROR ON UPDATED FILE
- This message indicates that the user has not provided
input cards to update a record which has an error flag set.
-------
All of the above messages contain the manual reference number and
thirteen character identification fields. The identification field (13(X))
contains the following information:
1) political jurisdiction - 2 characters
2) category - 1 character
3) pollutant number - 1 character
4) SIC code - 4 characters
5) Site number - 3 characters
6) Standard number - 2 characters
The first four messages occur during the edit sequence. In all of
these cases, the program will not perform any update transactions for a
record which has even a single incorrect update card. The program pro-
ceeds to the next record for which update cards have been provided. The
last message can only occur at the end of the edit sequence. The program
performs a search of the file to check if all identified.(flagged) errors
have been provided with updates.
8.9 REGIONAL STRATEGIES PROGRAM - DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES
The Regional Strategies Program can print any of five diagnostic
messages. These all relate to problems with reading in data and all
result in a premature termination of the run. These messages are as
follows:
**RST01 - STRATEGY DATA MISSING - RUN TERMINATED
- This message indicates that either a wrong value for
the political jurisdiction was included in the NAMELIST
data or an incorrect number of strategy cards (Section
7.9.2) were input. The run was terminated without output
except for printout of the input data successfully read
by the program.
**RST02 - ERROR READING APC SOURCE CONTRIBUTION
DATA - NO AIR QUALITY OUTPUT
- This message indicates that that the program could
not read past the first record of the Source Contribution
File produced by the Air Pollutant Concentration Program.
Consequently, the run was terminated without any air quality
output.
-------
***RST03 - ERROR READING APC SOURCE CONTRIBUTION
DATA - AIR QUALITY OUTPUT TERMINATED
- This message indicates that difficulty was encountered
in reading some record (not the first) of the Source
Contribution File. Consequently, the run was terminated
without any air quality output.
**RST04 - NO END CARD. PROJECTION REPORTS TERMINATED
- This message indicates that either more than 2000
projection factor cards (Section 7.9.2) were input or
the end card was omitted. The run was terminated without
any projection output.
**RST05 - AREA SOURCE SCALE DATA MISSING - RUN
TERMINATED
- This message indicates that either the last scale data
card was absent or some other part of the scale data was
missing, or both. The run was terminated without any output,
except for the printed summary of the input data successfully
read by the program.
-------
-------
9.0 COMPUTER REQUIREMENTS
9.1 PURPOSE
A computer program is of no use until it is properly installed on a
computer. This chapter, which presents the minimum computer configuration
required, and Chapter 7, which provides detailed program operating instruc-
tions, will prepare the user to install and operate the Implementation
Planning Program. After installation, the user should then conduct a
special test run employing the detailed data forms and descriptions of the
inputs and outputs for the sample case (Installation Test Case) given in
Volume II to verify the program operation. Once these outputs are success-
fully duplicated, the program is ready to be used as a tool in regional
air pollution analysis.
Since this chapter provides the user with only the basic computer
requirements, including storage and run time, he is urged to consult with
systems programmers assigned to the computer facility at which the
Implementation Planning Program is to be installed. The programmers are
in the best position to determine the adequacy of the available hardware
and software.
9.2 GENERAL COMPUTER REQUIREMENTS
The design of the individual computer programs is predicated upon
the availability of a computer hardware and software configuration
possessing the following (minimum) characteristics:
IBM 360 Model 40
Central processing unit with at least 256,000
bytes of core storage (56,000 bytes for system).
An IBM 2314 disk module.
Two IBM 2401 Mod. II magnetic tape units.
A card reader/punch and high-speed line printer.
The full OS (version 17 or later), capable of supporting
the above hardware configuration.
Software support of FORTRAN G and COBOL F compilers.
-------
In both the preparation of the disk file and the execution of the
program, the IBM System 360 Job Control Language (JCL) is used [IBM, 1969].
The language provides the user with a means of influencing the scheduling
of computing operations and the allocation of computing resources.
9.3 EXECUTION TIME
The execution time estimates given below for each of the Implementa-
tion Planning Program job steps are noted in terms of central processor
time on an IBM 360/40, and unless otherwise stated, are for the particular
example provided by the Installation Test Case (Volume II).
Creation of the Source File by the Source Data Management System
takes place in several short steps; a typical file takes approximately 5
minutes to create and the Installation Test requires only 3.2 minutes.
The Air Pollutant Concentration Program takes about 20 minutes to
process 55 sources and output pollutant concentration for 36 receptors.
The Control Cost Program requires about 3 minutes for 26 sources and
34 devices. Running time for this program is directly proportional to the
number of point sources in the Source File.
The Emission Standards Program (ESTAND) requires 1.1 minutes to
process 26 point sources through 16 emission standards. Running time is
directly proportional to the number of point sources and emission standards.
The Regional Strategies Program (RSTRAT) takes approximately 1.38
minutes for 2 strategies covering 55 sources, 2 political jurisdictions,
and 6 emission standards each.
The Source Contribution File Merge Program takes approximately 2-3
minutes to process a pair of sub-region files.
9.4 CORE REQUIREMENTS
The core memory requirements for each of the models are listed in
Table 9-1.
The Input/Output Buffer requirements (Item 9) in Table 9-1 should
be added to the values shown for the Air Pollutant Concentration Program
the Control Cost Program, the Emission Standards Program and the Control
Strategies Program.
-------
TABLE 9-1
IMPLEMENTATION PLANNING PROGRAM CORE REQUIREMENTS
Program
Core Memory (Bytes)
1. Source Data Management Program
2. Air Pollutant Concentration Program
3. Source Contribution File Merge
Program
4. Control Cost Program
5. Control Cost File Update Program
6. Emission Standards Program
7. Emission Standards File Update
8. Region Strategies Program
9 Input/Output Buffers
50,000
100,000 (for largest segment
when program is overlayed,
otherwise more than 150,000
required)
53,000
100,000 (for largest segment
when program is overlayed,
otherwise more than 130,000
required)
22,000
75,000 (for largest segment
when program is overlayed,
otherwise more than 100,000
required.
35,000
58,000 (for largest segment
when program is overlayed
otherwise about 100,000
required)
10,000 - 15,000
-------
-------
10.0 REFERENCES
1. "Air Quality Criteria for Particulate Matter," U.S. Department of
Health, Education and Welfare, Public Health Service, Consumer
Protection and Environmental Health Service, National Air Pollution
Control Administration, January 1969.
2. "Air Quality Criteria for Sulfur Oxides," U.S. Department of Health,
Education and Welfare, Public Health Service, Consumer Protection
and Environmental Health Service, National Air Pollution Control
Administration, January 1969.
3. "Air Quality Display Model," TRW Systems Group, February, 1969.
4. Department of Army Technical Manuals, Headquarters, Department of
the Army, Washington, D.C.
DA TM-5-241-1 "Grids and Grid References," June 7, 1967.
DA TM-5-241-2 "Zone to Zone Transformation."
DA TM-5-241-4/1 "Transformation of Coordinates from Geographic
to Grid," Vol. 1, July 1958.
DA TM-5-241-4/2 "Transformation of Coordinates from Grid to
Geographic," Vol. II, July 1958.
DA TM-5-241-8 "Universal Transverse Mercator Grid," July 1958.
DA TM-5-241-237 "The Universal Transverse Mercator Grid,"
Chapter 13, pp. 312-332.
5. TIKVART, J. T. "Notes on Meteorological Data," Prepared for the
National Air Pollution Control Administration Workshop for Regional
Implementation Plans (January 1969).
6. CLARKE, J. F. "Nocturnal Urban Boundary Layer Over Cincinnati,
Ohio," Monthly Weather Review (1969)
7. FISHER, R. A. "Statistical Methods for Research Workers," 12th
Edition, Hafner Publishing Company, New York.
8. GIFFORD, F. A., Jr., "Use of Routine Meteorological Observations for
Estimating Atmospheric Dispersion," Nuclear Safety, 2, 47.
9. "Guidelines for the Development of Air Quality Standards and Imple-
mentation Plans," U.S. Department of Health, Education and Welfare,
Public Health Service, Consumer Protection and Environmental Health
Service, National Air Pollution Control Administration, May 1969.
10. HOLLAND, J. Z. "A Meteorological Survey of the Oak Ridge Area,"
Atomic Energy Commission Report ORO-99 (1953), pp. 554-559.
-------
REFERENCES (Continued)
11. HOLZWORTH, G. C. "Estimates of Mean Maximum Mixing Depths in the
Contiguous United States," Monthly Weather Review (May 1964), Vol.
92, No. 5, pp. 235-242.
12. "Job Control Language," IBM Systems Reference Library, Form C28-
6539-9, Tenth Edition, July, 1969.
13. LARSEN, Ralph I. "A New Mathematical Model of Air Pollution Concen-
tration Averaging Time and Frequency," APCA Journal (January 1969),
Vol. 19, No. 1.
14. MARTIN, Delance 0., and Joseph A. TIKVART, "A General Atmospheric
Diffusion Model for Estimating the Effects on Air Quality of One
or More Sources," APCA Journal (June 1968), pp. 68-148.
15. PASQUILL, F. "Atmospheric Diffusion," London, D. Van Nostrand
Company (1962).
16. PASQUILL, F. "The Estimation of the Dispersion of Windborne Material,"
Meteorol. Magazine (1961), 90, 1063, pp. 33-49.
17. PEARSON, E. S., and H. 0. HARTLEY, "Biometrika Tables for Statis-
ticians," Cambridge University Press (1966), Vol. 1.
18. STITES, J. G. Jr., W. R. HORLACHER, Jr., J. L. BACHOFER, Jr., and
J. S. BARTMAN, "Removing S02 from Flue Gas," Chem. Eng. Progress
(October 1969), Vol. 65, No. 10, pp. 74-79.
19. TURNER, D. B. "A Diffusion Model of an Urban Area," Journal of
Applied Meteorology, (February 1964), Vol. 3, pp. 83-91.
-------
-------
APPENDIX A
FEDERAL LEGISLATION
1. BACKGROUND
1955
The U. S. Congress first responded to growing public concern over
declining air quality in July 1955, with legislation authorizing a Federal
program of air pollution research and technical assistance to State and
local governments (PL 84-159). This legislation established a policy,
retained in all subsequent legislation, that State and local governments
have fundamental responsibility for local air pollution control with the
Federal Government providing leadership and support.
1959
In 1959, Congress amended PL 84-159, declaring that Federal depart-
ments and agencies should cooperate with the Department of Health, Educa-
tion and Welfare and with interstate, State, and local air pollution
control agencies in the control of pollutants contributed to the atmos-
phere of a given region from facilities under Federal jurisdiction.
1961
The first congressional efforts to bring motor-vehicle emissions
under control resulted in PL 86-493. This legislation authorized the
Public Health Service to conduct a study of pollution caused by motor
vehicles and to report the results to Congress. An amendment to this
statute (PL 87-761), passed in 1961, authorized motor-vehicle pollution
studies on a continuing basis.
1963
As a result of this early legislation, significant progress was made
toward achieving an understanding of the air pollution problem and de-
veloping methods for air pollution control. By 1963, however, it became
obvious that this progress in scientific understanding was not being
translated into improved air quality, primarily because State and local
governments had neither the resources nor the authority to adequately cope
with the problem.
-------
To accelerate air pollution control activities, Congress passed the
"Clean Air Act" of 1963 (PL 88-206). This legislation dramatically altered
the thrust of the Federal approach to air pollution control. The Act
authorized two major new programs: the awarding of grants directly to
State and local agencies to assist them in developing, establishing, or
improving control programs; and the initiation of Federal abatement actions
to cope with interstate and, in some cases, intrastate pollution problems.
In addition, it demanded accelerated research, training, and technical
assistance activities, and called for the development of criteria on the
effects of air pollution on health and property.
As a result of the Clean Air Act, State and local control programs
underwent considerable expansion. Federal control actions were initiated,
resulting in cleaner air for many communities, and research efforts were
expanded.
1965
Various studies had indicated that motor vehicles were contributing
significantly to overall air pollution levels, and in 1965 Congress passed an
amendment to the Clean Air Act authorizing the Department of Health, Edu-
cation and Welfare to set emission standards for motor vehicles.
1966
In 1966, another amendment to the Clean Air Act (PL 89-675) authorized
grants to State and local air pollution control agencies to assist them in
maintaining their programs. These grants supplemented the previously
authorized assistance for establishing, developing, and improving programs.
1967
In spite of all of this legislation, the magnitude of the growing
air pollution problem rendered control activities inadequate. This inade-
quacy led to the adoption of new legislation (PL 90-148) which provides a
blueprint for a systematic effort to deal with air pollution problems on a
regional basis.
The Clean Air Act as amended calls for coordinated action at all
levels of government and among all segments of industry. The system which
it develops hinges on the designation of air quality control regions. These
-------
regions are to be set up according to meteorological and other technical
factors, as well as social and political factors, so that areas which
share a common air pollution problem may exercise a coordinated control
activity. These regions are designated by the Department of Health, Edu-
cation and Welfare, which is also responsible for monitoring each region's
progress in the development and implementation of air quality standards.
Other major provisions of the Act as amended include: expansion of the
Federal Government's air pollution research and development activities;
continuation of grants to States and communities to assist them in their
efforts to control air pollution; continued efforts to control pollution
at Federal installations; and investigation of manpower and training needs
in the air pollution field.
2. CLEAN AIR ACT AS AMENDED
The Clean Air Act as amended provides for the establishment of an
intergovernmental system for the prevention and control of air pollution
on a regional basis. To put this system into operation, the Department of
Health, Education and Welfare must designate air quality control regions
and issue air quality criteria and reports on control techniques. State
governments are then expected to establish air quality standards for the
air quality control regions and to adopt plans for implementation of these
standards. The air quality standards and implementation plans prepared by
the states must be submitted to HEW for review [Guidelines, 1969].
Figure A-l shows the division of responsibilities under the Clean Air
Act as amended. In developing the Air Quality Display Model [TRW, 1969]
and the Implementation Planning Program described in this report, TRW has
been guided by the operational structure specified in this legislation.
Particular attention has been directed toward the following key elements:
(a) Air Quality Control Regions. Air Quality Control Regions
represent the local, operational level for air pollution
control as envisioned in the Clean Air Act as amended.
Region boundaries are defined on the basis of an analysis
of social and political factors as well as physical air
pollution effects, and thus may not coincide with estab-
lished political or geographic divisions. The borders of
a given air quality control region will be established so
as to include the principal emitters or sources of pollu-
tants for the area, together with a majority of the
-------
HEW DESIGNATES
AIR QUALITY
CONTROL REGIONS.
HEW DEVELOPS AND
PUBLISHES AIR
QUALITY CRITERIA
BASED ON SCIENTIFIC
EVIDENCE OF AIR
POLLUTION EFFECTS.
HEW PREPARES
AND PUBLISHES
REPORTS ON
AVAILABLE CONTROL
TECHNIQUES
^
©(\eo\ f 18° i
U>AYsy IDAYS/
STATES SET
S^ SIAItS INDICATE STANDARDS
^ TO SET STANDARDS. (PUBLIC __ QUALITY CONTROL
REGIONS.
1
STATES SUBMIT
STANDARDS FOR
HEW REVIEW.
1
1
i^m
-*
STATES ESTABLISH
COMPREHENSIVE PLANS
AIR QUALITY
STANDARDS.
1
STATES SUBMIT
IMPLEMENTATION PLANS
FOR HEW REVIEW.
\
J
H
STATES ACT TO CONTROL
AIR POLLUTION IN ACCORDANCE
WITH AIR QUALITY STANDARDS
AND PLANS FOR IMPLEMENTATION.
Figure A-l Regional Air Pollution Control Under the Clean
Air Act as Amended.
receptors (people, plants, animals, and materials) exposed
to these pollutants. Major metropolitan areas represent
the highest concentrations of both emitters and receptors,
although the pattern of receptors affected by pollution
will vary according to local meteorological conditions.
In defining the physical or engineering factors of an air
quality control region, NAPCA uses input data on pollu-
tant emissions and meteorological factors. An emission
inventory is prepared for the given area listing all major
sources, types of pollutants, and quantities emitted under
various climatological conditions. (Pollutants presently
being considered include sulfur oxides, suspended particu-
late matter, and carbon monoxide.) The input for meteor-
ological factors includes seasonal data on the inversion
layer, wind direction, and wind velocity for the area.
The statistical distribution of environmental factors and
the natural diffusion characteristics of the given pollu-
tants are also considered.
On the basis of all of the above data, average annual ground
level concentrations of each pollutant during each season
are computed, and an output is obtained in the form of a
plot of contour lines defining equal pollutant concentra-
tions within the geographic area. The extent of the
regional pollution problem may then be readily determined.
-------
Through analysis of these pollutant-concentration plots
and their relation to urban and political boundaries,
NAPCA defines an air quality control region for the given
area. A number of control regions have been established
by NAPCA on the basis of these studies, including those
for the metropolitan areas listed in Appendix B.
(b) Air Quality Criteria. The Department of Health, Education
and Welfare is responsible for developing and issuing air
quality criteria. These criteria are to be based on
.current analyses of the adverse effects of specific air
pollutants and combinations of pollutants on man and his
environment. Although the evidence in the criteria docu-
ments will not necessarily be based precisely on levels
of exposure below which there are no adverse effects,
they will nonetheless provide quantitative guidance to
the States for establishment of regional air quality
standards. The documents on sulfur oxide and particulate
matter criteria indicate the following:
(1) Under the conditions prevailing in areas where the
studies were conducted, adverse health effects were
noted when 24-hour average levels of sulfur dioxide
exceeded 300 yg/m^ (0.11 ppm) for 3 to 4 days. Ad-
verse health effects were also noted when the annual
mean level of sulfur dioxide exceeded 115 yg/m^ (0.04
ppm). Visibility reduction to about 5 miles was
observed at 285 yg/m-' (0.12 ppm); and adverse
effects on vegetation were observed at an annual
mean of 85 yg/rn^ (0.03 ppm). It is reasonable
and prudent to conclude that, in the promulgation
of ambient air quality standards, consideration
should be given to requirements for margins of
safety which would take into account long-term
effects on health, vegetation, and materials oc-
curring below the above levels [Air Quality Cri-
teria, SO ].
x
(2) Under the conditions prevailing in areas where the
studies were conducted, adverse health effects were
noted when the annual mean level of particulate mat-
ter exceeded 80 yg/m . Visibility reduction to about
5 miles was observed at 150 yg/rn-^, and adverse effects
on materials were observed at an annual mean exceeding
60 yg/m^. It is reasonable and prudent to conclude
that, in the promulgation of ambient air quality
standards, consideration should be given to require-
ments for margins of safety which would take into
account long-term effects on health and materials
occurring below the above levels [Air Quality Cri-
teria, Particulates].
-------
(c) Control Techniques. For each of the pollutants covered by
a criteria document, the Department of Health, Education
and Welfare issues a report on control techniques. These
reports provide engineering handbook information on the
physical characteristics, operating characteristics, and
cost characteristics of control measures. From these
documents, control cost-effectiveness information can be
obtained for control devices, such as precipitators and
fabric filters, or nondevice control measures, such as
the use of low-sulfur-content fuels or alterations to basic
industrial processes which lessen pollutant emissions
[Control, SO ; Control, Particulates].
X
(d) Air Quality Standards. Air quality standards, developed
on the basis of the air quality criteria, are goals es-
tablished by the States for the protection of public health
and welfare. They provide the States with a basis for
controlling existing sources of pollution emissions and
preventing future regional growth from adding to the pol-
lution problem. These goals are stated in the form of
desired limits on the level of each particular air pollu-
tant. The goals may reflect more than one air quality
standard, specifying both minimum air quality level and
higher levels of air quality. The goals must also pre-
clude the possibility of significant deterioration in
existing air quality levels.
(e) Implementation Planning. Implementation plans are blue-
prints for establishing and maintaining air quality stand-
ards. The major elements of a plan include:
Information on existing source emission and air
quality data
Control plan for achieving ambient air quality
standards
Emergency episode authority and procedures
Programs for monitoring air quality and emissions
from sources
Description of required legal authority
Description of resources required by the plan.
-------
-------
APPENDIX B
CENTRAL CITIES OF THE AIR QUALITY CONTROL REGIONS
The regions listed in this appendix are not in the order of their
original designation, but are in the order presented in the "Guidelines
for the Development of Air Quality Standards and Implementation Plans" and
a Department of Health, Education and Welfare news release dated April 5,
1970.
1. Washington, D. C.
2. New York
3. Chicago
4. Philadelphia
5. Denver
6. Los Angeles
7. St. Louis
8. Boston
9. Cincinnati
10. San Francisco
11. Cleveland
12. Pittsburgh
13. Buffalo
14. Kansas City
15. Detroit
16. Baltimore
17. Hartford
18. Indianapolis
19. Minneapolis - St. Paul
20. Milwaukee
21. Providence
22. Seattle - Tacoma
23. Louisville
24. Dayton
25. Phoenix
26. Houston
27. Dallas - Ft. Worth
28. San Antonio
29. Birmingham
30. Toledo
31. Steubenville
32. Chattanooga
33. Atlanta
34. Memphis
35. Portland, Oregon
36. Salt Lake City
37. New Orleans
38. Miami
39. Oklahoma City
40. Omaha
41. Honolulu
42. Beaumont - Port Arthur
43. Charlotte, N. C.
44. Portland, Maine
45. Albuquerque
46. Lawrence - Lowell - Manchester
47. El Paso
48. Las Vegas
49. Fargo - Moorhead
50. Boise
51. Billings
52. Sioux Falls
53. Cheyenne
54. Anchorage
55. Burlington
56. San Juan
57. Virgin Islands
58. Allentown - Bethlehem - Easton
(Pa.) - Phillipsburg (N.J.)
59. Binghamton (N.Y.) - (Pa.)
-------
60. Bristol (Va.) - Johnson City - Kingsport (Tenn.)
61. Columbus (Ga.) - Phonix City (Ala.)
62. Cumberland (Md.) - Keyser (W. Va.)
63. Duluth (Minn.) - Superior (Wise.)
64. Erie (Pa.) - Ashtabula (Ohio)
65. Evansville (Ind.) - Owensboro - Henderson (Ky.)
66. Florence (Ala.) - (Miss.) - (Tenn.)
67. Fort Smith (Ark.) - (Okla.)
68. Huntington (W. Va.) - Ashland (Ky.) - Portsmouth - Ironton (Ohio)
69. Joplin (Mo.) - Miami (Okla.)
70. LaCrosse (Wise.) - Winona (Minn.)
71. Menominee - Escanaba (Mich.) - Marinette (Wise.)
72. Mobile (Ala.) - Pensacola (Fla.) - Biloxi - Gulfport (Miss.)
73. Paducah (Ky.) - Metropolis (111.)
74. Parkersburg (W. Va.) - Marietta (Ohio)
75. Rockford (111.) - Janesville - Beloit (Wise.)
76. Sequatchie River Valley (Ala.) - (Tenn.)
77. South Bend - Elkhart (Ind.) - Benton Harbor (Mich.)
78. Youngstown - Warren (Ohio) - Sharon (Pa.)
79. Augusta (Ga.) - Aiken (S. C.)
80. Berlin (N. H.) - Rumford (Me.)
81. Davenport (Iowa) - Rock Island - Moline (111.)
82. Douglas (Ariz.) - Lordsburg (N. M.)
83. Dubuque (Iowa) - (111.) - (Wise.)
84. Keokuk (Iowa) - (111.) - (Wise.)
85. Lewiston - Moscow (Idaho) - Clarkston - Pullman (Wash.)
86. Norfolk (Va.) - Elizabeth City (N. C.)
87. Savannah (Ga.) - Beauford (S. C.)
88. Shreveport (La.) - Texarkana (Tex.) - (Ark.)
89. Sioux City (Iowa) - (Neb.)
90. Spokane (Wash.) - Coeur d'Alene (Idaho)
91. Vicksburg (Miss.) - Tallulah (La.)
-------
-------
APPENDIX C
REGIONAL AIR POLLUTION CONTROL DIRECTORS, NAPCA
(July 10, 1970)
REGION 1 Connecticut, Maine, Massachusetts, New Hampshire, Rhode Island,
Vermont
John F. Kennedy Federal Building
Boston, Massachusetts 02203
Phone: 617-223-6883 or 223-6339
REGION 2 New Jersey, New York, Puerto Rico, Virgin Islands
Federal Office Building
26 Federal Plaza (Foley Square)
New York, New York 10007
Phone: 212-264-2517
REGION 3 Delaware, District of Columbia, Maryland, Pennsylvania, Virginia,
West Virginia
Post Office Box 12900
401 N. Broad Street
Philadelphia, Pennsylvania 19108
Phone: 215-597-9154
REGION 4 Alabama, Florida, Georgia, Mississippi, Kentucky, North Carolina,
South Carolina, Tennessee
50 Seventh Street, N. E., Room 404
Atlanta, Georgia 30323
Phone: 404-526-3043
REGION 5 Illinois, Indiana, Minnesota, Michigan, Ohio, Wisconsin
New Post Office Building, Room 712
433 West Van Buren Street
Chicago, Illinois 60607
Phone: 312-353-6942
REGION 6 Arkansas, Louisiana, New Mexico, Oklahoma, Texas
Room 1414, 1114 Commerce Street
Dallas, Texas 75202
Phone: 214-749-3989 or 749-3980
REGION 7 Iowa, Kansas, Missouri, Nebraska
601 East 12th Street
Kansas City, Missouri 64106
Phone: 816-374-3791
-------
REGION 8 Colorado, Montana, North Dakota, South Dakota, Utah, Wyoming
Federal Office Building, Room 9017
Denver, Colorado 80202
Phone: 303-297-4682
REGION 9 Arizona, California, Hawaii, Nevada, Guam, American Samoa
Federal Office Building
50 Fulton Street
San Francisco, California 94102
Phone: 415-556-1105
REGION 10 Washington, Oregon, Idaho, Alaska
Arcade Building
1319 Second Avenue
Seattle, Washington 98101
Phone: 206-583-0530 or 0522
------- |